xpanel designer users - anaheim automation

© 2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

CIMON-Xpanel

Note:To change the product logo for your own print manual orPDF, click "Tools > Manual Designer" and modify theprint manual template.

Title page 1Use this page to introduce the product

by KDT SYSTEMS Co.,LTD.

This is "Title Page 1" - you may use this page tointroduce your product, show title, author, copyright,company logos, etc.

This page intentionally starts on an odd page, so that itis on the right half of an open book from the readerspoint of view. This is the reason why the previous pagewas blank (the previous page is the back side of thecover)

All rights reserved. No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means - graphic, electronic,or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, or information storage and retrieval systems -without the written permission of the publisher.

Products that are referred to in this document may be either trademarks and/or registered trademarks of therespective owners. The publisher and the author make no claim to these trademarks.

While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document, the publisher and the authorassume no responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from the use of informationcontained in this document or from the use of programs and source code that may accompany it. In no eventshall the publisher and the author be liable for any loss of profit or any other commercial damage caused oralleged to have been caused directly or indirectly by this document.

Printed: 8월 2012 in (whereever you are located)

CIMON-Xpanel


PublisherSpecial thanks to:

All the people who contributed to this document, to mum anddad and grandpa, to my sisters and brothers and mothers inlaw, to our secretary Kathrin, to the graphic artist who createdthis great product logo on the cover page (sorry, don'tremember your name at the moment but you did a great work),to the pizza service down the street (your daily Capricciosassaved our lives), to the copy shop where this document will beduplicated, and and and...

Last not least, we want to thank EC Software who wrote thisgreat help tool called HELP & MANUAL which printed thisdocument.

Managing Editor

Technical Editors

Cover Designer

...enter name...

...enter name...

...enter name...

...enter name...

...enter name...

Production

...enter name...

Team Coordinator

...enter name...

CIMON-Xpanel4


Table of Contents

Foreword 11

Part I Welcome to CIMON-Xpanel 13

Part II XPanelDesigner Update : V2.23 16

Part III Ethernet Loader 24

................................................................................................................................... 241 How to use Ethernet Loader

................................................................................................................................... 262 How to update Ethernet Loader

.......................................................................................................................................................... 26V2.10

Part IV Installation Guide 32

................................................................................................................................... 321 Essential Safaty Precautions

................................................................................................................................... 342 General Safety Precautions

................................................................................................................................... 363 Package Contents

................................................................................................................................... 374 Specification

................................................................................................................................... 385 Installation / Dimensions

................................................................................................................................... 416 Interfaces

................................................................................................................................... 447 Wiring

................................................................................................................................... 458 Developing Environment Setup

Part V SYSTEM Overview 53

................................................................................................................................... 531 Peripherals

................................................................................................................................... 542 Network

................................................................................................................................... 553 Xpanel Designer

................................................................................................................................... 564 Xpanel Unit

Part VI Configuration Tools 60

................................................................................................................................... 601 System Log : System Activity Log

................................................................................................................................... 612 Comm. Monitor : Communication Frame Monitor

................................................................................................................................... 623 Comm. Config : Communication Port Configruation

................................................................................................................................... 664 Misc. Config : Miscellaneous Configurations

................................................................................................................................... 675 Touch Calibrate : Touch Panel Calibration

................................................................................................................................... 686 Screen Capture : Make a Screen Snapshot

................................................................................................................................... 687 Date/Time : Adjust the System Clock

................................................................................................................................... 698 SW Keyboard : Pops-Up the Software Keyboard

................................................................................................................................... 699 Printer : Printer Setup

................................................................................................................................... 7310 System Shutdown

5Contents

5


................................................................................................................................... 7411 Exit

Part VII Xpanel Designer 76

................................................................................................................................... 761 How to download project data

................................................................................................................................... 862 Xpanel Designer Installing and Running

................................................................................................................................... 873 Xpanel Designer menu

................................................................................................................................... 914 Project setup and download

Part VIII TAG Database 97

................................................................................................................................... 971 Overview

................................................................................................................................... 982 Database Window

................................................................................................................................... 993 How to use Database

................................................................................................................................... 1034 Group TAG

................................................................................................................................... 1045 Digital TAG

................................................................................................................................... 1046 Analog TAG

................................................................................................................................... 1077 String TAG

................................................................................................................................... 1088 Database edit using EXCEL

Part IX I/O Device 113

................................................................................................................................... 1131 I/O Device Basic

................................................................................................................................... 1142 I/O Device Ethernet

................................................................................................................................... 1173 I/O Device Serial

Part X Alarm 122

................................................................................................................................... 1221 Alarm Group

................................................................................................................................... 1232 Alarm Configuration

................................................................................................................................... 1283 Alarm Summary

Part XI Graphic Page Editor 134

................................................................................................................................... 1351 Page Properties

................................................................................................................................... 1392 Frame Editor

................................................................................................................................... 1433 Library

.......................................................................................................................................................... 144Wizard Object

.......................................................................................................................................................... 155User Library

................................................................................................................................... 1584 Object Properties

.......................................................................................................................................................... 160Style

.......................................................................................................................................................... 161Visible

.......................................................................................................................................................... 162Blink

.......................................................................................................................................................... 162V-Size

.......................................................................................................................................................... 163H-Size

.......................................................................................................................................................... 164V-Move

.......................................................................................................................................................... 165H-Move

.......................................................................................................................................................... 167Color

CIMON-Xpanel6


.......................................................................................................................................................... 167Rotate

.......................................................................................................................................................... 169Touch

.......................................................................................................................................................... 171EntryData

.......................................................................................................................................................... 172Switch/Lamp

Part XII Keypad Page 185

................................................................................................................................... 1851 Make Keypad Page

Part XIII Key Input Window 189

................................................................................................................................... 1891 Key Input Setting

Part XIV Data Logging 193

................................................................................................................................... 1931 Data Logging Configuration

................................................................................................................................... 1972 Using Data Logging

Part XV Data Bridge 200

................................................................................................................................... 2001 Edit Data Bridge Model

Part XVI Modbus Slave 206

................................................................................................................................... 2071 Modbus Slave Setting

Part XVII Recipe 212

................................................................................................................................... 2131 Model Configuration

................................................................................................................................... 2172 Recipe Operator Interface

Part XVIII System Memory 221

................................................................................................................................... 2211 Using System Memory Tag

................................................................................................................................... 2232 Example of using system memory about opened page log.

................................................................................................................................... 2303 Editing recipe data using system memory

Part XIX Trend 238

................................................................................................................................... 2381 YT Trend

................................................................................................................................... 2452 Scope Trend

................................................................................................................................... 2513 SPC Trend

................................................................................................................................... 2584 ST Trend

................................................................................................................................... 2655 LOG Trend

................................................................................................................................... 2716 XY Trend

Part XX String Editor 280

................................................................................................................................... 2801 String Construction

Part XXI Using Multiple Language 287

................................................................................................................................... 2871 Multiple Language setup

7Contents

7


................................................................................................................................... 2902 Multiple language string display

................................................................................................................................... 2923 Using Multiple Language (Change the displayed language by

using multiple language table)

Part XXII Network Data Server 299

................................................................................................................................... 2991 Data Definition in Xpanel

................................................................................................................................... 3002 The Configuration of CIMON SCADA

Part XXIII Security 306

................................................................................................................................... 3061 User Registration

................................................................................................................................... 3082 Access Privilege

................................................................................................................................... 3103 User LogOn / LogOff

Part XXIV Script 313

................................................................................................................................... 3131 Structure of Program

................................................................................................................................... 3172 Operator

................................................................................................................................... 3193 Scripts for command and condition

................................................................................................................................... 3214 Statements

.......................................................................................................................................................... 322IF-ELSE Statement

.......................................................................................................................................................... 322WHILE/DO-WHILE Statement

.......................................................................................................................................................... 323FOR Statement

.......................................................................................................................................................... 323SWITCH-CASE Statement

.......................................................................................................................................................... 324GOTO Statement

.......................................................................................................................................................... 324CONTINUE Keyword

.......................................................................................................................................................... 325RETURN Keyword

.......................................................................................................................................................... 326RUNSCRIPT Keyword

................................................................................................................................... 3265 Internal Functions

.......................................................................................................................................................... 331PageOpen(S1)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 331FrameOpen(S1)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 332StringTable(R1, R2)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 332GetTime(R1)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 333TimeStr(R1, S2)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 333RunApp(S1, S2)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 334MakeCsv(S1, R2)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 335MakeCsvUsb(S1, R2)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 335MakeLogCsv(S1,R2,R3)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 336DataLog(S1, R2)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 337RcpDownload(R1)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 337RcpUpload(R1)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 338RcpStop(S1)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 338RcpFileStore(S1, R2)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 339RcpFileRead(S1, R2)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 339RcpMemDown(S1)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 339RcpMemUp(S1)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 340RcpCsvRd(S1, S2, R3)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 341RcpCsvWr(S1, S2, R3)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 342RcpConfig()

.......................................................................................................................................................... 343TrendCsvWr(S1, R2)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 344ScrCapture(S1, R2)

CIMON-Xpanel8


.......................................................................................................................................................... 345Sleep(R1)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 345HardCopy()

.......................................................................................................................................................... 345OpenPort(R1, R2, R3, R4, R5)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 346ClosePort(R1)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 347SendByte(R1, R2)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 347SendString(R1, S2)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 348ReceiveByte(R1, R2)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 349StrToNum(S1, R2)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 350NumToStr(R1 , R2 , S3)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 351LogOn(S1, S2)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 352LogOff()

.......................................................................................................................................................... 352LogOnWin()

.......................................................................................................................................................... 353GetSecurity()

.......................................................................................................................................................... 353OpenConfigWin()

.......................................................................................................................................................... 354SoftKeyboard(R1,R2,R3)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 355AlarmPrint(R1,R2,R3,R4,R5)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 356AlarmCsvWr(R1,S2,R3,R4,R5)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 357TouchCalib()

.......................................................................................................................................................... 358ClearAlarmLog(R1)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 358AddMessage(R1, S2)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 359RemoveMessage(R1)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 359RcpGetSysMem(S1, R2)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 360RcpSetSysMem(S1, R2)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 361GetSysMem(R1)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 362SysMemMove (R1)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 363SysMemFill(R1,R2,R3)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 363LcdBrightUp()

.......................................................................................................................................................... 363LcdBrightDown()

.......................................................................................................................................................... 364LcdBacklight(R1)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 364StaticBeepCtrl(R1)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 365SetSpeed(R1)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 365SetDate(R1,R2,R3)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 365SetTime(R1)

Part XXV Scroll Message 368

................................................................................................................................... 3691 Scroll Message Configuration

................................................................................................................................... 3702 Apply Scroll Message

Part XXVI Indirect Address 375

................................................................................................................................... 3761 Using Indirect Tag

Part XXVII Communication Driver 382

................................................................................................................................... 3831 ASIC Protocol

................................................................................................................................... 3892 Barcode Scanner

................................................................................................................................... 3943 Danfoss VLT Automation Drive FC300

................................................................................................................................... 4064 DELTA TAU PMAC

................................................................................................................................... 4125 FATEK PLC(Serial)

................................................................................................................................... 4196 FATEK PLC(Ethernet)

................................................................................................................................... 4287 HITACHI Inverter SJ300/L300P

9Contents

9


................................................................................................................................... 4378 KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-PLC HMI (RS232C/RS422A)

................................................................................................................................... 4459 KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-PLC Loader (RS232C/RS422A)

................................................................................................................................... 45310 KDT Systems Xpanel Master

................................................................................................................................... 45911 Keyence KV Mode

................................................................................................................................... 46412 KOYO DirectNet

................................................................................................................................... 46913 LSIS GLOFA Cnet

................................................................................................................................... 47714 LSIS GLOFA Enet

................................................................................................................................... 48415 LSIS GLOFA Loader

................................................................................................................................... 48916 LSIS XGT Cnet

................................................................................................................................... 49717 LSIS XGT Enet

................................................................................................................................... 50418 LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Loader

................................................................................................................................... 50919 LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Cnet

................................................................................................................................... 51520 LSIS Master-K H Series PLC Cnet

................................................................................................................................... 52121 LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Enet

................................................................................................................................... 52922 LSIS Inverter Starvert

................................................................................................................................... 53323 MITSUBISHI Inverter FR-E500

................................................................................................................................... 53624 MITSUBISHI Melsec 1C (ACPU, AnA/AnU CPU)

................................................................................................................................... 54625 MITSUBISHI Melsec 3E(Q/QnA)

................................................................................................................................... 55126 MITSUBISHI Melsec 1E

................................................................................................................................... 55727 MITSUBISHI Melsec 3E ASCII

................................................................................................................................... 56328 MITSUBISHI Melsec A Series (Programming Port)

................................................................................................................................... 56829 MITSUBISHI Melsec FX Series

................................................................................................................................... 57330 MITSUBISHI Melsec FX Series (Programming Port)

................................................................................................................................... 57831 MITSUBISHI Melsec Q Series (Programming Port)

................................................................................................................................... 58632 MITSUBISHI Melsec FX2N-10/20GM(Programming Port)

................................................................................................................................... 59133 MODBUS RTU protocl

................................................................................................................................... 59634 MODBUS TCP protocl

................................................................................................................................... 60135 NAIS PLC FP Series (MEWTOCOL-COM)

................................................................................................................................... 60636 OMRON HostLink

................................................................................................................................... 61237 OMRON FINS Ethernet

................................................................................................................................... 62738 PGuard(Serial)

................................................................................................................................... 63139 SAIA S-BUS

................................................................................................................................... 63940 SICK RFID Reader Enet

................................................................................................................................... 64841 SIEMENS RK512/3964R

................................................................................................................................... 65442 SIEMENS S7 Ethernet

................................................................................................................................... 65943 SIEMENS S7 MPI

................................................................................................................................... 66544 SIEMENS S7 PPI Direct

................................................................................................................................... 67245 YOKOGAWA Personal Computer Link

................................................................................................................................... 68046 Fuji Micrex SX Ethernet

CIMON-Xpanel10


................................................................................................................................... 68847 ALLENBRADLEY DF1

................................................................................................................................... 69448 METRONIX APD

................................................................................................................................... 70349 FARA N70/700 PLUS

................................................................................................................................... 70750 Samsung BRAIN SPC Series

Part XXVIII FAQ 714

................................................................................................................................... 7141 Xpanel Page Update and Speed

................................................................................................................................... 7192 Xpanel IP Setting

................................................................................................................................... 7243 How to use Xpanel Printer

................................................................................................................................... 7294 How can I connect Xpanel and XpanelDesigner via USB port

under Windows Vista?

................................................................................................................................... 7305 How can I display the engineering value from the raw value in my

device?

................................................................................................................................... 7326 How can I export/import the Xpanel's TAG DB to/from Microsoft

Excel or other 3rd vender program?

................................................................................................................................... 7347 Corrective Actions when font file delete is failed during download

................................................................................................................................... 7378 When Ethernet Loader is not operated

Index 747

Foreword

This is just another title pageplaced between table of

contents and topics

11Foreword


Top Level IntroThis page is printed before anew top-level chapter starts

Part

I

Welcome to CIMON-Xpanel 13


1 Welcome to CIMON-Xpanel

CIMON-Xpanel Windows CE based New Touch

· Embedding-High perfomance

mobile CPU (PXA255 400MHz)

· High color graphic display

(65536 colors)

· Various external data

interfaces (USB, SD memory)

· The best HMI panel for various

industrial automation

applications

· Powerful device

communication : 1 Ethernet, 2

RS232/RS422/RS485

· Sufficient internal memory for

large scale HMI system

· High resolution 4wire resistive

touch screen

Xpanel Designer Easy and powerful design tool

· Fast data downloading by USB

· Supports high color graphic image(up to 16 bits)

· Supports animation GIF format

· Frame function provides easy solution for simultaneous displaying multiple monitoring pages

· Tag database can be exported (imported) to (from) MS EXCEL

· Alarm function supports acknowledge mechanism and historical reviewing of designated group

· Provides various graphic wizard object which make easy to link TAG and graphic object

· Logged data by data-logger function can be visualized by trend object

· Provides C-style script language and various embedded sub-routines for flexible design

See :

· Installation Guide

· SYSTEM Overview

· Data Logger

· Recipe

· Network Data Server

· Security

CIMON-Xpanel14


· Configuration Tools

· Xpanel Designer

· TAG Database

· Graphic Page Editor

· System Memory

· Trend

· String Editor

· Using Multiple Language

· Script

· Communication Driver

· FAQ


Part

II

CIMON-Xpanel16


2 XPanelDesigner Update : V2.23

XpanelDesigner v2.23 has updated functions as following.• Recipe Function upgraded

n “Group” editing function in “Recipe Config” window is addedn “Item name” editing function in “Recipe Config” window is addedn “GetRcpDnGrout()” script which can bring Data group name that downloaded last is

addedn Even if Recipe starting tag is not Float type, decimal point can be written in Xpanel

Designer.• Data logging function upgraded

n String tag logging function is added.n Block is made continuously and automatically in case of that ‘Start Type’ is ‘Enable Tag’n Data Log object indicates current block number.n Page Up and Page Down buttons are added in Data Log object.

• CSV file name of Log Trend is modified.• New Xpanel(XT04CD, XT07CD, XT10CD, XT12CD, XT15CD) Dimming Time Control

function is added• Communication driver is added.

n OMRON CS/CJ Series FINS Ethernet Comm. Driver is added.• Time for Loading project becomes short.

[Recipe]

• It is available to change Group name without downloading project again to Xpanel if you touch“Group” at Recipe config window.

< Recipe Config window >

XPanelDesigner Update : V2.23 17


< Group name edit >

< Group name changed >

• If you want to change Item name without downloading project file to Xpanel, double touchitem name.

CIMON-Xpanel18


< Item name edit >

< Write the name >



< Item Name changed >

• “GetRcpDnGrout()” script is used to bring Data group name of Recipe model which isdownloaded last.

< Instruction: Tag which will receive string value = GetRcpDnGroup(“Recipe model name”); >

CIMON-Xpanel20


< If you click No.1, Group name which is downloaded last will be displayed at No.2>

• Even if “Recipe Area Starting Position” is not “Float type”, decimal point can be written in Dataarea.

[Data Logging]

• Data Logging supports string tag collection. When you register tag in Data Logging, select



string tag. “MakeLogCsv()” script is used to print out Text file format from collected string tagvalue.

* String is displayed as (“-“) at Scope Trand and Data Logging object. If you convert itto excel file, you can see string value as above picture column E, F and G.

• Block is made continuously and automatically if ‘Start Type’ is ‘Enable Tag’ and block data isfull already.

• Current data block number is displayed in Data Logging object as below picture.

< Data logging object>• In order to control Data Logging object, “Page Up” and “Page Down” are added.

n Page Up : to previous pagen Page Down : Move to next page

[LogTrend]

• The CSV file name from Log Trend is modified. The CSV file name is generated as formatlike “Year, Month, Date, Hour, Minute and Second.CSV”.

CIMON-Xpanel22



Part

III

CIMON-Xpanel24


3 Ethernet Loader

Ethernet loder is an embedded program in xpanel to up/download projects via enthernet and supportthe project update with an USB.

3.1 How to use Ethernet Loader


Xpanel IP Setting

Touch the new setting parts of (1).

Delete contents by the key ‘BS’ of (2) and

input others to change using number key.

Click the [Apply this new setting] of (3).

Project Update

Click - [Online] -> [Copy Project To

Removable Memory]

(Refer to the manual "How to download the

project")

Connect this USB to Xpanel.

Click - [Update project from removable

storage] .

"Project Update" is displayed.

Ethernet Loader 25


Click - [Refresh]

Project list is displayed to (4).

Click the Project of (4) and [Project update]

of (3).

Project Update content is displayed to (5).

The massage [All file update: OK] is displayed

as it completes.

Close the page [Project update] by clicking

‘X’

Remove the USB and practice the Project

update into the Xpanel.

Watchdog

It is a function to automatically reset the software when project data is failure.

It is supported the enthernet loader 1.4 version. Download the xpaneldesigner v2.10 version or late.

Click the [Confige] to Ethernet Loader.

Check-mark the [Watchdog Time(Sec)]

checkbox.

When you change the set time, choose (3)

and change it using the buttons ‘Up’ and ‘Down’ of

(4). Its range is from 10 to 65535.

Click the [OK] to Confige.

CIMON-Xpanel26


3.2 How to update Ethernet Loader


3.2.1 V2.10

Only in online ( USB, Ethernet)

1. Practice the XpanelDesigner V2.10.

2. Open a project or make a new project.

3. Click - [Online] -> [Setup Link]

4. Click - [Online] -> [Upgrade XPANEL Application Program]

5. Move to Xpanel as it completes

6. Close the project on the page ‘Xpanel Config’ if it is running.

Ethernet Loader 27


7. Close the Ethernet Loader.

8. Two touch the [My Device] of this screen.

9. Two touch the [Xpanel]

CIMON-Xpanel28


10. Two touch the [Bin] file.

11. Touch the [Eldr.exe] file. [Edit] -> [Copy].

Ethernet Loader 29


12. Move to the 'Xpanel' by .

CIMON-Xpanel30


13. [Edi t ] -> [Paste]. Touch the "Yes" in the [Confirm File Replace].

14. Practice Ethernet loader.

15. Check its version for a normal update.


Part

IV

CIMON-Xpanel32


4 Installation Guide

Read the manual before you operate the Xpanel.

Xpanel Installation Guide

· Essential Safaty Precautions

· General Safety Precautions

· Package Contents

· Specification

· Installation / Dimensions

· Interfaces

· Wiring

· Developing Environment Setup

4.1 Essential Safaty Precautions

WARNING

System Design

· Do not create Xpanel graphic objects that could possibly endanger the safety of equipment and personnel.

Damaged Xpanel provides signal output ON or OFF continuously, can cause an major accident. We

recommend you to design the monitoring circuits by limit

switch to detect incorrect device movement.

· Do not create the Xpanel graphic objects to control the safe operation of device (Such as an emergency

stop).

The switches to control the safe operation of device should be installed separately.

· Design your system properly to remove communication function error between the Xpanel and the

controller of a device.

· Do not use the Xpanel as a warning device for critical alarms that can cause serious operator injury,

machine damage or production stoppage.

· Xpanel is not appropriate to use in places require extremely high stability and reliability such as aircraft

Installation Guide 33


control device, aerospace equipments, central trunk data transmission (communication) devices, unclear

power control devices, or medical life support equipment.

· Proper stability and reliability are especially required for medical usages and that system should be

designed to alternate or replacement except transportation vehicles (trains, cars and ships), diaster and

crime prevention devices, various type of safety equipment, non-life support related medical devices, etc.

· Even if the backlight of the Xpanel burns out, the Xpanel is still operating in device. If operator touched the

front panel without this concern, the device meght be failure and cause malfunction. For this reason, we do

not recommend the use of Xpanel graphic objects to control device such as emergency stop switches for

prohibiting the accident or device damage.

· Whe LCD backlight suddenly turns off, please follow the procedure to confirm whether the backlight was

burned out.

Step1. Check the "standby Mode On" set and screen for images.

Step2. LCD touch available on the screen against set "standby Mode On" running.

Installation

· Please do not disassemble Xpanel. An electric shock can happen when the high-voltage goes through

inside.

· Please do not modify the Xpanel unit, It cause fire or electric shock.

· Do not use the Xpanel at place flammable gases, It causes explosion.

Wiring

· To prevent an electric shock, confirm that the power certainly turned-off from Xpanel for connecting

others.

· Do not use power beyond the specified voltage range of the Xpanel. Doing so may cause a fire or an

electric shock.

Maintenance

· The Xpanel uses a lithium battery to back up the internal clock data. If the battery is incorrectly built-in,

then the battery exploded.

To prevent this, please do not replace the battery by yourself. When the battery needs to be replaced,

please contact your local service center.

CAUTIONS

CIMON-Xpanel34


Installation

· Be sure to securely connect all cable connectors to the Xpanel. A loose connection may cause incorrect

input or output.

Wiring

· Ground the FG line of the Xpanel separately from FG lines of other units. Putting these FG lines too

close may cause an electric shock or unit malfunction.

Be sure to use a grounding resistance of 100Ω or less and a 2 or thicker wire, or applicable standard

of your country.

· Correctly wire the Xpanel, be sure that the rated voltage and terminal layout are within the designated

range. If the voltage supplied differs

from the rated voltage, or incorrect wiring or grounding is performed, it may cause a fire or unit

malfunction.

· Use only the designated torque to tighten terminal block screws of the Xpanel.

If these screws are not tightened firmly, it may cause a short circuit, fire or Xpanel malfunction.

· Be careful that the metal filings and wiring debris do not fall into the Xpanel, since they can cause a fire,

Xpanel malfunction or incorrect operation.

Maintenance

· The LCD contains a powerful irritant and if for any reason the panel is damaged and this liquid contacts

any part of your body, be sure to wash

that area with running water for 15 minutes. If any of this liquid enters your eye, flush your eye for 15

minutes with running water and contact a physician.

Unit Disposal

· When this unit is disposed of, it should be done so according to your country’s regulation for similar

types of industrial waste.

4.2 General Safety Precautions

1. Do not strike the touch panel with a hard or pointed object, or press on the touch panel with too much

force,

since it may damage the touch panel or the display.



2. Do not install the Xpanel where the ambient temperature can exceed the allowed range.

Doing so may cause the Xpanel to malfunction or shorten its operation life.

3. Do not restrict or limit naturally occurring rear-face ventilation of the Xpanel, or storing or using the Xpanel

in an

environment that is too hot.

4. Do not use the Xpanel in areas where large, sudden temperature changes can occur.

These changes can cause condensation to form inside the unit, possibly causing the unit to malfunction.

5. Do not allow water, liquids, metal or charged particles to enter inside the Xpanel, since they can cause

either a Xpanel malfunction

or an electrical shock. The allowable pollution degree is 2.

6. Do not store or use the Xpanel in direct sunlight, or in excessively dusty or dirty environments.

7. Do not store or use the Xpanel where strong jolting or excessive vibration can occur.

8. Do not store or use the Xpanel where chemicals (such as organic solvents, etc.) and acids can evaporate,

or where chemicals and acids are present in the air.

9. Do not use paint thinner or organic solvents to clean the Xpanel.

10. Do not store or operate the LCD display in areas receiving direct sunlight, since the sun's UV rays may cause

the LCD display’s

quality to deteriorate.

11. If you store the Xpanel in areas where the temperature is lower than allowed level, the liquid of the LCD will

congeal and the LCD can

be damage. Conversely, if the storage area’s temperature becomes higher than the allowed level, the liquid

of the LCD will become

isotropic, causing irreversible damage to the LCD. Therefore, be sure to store the panel only in areas where

temperatures are within

those specified in this manual.

12. After turning the Xpanel OFF, be sure to wait a few seconds before turning it ON again. If the Xpanel started

too soon,

CIMON-Xpanel36


it may not start up correctly.

13. Due to the possibility of unexpected accidents, you must back up the project data of the Xpanel regularly.

4.3 Package Contents

The following items are contained in the package of the Xpanel.

Before using the Xpanel, please confirm that all items listed here are present.

· Xpanel Unit · Fastener: 8 ea

· 5P Connector (XT05,XT06,XT10,XT12) · Installation Guide

· CD · Power Plug (XT04 & XT07)

v This unit has been carefully packed, with special attention to quality.

However, should you find anything damaged or missing, please contact your local Xpanel distributor

immediately.



4.4 Specification

[XT12CB / XT10CB / XT07CB / XT06CB / XT05SB / XT05MB / XT04CA ]

Model CM-XT12CB-A CM-XT10CB-ACM-XT10CB-

D CM-XT07CB-D CM-XT06CB-ACM-XT06CB-

D

LCD SIZE 12.1 inch 10.1 inch 7 inch Wide 6.5 inch

LCD TYPE TFT Color TFT Color TFT Color TFT Color

Colors 262K Colors 262K Colors 16.7M Colors 65,536 Colors

Resolution SVGA 800×600 SVGA 800×600 WVGA 800×480 VGA 640×480

Backlight CCFL CCFL LED CCFL

Luminance 400 cd / 400 cd / 350 cd / 400 cd /

Touch Panel 4 wire registive 4 wire registive 4 wire registive 4 wire registive

Memory 128MB SDRAM 128MB SDRAM 64MB SDRAM 64MB SDRAM

storage 1 GB 1 GB 32MB Flash 32MB Flash

COM1 RS-232/422/485 RS-232/422/485 RS-232 RS-232

COM2 RS-232 RS-232 RS-422/485 RS-422/485

Ethernet 10/100 Base-T 10/100 Base-T 10/100 Base-T 10/100 Base-T

USB Host 1 Port 1 Port 1 Port 1 Port

Tool port None None 1 USB Device 1 USB Device

SD CARD 1 Solt 1 Solt 1 Solt None

Rated Voltage AC100~240V AC100~240V DC24V DC24V AC100~240V DC24V

PowerConsumption 20W 19W 6W 8W

OS Windows CE 5.0 Windows CE 5.0 Windows CE 5.0 Windows CE 5.0

Dimension(mm) 330×250×83 280×220×47 185×127×50 206×156×61

Panel Cut(mm) 319×239 267×207 177×119 192×142

ModelCM-XT05SB-A CM-XT05MB-

ACM-XT04CA-D+LAN CM-XT04CA-D

CM-XT05SB-D CM-XT05MB-D

LCD SIZE 5.7 Inch 4.3 inch wide

LCD TYPE Color STN Mono TFT Color

Colors 256 Colors 16 shaded 16.7M colors

Resolution QVGA 320 × 240 WQVGA 480 × 272

Backlight LED LCD

Luminance 350 cd / 200 cd / 300 cd /

Touch Panel 4 wire registive 4 wire registive

CIMON-Xpanel38


Memory 64MB SDRAM 64MB SDRAM

storage 32MB Flash 32MB Flash

COM1 RS-232 RS-232

COM2 RS-422/485 RS-422/485

Ethernet 10/100 Base-T 10/100 Base-T None

USB Host 1 Port 1 Port

Tool port 1 USB device 1 USB device

SD CARD None None

Rated Voltage -A : AC100~240V / -D: DC24V DC24V

PowerConsumption

6W 4W

OS Windows CE 5.0 Windows CE 5.0

Dimension(mm) 206×156×61 128×102×50

Panel Cut(mm) 192×142 120×94

4.5 Installation / Dimensions

[XT12CB / XT10CB / XT07CB / XT06CB / XT05SB / XT05MB / XT04CA ]

CIMON-Xpanel40




4.6 Interfaces

XT10/ XT12 - COM1 : RS-232C

This interface is used to connect the Xpanel to the host (PLC), via an RS-232C cable.

When you use COM1 RS-232C port, you must not use COM1 RS-485/422 port.

Connector Pin No Name Description

1 DCD Data Carrier Detect

2 RD Receive Data

3 TD Transmit Data

4 DTR Data Terminal Ready

5 SG Signal Ground

6 DSR Data Set Ready

7 RTS Request To Send

8 CTS Clear To Send

9 RI Ring Indicator

XT10/XT12 - COM1 : RS-422/485

This interface is used to connect the Xpanel to the host (PLC), via an RS-422/485 cable.

When you use COM1 RS-422/485 port, you must not use COM1 RS-232C port.

CIMON-Xpanel42



1 RDB Receive Data B

2 RDA Receive Data A

3 GND Ground

4 SDB Send Data B

5 SDA Send Data A

If you connect the Xpanel to the host via an RS-485 cable (2wire), you must connect SDA and SDB lines.

The RS-485 of the Xpanel runs under auto toggle mode. To reduce the risk of damaging the RS-422 circuit,

be sure to connect the SG terminal.

XT10/XT12 - COM2 : RS-232C

XT10A and XT12A series units have this interface.

This interface is used to connect the Xpanel to the host (PLC), via an RS-232C cable. You can use pin 2, 3,

5 of this interface.


1

2 RD Receive Data

3 TD Transmit Data

4

5 SG Signal Ground

6

7

8

9

The serial port of the Xpanel is not isolated. When the host(PLC) unit is also not isolated.

Inside the Xpanel unit, the SG (Signal Ground) and FG (Frame Ground) terminals are connected to each

other.

When connecting an external device to the Xpanel with the SG terminal, ensure that no short-circuit loop is

created when you setup the system.

XT04/ XT07 COM1 : RS-232C / COM2 : RS-422/485

This interface is used to connect the xpanel to the host (PLC), via an RS-232C or RS-422/485 cable. COM1

and COM2 shares pins of one 9 DSUB connector.



· If you connect the Xpanel to the host via an RS-485 cable (2wire) you must connect SDA and SDB lines.

· The RS-485 of the Xpanel runs under auto toggle mode.

· To reduce the risk of damaging the RS-422 circuit, be sure to connect the SG terminal.

Ethernet

This interface complies with the IEEE802.3 for Ethernet (10BaseT/100BaseTX).

RJ45 Connector RJ45 Jack

Direct Cable: Host <-> HUB

Cable No Color Color No Cable

1 Orange/W Orange/W 1

2 Orange Orange 2

3 Green/W Green/W 3

4 Blue Blue 4

5 Blue/W Blue/W 5

6 Green Green 6

7 Brown/W Brown/W 7

8 Brown Brown 8

CIMON-Xpanel44


Crossover Cable: Host <-> Host


1 Orange/W Green/W 1

2 Orange Green 2

3 Green/W Orange/W 3

4 Blue Blue 4

5 Blue/W Blue/W 5

6 Green Orange 6

7 Brown/W Brown/W 7

8 Brown Brown 8

4.7 Wiring

WARNINGS

· To avoid an electric shock, when connecting the Xpanel power cord terminals to the power terminal

block,

confirm that the Xpanel power supply is completely turned OFF, via a breaker, or similar unit.

· Since there is no power switch on the Xpanel unit, be sure to attach a breaker-type switch to its power

cord.

Point

· To avoid a short caused by loose ring terminals, be sure to use ring terminals with an

insulating sleeve.

· When the FG terminal is connected, be sure the wire is grounded.

Not grounding the Xpanel unit will result in excess noise and vibration.

Connecting the Xpanel Power Cord

When connecting the power cord, be sure to follow the procedures given below.

· Confirm that the Power Cord is unplugged from the power supply.

· Unscrew the screws from the middle three (3) terminals, align the Ring Terminals and re-attach the

screws.

Point

· Confirm that the ring terminal wires are connected correctly.

· The torque required to tighten these screws is 0.5 to 0.6 N·m.



Power Supply Caution

Please pay special attention to the following instructions when connecting the power cord terminals to the

Xpanel unit.

· If the power supply voltage exceeds the GP's specified range, connect a voltage transformer.

· Between the line and the ground, be sure to use a low noise power supply. If there is still an excessive

amount of noise, connect a noise reducing transformer.

· The power supply cord should not be bundled with or kept close to main circuit lines (high voltage,

high current), or input/output signal lines.

· Connect a surge absorber to handle power surges.

· To reduce noise, make the power cord as short as possible.

Grounding Caution

· When grounding to the rear face FG terminal of the Xpanel, (on the Power Input Terminal Block), be sure

to create an exclusive ground.

· Inside the Xpanel unit, the SG (Signal Ground) and FG (Frame Ground) terminals are connected to each

other.

· When connecting an external device to the Xpanel with the SG terminal, ensure that no short-circuit loop

is created when you setup the system.

4.8 Developing Environment Setup

Install XpanelDesigner

Following procedure assumes that the XPanelDesigner was installed first.

You can find the setup program of XPanelDesigner in CD or internet web page (http://www.kdtsys.com/)

ActiveSync Setup

Install ActiveSync using afforded CD when you purchased Xpanel. If you lost afforded CD, you can

download it by internet.

You can do installation as the following figure.

http://www.kdtsys.com/

CIMON-Xpanel46


If you could see the dialog box above, then select “Next”.

Click the check box as the above figure, then select “Next”.



Input User Name and Organization in the blank and then select “Next”.

Select ‘Destination Folder’ in your hard disc, and then select “Next”.

CIMON-Xpanel48


If you could see the dialog box above, then select “Finish” and then restart your computer.

Install the Device Driver

Connect the XPanel unit and PC with USB cable after installation of ActiveSync. And then, you have to

reboot the Xpanel.

If it was the first time connecting with Xpanel then your PC requires device driver configuration as shown in

the following dialog box.



Select Check button as the above figure then “Next”.

Insert CD provided with XPanel unit, and then select “Next”.

If you don’t have CD, then you can choose the location of device driver manually as shown in the following

dialog box.

This assumes that XPanelDesigner was installed in your PC already.

CIMON-Xpanel50


Give the location as shown in the above dialog box. Typically, the device driver can be found in “C:

\Program Files\XPanel\XPanel_Driver” folder.

If the device was searched successfully, then the above dialog box would be shown. Click the “Finish”

button.

Connect the Xpanel unit and PC with USB cable

Whenever your computer or XPanel was restarted, you would see the following dialog box.



Select check button as above the figure and then select “Next”.

Then you can see as the following figure it means ActiveSync installation success.


Part

V

SYSTEM Overview 53


5 SYSTEM Overview

· Xpanel supports various kinds of peripherals.

· Xpanel supports not only 1:1 network but also multi-drop topology.

· Xpanel Designer is a free software. It can be run on the standard Microsoft Windows platform such as

Windows XP.

· Xpanel unit always searches a project files for execution at start up.

System Overview

· Peripherals

· Network

· Xpanel Designer

· Xpanel Unit

5.1 Peripherals

Xpanel supports various kinds of peripherals. For those peripheral connection, Xpanel provides following

interfaces :

USB Client This interface is used for Xpanel Designer interface. By using this port, all configuration

data files including the

screen drawings can be up and downloaded. Xpanel Designer software is a free software.

CIMON-Xpanel54


It is provided by CD

and can be downloaded through the internet. (http://www.kdtsys.com)

Xpanel Designer is a Microsoft Windows based software. And for connection with Xpanel, it

uses another software on

PC, the Microsoft ActiveSync. The ActiveSync is provided by CD, but also can be

downloaded from Microsoft web sites.

USB Host This interface can be used for many kinds of peripherals such as printers, memory sticks,

barcode scanners and

keyboards. For connection of multiple of them, the USB hub can be utilized.

SD/MMC

Memory Slot

SD/MMC memory slot can be used for storage expansion and/or upgrading project files.

The Xpanel provides standard 8MB internal flash memory. If this storage was not enough

for storing all project data

files, external SD/MMC or USB memory can be used.

Xpanel detects SD/MMC or USB memory automatically. And if there are required folder and

files in external memory,

Xpanel will load the project files from that external memory at startup. In this case, the

project files of internal flash

memory will be ignored.

5.2 Network

Xpanel supports not only 1:1 network but also multi-drop topology.

And more, Xpanel can communicate with several different devices and networks on the same time.

SYSTEM Overview 55


EthernetCommunicationPort

Ethernet communication facility of Xpanel is used in various purposes.

The main usage of Ethernet port is for communicating with devices. Many different kinds

of devices can be linked with

Xpanel in the same network at the same time.Other usage of Ethernet is network with

SCADA system. Xpanel can be

a data server for SCADA on Ethernet. The OPC server will be provided free. And one

more usage of Ethernet is file

sharing with PCs which are located in the same network. Xpanel supports the MS

Windows network.

That means the Xpanel can access the shared files of PCs on Windows network. This

functionality is very useful when

exporting the CSV formatted file from Xpanel.

RS232C(RS422/485)CommunicationPort

Xpanel provides a standard RS232C/RS422/485 communication port.

And the mode (RS232C or RS422/485) of port is switched by only software configuration.

This port supports full signal lines for standard modem connection.

AdditionalRS232CCommunicationPort

Xpanel provides additional one RS232C port. This port supports null modem connection.

5.3 Xpanel Designer

Xpanel Designer is a free software.

It can be run on the standard Microsoft Windows platform such as Windows XP.

By using Xpanel Designer, following works can be carried out :

DeviceConfiguration

According to the connected devices, all the communication parameters can be configured

such as communication

media, port, baudrate, station number etc. Every configured devices on network are given

it’s own name, and this

name will be used in TAG database configuration.

TAG Database The TAG is the basic unit of data processing in Xpanel. Three types of TAGs are provided

according to the data type.

The first type of TAG is the digital TAG. Digital TAG represents two different states and

can be used for general 1 bit

input or output point of the device. The second type of TAG is the analog TAG. This type

of TAG represents a number.

A number can be a binary word, BCD or floating point value and some additional data

processing can be accomplished on this type of TAG such as scaling.

Any type of TAG could be assigned a physical address of device. This kind if TAG is

called as 'Real TAG' and Xpanel unit polls the value of this TAG from device by

communication, when it is needed. A TAG which is not assigned the physical address of

CIMON-Xpanel56


device is called as 'Virtual TAG'. Virtual TAG is used for internal data calculation, script

programming and string data manipulation.

Screen Editor Xpanel Designer provides it’s own graphic editor. It is an object based graphic editor.

Each graphic object can be configured with some animation controls. There are many

kinds of animation controls

supported such as blinking, visualizing, coloring, moving, rotating, digitizing, zooming and

more.

These all animations are triggered by the value of designated TAG in Xpanel unit.

The Xpanel provides abundant graphic libraries and supports true type fonts, also.

ScriptProgramming

Xpanel provides ‘C’ style script language of it’s own.

This script language supports inherent ‘C’ language keywords such as ‘switch-case’

statement.

And more, Xpanel unit provides priority controlled multi-threading environment for that

script program.

This script language can be used not only for data processing but also for device control.

Xpanel Unit Upgrade

Every Xpanel Designer releases have it’s own version of binary files for Xpanel unit. And

when connected first time

with Xpanel unit, the Xpanel Designer detects the version of Xpanel unit, and if needed,

upgrade the binary files in

Xpanel unit automatically.

Xpanel Designer provides a tool for making memory image of SD/MMC or USB. This

image includes project folders

and files for Xpanel unit. On start-up, Xpanel unit searches this image in external memory.

If it was found, Xpanel unit

uses this image as a project data, and the one in internal flash memory will be ignored.

This is useful when a user do

not want to use a PC or notebook for project data update. The user can change the

configuration or the design of

screen with a memory card only.

ConfigureOtherFunctions

Xpanel provides many special functions for Xpanel application such as data logger, alarm,

trend, recipe and

network service. All these functions can be configured in Xpanel Designer.

5.4 Xpanel Unit

Xpanel unit always searches a project files for execution at start up.

Following diagram shows the order of that search. If the project files are found at one of three locations, Xpanel

unit load those project files to execute.

SYSTEM Overview 57


After the loading of project files, all configured tasks are executed concurrently.

The task execution in an Xpanel unit is performed by time-sharing and multi-threading with priority.

Graphic processing and file manipulation in Xpanel are processed by time sharing. But, almost other tasks

are executed by means of multi-threading.

The priority based multi-threading makes it possible to process real-time data. Communication and script are

good examples for priority based multi-threaded task.

On the other hand, Xpanel provides some tools for maintenance during runtime. These tools can be

visualized by three step touch screen operations.

Following picture shows these operations of touch screen.

After these touch operations, a dialog box will be appeared on screen and you can see the following

services for maintenance.

System Log An Xpanel logs the system activities in memory during its runtime.

This service makes you can see those logged messages.

Comm.

Monitor

Communication frames between the Xpanel and devices can be visualized with this

service.

Comm.

Port

Configuration

Communication parameters can be configured by this service.

IP address, baudrate and other parameters of communication port are listed on the

dialog box, and can be

changed by common control interfaces of Windows.

CIMON-Xpanel58


Misc.

Configurations

LCD backlight and beep sound can be configured by this service.

Touch

Calibration

This service provides a chance to calibrate touch panel of Xpanel.

Clock Setting The real time clock can be adjusted by this service.

Software

Keyboard

The Xpanel has a software keyboard interface. This service visualizes or hides the

software keyboard on screen.

Xpanel

Shutdown

This service shutdowns the Xpanel program on Xpanel unit.

Suspend This service shutdowns the operating system of Xpanel unit.

When the IP address is changed, this service must be activated. After the system

shutdown, the system

will not be restarted automatically. The external power must be turned off and on again

for system restart.


Part

VI

CIMON-Xpanel60


6 Configuration Tools

Xpanel provides several online configuration tools.

The configuration tools can be visualized by pressing three corners of touch area as shown in left picture.

After pressing each corner one by one, the following dialog box is popped up. All the configuration tools are

shown in this dialog box.

· System Log

· Comm Monitor

· Comm. Config

· Misc. Config

· Touch Calibrate

· Screen Capture

· Date/Time

· SW Keyboard

· Printer

· System Shoutdown

· Exit

6.1 System Log : System Activity Log

The Xpanel logs the system activities in memory during its runtime. This service makes you can see those

logged messages.

Configuration Tools 61


6.2 Comm. Monitor : Communication Frame Monitor

Communication frames between the Xpanel and devices can be monitored with this service.

Start / Pause Starts or pauses the communication frame logging job.

The frame marked as ‘[TX ]’ is the frame transmitted from Xpanel.

And the frame marked as ‘[RX]’ is the frame received from a device.

Clear Clears all logged frame from the list.

ASCII / BIN Sets the data coding format of the frame. When the ‘ASCII’ format is chosen, only the data

between 20h to 7Fh

are displayed correctly. Other data will be seen as broken character. And when the ‘BIN’

CIMON-Xpanel62


format is chosen,

all the data is displayed in hexa-decimal number.

Resize Changes the window size. Xpanel provides two differently sized windows.

One is full-window sized and the other is small sized window.

(The small sized window is the best fitting size for 5.6 inch LCD)

6.3 Comm. Config : Communication Port Configruation

Communication parameters can be configured by this service.

IP address, baudrate and other parameters of communication port are listed on the dialog box, and can be

changed by common control

interfaces of Windows. When the ‘Comm. Config’ tool is activated, following dialog box is popped up.

First of all, the communication port to be configured must be selected. As shown in the above picture, the

operator can select one of ports being used.

The port combo-box lists the names of device which are registered in current project.

Serial Port (COM1 / COM2)

When a serial device is chosen for port configuration, following parameters can be configured.

All the parameter modifications are applied immediately to the current running project.



Xpanel’s COM1 port can be used for three kinds of network type. Available network types are RS232C,

RS422A and RS485.

One of them can be chosen by using this tool as shown in right-hand picture of above.

The actual terminal block for COM1 is decided according to this configuration.

The modem parameters are prepared for special purpose application. It is dependent on the

communication driver used.

Following pictures shows the parameters for dial-up modem application.

Ethernet Port

When an Ethernet device is chosen for port configuration, following parameters can be configured.

All the parameter modifications are applied immediately to the current running project.

CIMON-Xpanel64


But for storing the new configuration permanently, "System Shutdown" is needed. Refer to the ‘section

11’ of this chapter.

Another Method for Ethernet Configuration

The standard WinCE operating system provides another way to configure Ethernet. It can be done in

desktop window.

The desktop window can be accessed only when the Xpanel program is closed.

For closing the Xpanel program, use the ‘Exit’ button. (The ‘Exit’ button is described in the ‘section 12’ of

this chapter)

1. First of all, execute and put a software keyboard on the desktop window.

This keyboard will be used during the network configuration. For doing this, make the task bar visible

as shown in the following picture.



2. Execute the software keyboard by touching the icon at the right corner of the task bar, and select

‘LargeKB’ menu.

The software keyboard will be popped up as shown in following picture.

3. The next step is executing the LAN configuration tool. Follow the icons listed below, started from the

desktop window.

The setting dialog box of above can be accessed by the software keyboard which is prepared at the

previous step.

CIMON-Xpanel66


4. For storing the network settings permanently, it is needed to ‘suspend’ the operating system.

This can be done by the ‘Suspend’ menu of ‘Start’ tool as shown in the following picture.

6.4 Misc. Config : Miscellaneous Configurations

LCD backlight

OFF

It provides a sleeping function for LCD backlight.

The time span is based on the unit of minute. If there is no touch operation during this

time span,

the backlight of LCD is turned off automatically. The backlight will be turned on when there

is any touch operation.

Mouse cursor

enable

Mouse cursor display is dependent on this option. This option is effective only on the

following version of OS and XpanelDesigner.

· OS : V1.15

· XpanelDesigner ; V1.30

LCD Brightness Operator can control the LCD brightness by this function. Up to 32 brightness levels are

provided by hardware. This function is supported by following version of OS.

· OS : V1.17



6.5 Touch Calibrate : Touch Panel Calibration

Touch

Calilbrate

This service provides a chance to calibrate touch panel of Xpanel.

Follow the instruction message shown at the top of the screen.

Point

For storing the new calibration data permanently, ‘System Shutdown’ is needed. Refer to the ‘section 11’ of

this chapter.

If the ‘System Shutdown’ was not executed, the new calibration data will be discarded and the previous one

will be restored

when the system is restarted.

CIMON-Xpanel68


6.6 Screen Capture : Make a Screen Snapshot

Screen Capture This service makes a screen capture file of current display. Generated file has bitmap

(BMP) formatted file and located in the " \ X p a n e l \" folder. File name is given automatically,

and has following format which is derived

from clock.

6.7 Date/Time : Adjust the System Clock

Date / Time The real time clock can be adjusted by this service.



6.8 SW Keyboard : Pops-Up the Software Keyboard

Date / Time The Xpanel has a software keyboard interface.

This button visualizes or hides the software keyboard on screen. Following picture shows

the software keyboard.

For removing the software keyboard from screen, use the ‘SW Keyboard’ button again.

6.9 Printer : Printer Setup

Printer Xpanel supports the PCL. The laser or inkjet type printers supporting PCL can be

connected with Xpanel through the USB or network.

CIMON-Xpanel70


Point

For storing the setup permanently, ‘System Shutdown’ is needed after this setup procedure. Refer to the

‘section 11’ of this chapter.

If the ‘System Shutdown’ was not executed, the setup data will be discarded and the previous one will be

restored when the system is restarted.

Print Configuration Dialog Box

Following picture shows the print configuration dialog box.

Printer Select the type of connected printer. The type can be one of ‘PCL Inkjet’ or ‘PCL Laser’.

Port Select a port where the printer is connected.

· USB Printer : If a printer is connected to the Xpanel though the USB host port,

select the "LPT1:" The LPT1 port is automatically detected and displayed only when

the printer is connected.

· Network Printer : If a printer can be reached through the network,

select the "Network ". In this case, the ‘Net Path’ field must be configured as

following example.

Format \ \PC_name\Printer_name

Example \ \ k i m 4 0 \ c a n o n i r 2

The software keyboard would be needed for setting the network path.

The software keyboard can be shown by ‘SW Keyboard’ service. Please refer to the

previous section

(section 11 : SW Keyboard) of this chapter.



Network Printer Logon

If the ‘Port’ is chosen as ‘Network’, the Xpanel tries to connect the PC through network and pops-up

following logon dialog box.

Enter the authorized user name and password to the logon dialog box above, and then push the button

in title bar.

Xpanel will pop up following dialog box.

If ‘Yes’ is chosen, the password entered will be stored in disk permanently.

Otherwise (in case of ‘No’), the Xpanel will ask the password whenever try to use the network printer.

How to print a screen?

Xpanel provides the ‘HardCopy()’ function for printing the screen image. The HardCopy() function is

explained in the ‘Script’ chapter.

CIMON-Xpanel72


An example which prints a screen image by a touch operation is provided in this section.

For printing a screen, a touch object should be declared in the graphic page.

This touch object must have the property of ‘Command Expression’ style and ' HardCopy()' function has to

be declared in its ‘Command’ input field.

Previous picture shows the situation of configuration with the Xpanel Designer.

Following picture is a snapshot of the Xpanel online screen. Assume that this screen is configured as

described above.

When the operator touches the ‘Screen Print’ object, the Xpanel prints current displaying screen out.

The operator will be notified the successful printing by following pop-up dialog box, some seconds after.



6.10 System Shutdown

System

shutdown

This service shutdowns the operating system of Xpanel unit.

The system shutdown must be done when there is a change in one of following items.

· Ethernet Port Configurations (IP address, Subnet Mask and/or Gateway)

· Touch Calibration

· Printer Setup

After the system shutdown, the system will not be restarted automatically. The external power must be turned

off and on again for system restart.

Point

CIMON-Xpanel74


This has the same effect with the ‘Suspend’ function of ‘Start’ menu in desktop

window.

6.11 Exit

Exit This service exits the Xpanel program and return to the desktop window as shown in

following picture.

In this desktop window, following jobs can be performed.

· File system manipulation with explorer

· Some system configurations with control panel (clock, network etc.)

· System status checking. (disk and memory status etc.)

To execute the Xpanel again, double touch the icon of desktop.


Part

VII

CIMON-Xpanel76


7 Xpanel Designer

For details on Xpanel Designer, refer to the following manual

Xpanel Designer

· How to download the project data

· Xpanel Designer Installing and Running

· Xpanel Designer menu

· Project setup and download

7.1 How to download project data

IN THIS TOPIC :

Using USB port Using Ethernet port Using removable memory

This manual explains download method for Xpanel project to Xpanel from Xpanel Designer. Xpanel supports

three ways for download project.

There are three different methods to download the Xpanel project data as summarized here:

· Using USB port (supported model : XT04CA, XT05MB, XT05SB, XT06CB, XT07CB)

· Using Ethernet port(supported model : Products that Ethernet port is supported in products of OS Version

2.00 or late)

· Using removable storage (supported model : Products that USB Host and SD slot are supported in

products of OS Version 2.00 or late)

Using USB port

This method downloads project using Xpanel’s USB Tool port.

Before download project, you must install Xpanel device driver and ActiveSync.

Install theActiveSync

Xpanel provides ActiveSync in the including CD but you can also download latest version from

Microsoft homepage (www.microsoft.com). After Installation, you need to restart your PC.

Install theXpanel DeviceDirver

After rebooting, connect the Xpanel with PC by USB cable.

Xpanel Designer 77


Select as like the following figure and click [Next] at the Hardware update wizard.

CIMON-Xpanel78


Insert provided CD and click [Next].

Xpanel Designer 79


< XT05MA, XT05SA, XT06CA, XT10CA, XT12CA Driver setup screen>

< XT04CA/B, XT07CA/B Driver setup screen>

Click [finish] when the device was searched.

Installed normally, popup will be activated regardless of partnership.

Next time, it will recognize Xpanel automatically.

When the ‘Hardware Update Wizard’ is not automatically displayed .

It happens sometime even though connected normally because of windows configurations.

In this case solve the problem with following directions. You may see “Invalid Device” in the

device manager.

Select ‘Invalid Device’ and click mouse right button and choose [Update driver].

Select the tab as follows. [Change a setting]->[System]->[Hardware]

CIMON-Xpanel80


Select as like above the figure, then click [Next].

Xpanel Designer 81


Driver file path will be different according to the OSversion.

- If Xpanel models are XT04CA, XT05MB, XT05SB, XT06CB, XT07CB, this models are

select following path.

“Xpanel_Driver\ XT04_Sync_Drv” in the XpanelDesigner installed folder.

(Ex : C:\Program Files\Xpanel\Xpanel_Driver)

- If OS version is below 1.19, it will direct the path folder “Xpanel_Driver” in the

XpanelDesigner installed folder.

(Ex : C:\Program Files\Xpanel\Xpanel_Driver)

- If OS version is above 1.19, it will direct the path folder “Drivers” in the ActiveSync

installed folder.

(Ex : C:\Program Files\Microsoft ActiveSync\Drivers)

[Windows CE USB device] will be registered in the Device Manager with the massage as setup

is complete.

Setup Link Run XpanelDesigner. Load the project that will be downloaded. Select [Online]->[Connection].

You can execute ‘Project download’ or ‘Project upload’ from ‘online’ menu of the

XpanelDesigner.

* Although you have several USB port in your PC, you can download project via only one of

them.

Using Ethernet port

If Xpanel is connected with PC by the Ethernet, you can download the project through Ethernet

without USB cable.

Connect PC with Xpanel to download the project using Ethernet port and configure IP address.

CIMON-Xpanel82


* For using this method, it needs OS version above 2.00 and XpanelDesigner version 1.37 orlate.

ConfirmtheIPofthePC

Select [Start]->[Run] on the PC.

Input “cmd” at the RUN window.

Input “ipconfig” at the Command window.

Xpanel Designer 83


Ensure the Ethernet IP configuration in your PC.

Next, set Xpanel’s IP adaptable with PC.

Go to the Ethernet Loader.(If Xpanel is running, click the [Exit] button at the “Xpanel config” for

closing Xpanel project.) Confirm the Xpanel’s IP.

Touch the new setting

parts.

Delete contents by the key

‘BS’ and input others to change

using number key.

Click the [Apply this new

setting].

CAUTION

* Directions for the configuration- Subnet Mask and Gateway must be same with PC’s configuration.- If Subnet Mask is configured (255.255.0.0), then IP Address must be inputted as like 172.16.xxx.xxx and it doesn’t duplicated with other equipments.- xxx means the number between 0-255.

For application the changed configurations, select the button [Apply the new setting].

If you want to confirm again click the button “x” or else click “OK” then it will go on.

Ethernetpo

Execute the XapnelDesigner. Open the project that will be downloaded and select [Setup Link] at

the on line menu.

CIMON-Xpanel84


rtconfigurationattheXpanelDesigner

Select [Ethernet] and then click the button [Xpanel].

The list of Xpanel found is displayed.Select Xpanel which will be downloaded the project and then click [OK].

The information of selected Xpanel is expressed at the popup window.

To download project, select [Download to Xpanel (PC -> Xpanel)] in the online menu.

Using removable memory

Xpanel Designer 85


Xpanel supports the download function for removable memory.

If you use this function, you can update the Xpanel’s project without connecting it directly by using

like USB memory that is a kind of portable disc drive.

* This function is required Xpanel model that supports USB Host or SD card slot. You need alsoOS version above 2.00 and XpanelDesigner version 1.37 or late.

Copy projectto memorycard

Insert memory card to your PC.

Select [Copy Project To Removable Memory] in the Online menu of

XpanelDesigner.

Select or Input the path to download project.

Download path must be indicated root of disc. If you check the “Download the

Editing project”, it includes the data for upload.

If it is done, complete message box will be popped up.

Updateproject fromremovablestorageto Xpanel.

Insert removable storage to Xpanel which has been downloaded project.

CIMON-Xpanel86


Click project update button at the Ethernet Loader as shown up.

Then ‘Project Update’ window is popped up and it will display updatable projects

after search.

If you want to search list again, click [Refresh] button.

Select the project will be downloaded at the list and click [Project Update] button.

* When project is updated, it will remove previous project first of all. Please attention.

When the project is downloading, [Project Update] button is not executed.

After it is completed download project, you can see the message “All file update : OK”

and [Project Update] button is executed again. Be careful, if you touch it while working,

it would be canceled.

7.2 Xpanel Designer Installing and Running

1. You can download XpanelDesigner v2.10 from internet homepage (http://www.kdtsys.com/).

Xpanel Designer Suggestion

http://www.kdtsys.com/

Xpanel Designer 87


If the past version of ‘Xpanel Designer’ is installed, please remove it by ‘Program add/delete’.

2. Select window[Start] -> [Xpanel] -> [Xpanel Designer]

7.3 Xpanel Designer menu

IN THIS TOPIC :

File Edit Draw View Online Arrange Tools

File

button descriptions

New Page New Page is displayed.

Open Open the file of Xpanel Designer.

Close Close the present page.

CIMON-Xpanel88


Close All Page Close the present all page.

New Project New Project is displayed.

Open Project Open the present Project.

Close Project Close the present Project.

Copy Project Copy the present Project.

Save Save the present page.

Save As. Save As. the present page.

Convert to Runtime Project Convert to Runtime Project.

Frame Editor Frame Editor is displayed.

Preview Preview before it prints.

Print Print is displayed.

Edit

button descriptions

Undo It returns before working of the edit.

Redo It cancel before working of the edit.

Cut Cut the object selected.

Copy The object selected is copied with the clipboard.

Paste Paste the object copied.

Paste Special Paste contents of clipboard.

Delate Delate the object selected.

Select All Select All object of page.

Find Find text of page or project.

Replace Replace text of page or picture, project.

Graphic File Paste Graphic File Paste.

Insert Animation Bitmap Insert Animation Bitmap.

Draw

button descriptions

Line Draw Line.

Xpanel Designer 89


Rectange Draw Rectange.

Ellipse Draw Ellipse.

Arc Draw Arc.

Sector Draw Sector.

Chord Draw Chord.

Poly Line Draw Poly Line. It is closed to draw by double clicking.

Polygon Draw Polygon. It is closed to draw by double clicking.

Text Insert Text.

Dynamic Tag Insert Dynamic Tag.

Date Time Insert Date Time.

String Value Insert String Value.

Multi String Insert Multi String.

Trend Graph Insert Trend Graph.

DataLog Insert Trend Graph.

Key Input Window Insert Key Input Window.

Alarm Summary Insert Alarm Summary.

Library Library is displayed.

View

button descriptions

Redraw Redraw page.

Current Page Position ToRuntime

Current Page Position To Runtime.

Main Tool Main Tool is displayed.

Status Tool Status Tool is displayed.

Drawing Tool Drawing Tool is displayed.

Color Tool Color Tool is displayed.

Arrange Tool Arrange Tool is displayed.

Font Tool Font Tool is displayed.

Zoom In/Out Zoom In/Out page.

Online

CIMON-Xpanel90


button descriptions

Setup Link You can select USB or Ethernet.

Download to Xpanel(PC->Xpanel)

Download project to Xpanel.

Upload From Xpanel(Xpanel→PC)

Upload project From Xpanel.

Make Executing RemovableMemory

Make Executing Removable Memory.

Copy Project To RemovableMemory

Copy Project To Removable Memory.

Stop Xpanel ApplicationProgram

Stop Xpanel Application Program.

Run Xpanel ApplicationProgram

Run Xpanel Application Program.

Upgrade Xpanel ApplicationProgram

Upgrade Xpanel Application Program like a Xpanel Designer.

Arrange

button descriptions

Group Make a Group by the objects selected.

UnGroup UnGroup.

ReGroup ReGroup.

Bring To Front Bring To Front.

Send To Back Send To Back.

Arrange Arrange the objects selected.

Rotate Rotate the objects selected.

Flip Flip the objects selected.

Point Change Change shape of Point.

Enable Snap Enable Snap is displayed.

Grid Config Grid Config is displayed.

Make Symbol Make Symbol the object selected.

Break Symbol Break Symbol.

Tools

Xpanel Designer 91


button descriptions

Page Setup Page Setup is displayed.

User Library Edit Edit User Library.

Bitmap Edit Edit the Bitmap selected.

Run Simulator Run Simulator from project edited.

Run Simulator With ActivePage.

Run Simulator and open present page.

Project Project window is displayed.

Database Database window is displayed.

CIMON-Xpanel Setup Setup page and frame of CIMON-Xpanel.

I/O Devices I/O Devices are displayed.

Alarms Alarms are displayed.

Security Security is displayed.

Data Logging Data Logging is displayed.

Scripts Scripts are displayed.

String Editor String Editor is displayed.

Data Server Data Server is displayed.

Recipe Recipe is displayed.

Data Bridge Data Bridge is displayed.

Animation Editor Animation Editor is displayed.

7.4 Project setup and download

1. Select [File] -> [New Project]

2. Input "Project Name" and click - [Next>]

CIMON-Xpanel92


3. Select "Type" of Xpanel and click - [Ok] . The page suitable for Xpanel’s resolution is made.

4. Check the condition of the page setup by double click.(or "Tools - page setup")

[Page Property]

Description When the page is opened by pop up, the description is displayed on the page.

Popup Page The position of the popup page in frame should be set of ‘None’.

Fixed BackGround For a quick screen update, set unchangeable pictures as background.

Using 256 Bitmap Using 256 Bitmap when it Convert to Runtime Project.

Xpanel Designer 93


Draw Changed

Object OnlyThe relationship of the object can be changed by the update order.

Display Touch Area If you touch the object, the touch area is displayed.

Enable Multi Touch

ActionAs the objects with the touch function are coincided, all touch actions are operated.

Sec. LevelAs numbers are higher and higher, Sec. Level is higher. The page higher than the

Sec. Level can’t be opened.

Background Change the Background of page.

[Page Position]

Edit Position It is position and size of the present Designer.

Run Position If it is designated as a pop-up page, the action will be available.

=> Copy The run position is changed to the edit position.

Position In Frame The position in frame should be set of ‘None’.

[Action]

CIMON-Xpanel94


On Opening Page Input the Action on opening page.

On Closing Page Input the Action on closing page.

[Project Download]

1. Click - [Online] -> [Setup Link] Select the link type of Xpanel.

2. Click - [Online] -> [Download to Xpanel(PC->Xpanel)]

3. "Download to Xpanel(PC->Xpanel)" is displayed.

4. Click the "Download The Editing Project" when you want to download.

The download is impossible when you download it without clicking.

5. Click the "Download The Font File" when you want to download font.

Xpanel Designer 95


When you download it without clicking, basic Font are Kor. Xpanel : 굴림 and Eng. Xpanel : Tahoma.

6. Click - [Ok]


Part

VIII

TAG Database 97


8 TAG Database

This manual explains TAG database, refer to the following manual.

See :

· Overview

· Database Window

· How to use Database

· Group TAG

· Digital Tag

· Analog Tag

· String Tag

· Database edit using EXCEL

8.1 Overview

The data processing of XPanel is based on the TAG database. It should be registered with the tag shown to

the monitor.

There are three TAG types : analog, digital and string. And XPanel also provides the group TAG.

Xpanel is repeatedly getting tags’ value used in the monitor from the machinery. User can save tag's value

provided to the information of tags in the database.

So if the data is changed, the value of each tag will also be changed. When users handle buttons and input

values, following the setting information, it demands to write values in the job machinery. Additionally, as the

process to write values completes, the tag’s values are changed by reading the values from the machinery.

TAG

CIMON-Xpanel98


Tag is a unit to save values in the database.

There are a ‘Real TAG’ and a ‘Virtual TAG’.To read and write the values of real job machinery, the real tag

should be registered and the data of the real tag also should be changed.

All tags are divided into Digital tag, Analog tag and String TAG.

For the operation to handle its values and functions, tags should be registered and set the connection

between tags and values of the machinery.

Xpanel Project and Database

Database is edited by database edit program in Xpanel Designer.

There is no tag in database in new project, so you should add tags to the database.

After Saving edited database and sending the project with database to Xpanel, Xpanel makes the operation

based on the database.

In order to change the database, edit the database of Xpanel project properly and sent the changed project to

the Xpanel.

Xpanel Database Features

•Supported data types : Digital / Analog / String

•Supports virtual TAG.

•Provides the TAG group function. (Hierarchical TAG manipulation structure)

•Easy database exporting and importing.

•Provides the last value keeping option during power off. (virtual TAG)

•Analog TAG provides data scaling option.

8.2 Database Window

Following manual is Database Window.

TAG Database 99


Tree screen (1) This is a tree screen to quickly find the position of tags like window search.

Tag screen (2)

Registered tags are popped up to the tag screen. It gives users different Tag icon

referred to its types for a quick discernment and offers the scrollbar to let users know

easily the all information of each tag.

It can choose different tags with “Ctrl” key and click first tag and last tag by Shift that

you want to choose all tags.

Database ToolbarIt makes users to quickly add and edit the tags by Mouse.

Point

User can move a division line between tree screen and tag screen by clicking the line, but there is a

minimum area of the tree screen and the tag screen, it is ignored to make smaller window than the

minimum window.

8.3 How to use Database

How to startDatabase

· Click [File] -> [Open Project] of Xpanel Designer menu.

· Click [Tools] -> [Database] of Xpanel Designer menu.

· Click -Database icon of Xpanel Designer Toolbar.

CIMON-Xpanel100


How to registerTag

· Click [Edit] -> [New Tag] of Xpanel Designer menu.

· Click -New Tag icon of Database Toolbar.

· Click <Insert> Key.

· Double click the Database page or click the right button of mouse- > "New

Tag".

Insert - New Tag Name. -> Click - [Next].

How to edit Tag

· Select the Tag and Click [Edit] -> [Edit Tag] of Xpanel Designer menu.

· Select the Tag and Click -Edit Tag icon of Database Toolbar.

· Double click the Tag or click the right button of mouse on the tag - > "Edit

Tag".

Edit Tag -> Click - [Next].

How to delete Tag

· Select the Tag and Click [Edit] -> [Delete] or [Cut] of Xpanel Designer menu.

· Select the Tag and Click -Cut icon of Toolbar.

· Select the Tag and Click <Delete> Key.

· Click the right button of mouse on the tag - > "Delete" or "Cut".

CAUTION - Name of TAG

There are some limitations and rules on giving a name of TAG as follows :

• A TAG name should not be duplicated with one of already defined TAGs.

• There is no difference between capital and small characters.

(Ex) ‘tagname’ and ‘TAGNAME’ represent the same TAG.

• Almost every symbol characters cannot be used in a TAG name. (only the under line character

can be used in a TAG name)

(Ex) (space) (tab) @ * / + - ! ~ “ ‘ # $ % & ( ) = | \ [ ] ; : ? > < . ,

• Number character (0..9) cannot be used as the first character of TAG name.

(Ex) 123tagname (x), tagname123 (o)

• The names of all script functions, keywords, predefined constants and user defined functions

cannot be used as a TAG name.

(Ex) PageOpen, Sleep, LogOn, goto, switch, return ....

• If a TAG is located in a group, the final name of this TAG includes the group name. Each group

TAG Database 101


name should be separated by dot (.)

character from other group or TAG name.

(Ex) “Gr1.Gr2.Gr3.pointname”

Virtual vs. Real TAG

When the ‘Virtual Tag’ radio button was chosen as following the first dialog box, the TAG does not need

the ‘I/O Device’ and ‘I/O Address’

configuration items anymore. That means, the actual value of a virtual TAG is not acquired by

communication polling but initialized and

manipulated by the internal functions of XPanel such as script.

The initial value of a virtual TAG can be defined at the ‘Advance’ configuration tab as shown in the

second dialog box of following picture.

When the XPanel is powered and starts its operation, the defined value is applied to the TAG’s initial

value. Other configuration

items in ‘Advance’ configuration tab have no meanings in case of virtual TAG.

CIMON-Xpanel102


The initial value configuration is ignored in case of a real TAG. As described in previous topic,

XPanel polls the data

of real TAG through communication. XPanel provides several functions for manipulating data

from device. As shown in the

above second dialog box, analog data scaling is one of those functions. The functions provided

are described more

precisely in the following sections.

Basic TAG Configuration

Digital, analog and string TAGs have same basic configuration items. Those items are configured in

‘General’ tab as shown in

the following picture. The items in ‘Advanced’ configuration tab are different between each TAG type.

Those items are explained in the following sections describing each TAG type. In this section, the

configuration items common

to all TAG types are explained.

Real Tag/ VirtualTag

Choose one of two TAG types. Asdescribed in the previous section, the realTAG has an actual address of device andits value is updated via communication.The virtual TAG has no address, and itsvalue is calculated and updated byinternal functions such as script.

I/ODevice

Give the name of external device andstation to which the TAG belongs. Thedevice name and station name should bedistinguished by a dot (.) character asfollowing format.

DeviceName.

TAG Database 103


StationName

Notice that this field has meaning only ifTAG type is a real TAG.

I/OAddress

Give the real point address of the TAG.The address format is dependent on thedevice type. Refer to the device drivermanual of connected device for moreinformation such as supported addressrange, notation and data type etc.Notice that this field has meaning only ifTAG type is a real TAG.

Option : SaveLastStatusWhenClosing

This option makes the XPanel keep thelast value in flash memory when poweredoff. When the power is supplied again,XPanel restores the last value in flashmemory.Notice that this field has meaning only ifTAG type is a virtual TAG.

a TAGName of a TAG

8.4 Group TAG

When users input lots of tags at one screen, it is inefficient under its operation.

So, use a group tag to manage relative tags to make the tree structure similar with the directory in computer.

There is the purpose to make a group of various tags for better management of the project.

Basic Setup

CIMON-Xpanel104


Name Insert a Name of Tag. (Refer to the "CAUTION - Name of Tag".)

Type Select - Type of Tag - > "Group"

Des. Input - Reference matter.

8.5 Digital TAG

XPanel provides the digital TAG type which represents a bit signal (1 or 0). All non-zero values are treatedas 1 in digital TAG.

Initial Value

Give the initial value of virtual TAG. When the XPanel is started up, the virtual TAG is initialized with

designated value.

Notice that this field has meaning only if TAG type is a virtual TAG. The real TAG ignores initial value

setting.

8.6 Analog TAG

XPanel accepts various data types from devices as an analog TAG.

All those device data types are converted to the 64 bits floating point values in XPanel.

TAG Database 105


Initial Value

Give the initial value of virtual TAG. When the XPanel is started up, the virtual TAG is initialized with

designated value.


setting.

Data Type

Choose one of following data types.

Type Description Value Range

INT8 Signed 8 bits integer 128 - 127

INT16 Signed 16 bits integer 32768 - 32767

INT32 Signed 32 bits integer -2147483648 - 2147483647

UINT8 Unsigned 8 bits integer 0 - 255



BCD8 Signed 8 bits BCD 79 - 79



UBCD8 Unsigned 8 bits BCD 0 - 99

UBCD16 Unsigned 16 bits BCD 0 - 9999

UBCD32 Unsigned 32 bits BCD 0- 99999999

Float 32 bits real data -3.40282e+038 - 3.40282e+038

This configuration represents the data type of device memory designated by the address defined in

‘General’ configuration tab

CIMON-Xpanel106


and is effective only on the real TAG. The virtual TAG ignores this configuration and manipulates all TAG

data as a 64 bit real number.

Scale / Range of Engineering Data (Veng) / Range of Raw Data (Vraw)

XPanel provides two different methods to calculate a scaled engineering data. If this option is checked,XPanel performs ‘Scale/Offset’ method.

[ Scale / Offset Method ]

The ‘Scale/Offset’ method uses following formula for calculating the engineering value.

Veng = Vraw x Scale + Offset

•Vraw : Read data from device. Not processed, raw value from device.

•Veng : Engineering data. (The data which will be displayed in XPanel’s screen)

(Example 1)

If an analog TAG was configured as following picture, and the Vraw from device is 32768,

then, Veng = (32768 x 0.1) 3276.8 = 3276.8 3276.8 = 0

As shown in above example, the engineering data configurations (Min Value and Max Value) do not

affect the raw value processing. But, in case of proportional method (if the ‘Scale’ option was

not checked), The engineering data Min/Max value configurations are important factors.

[ Proportional Method ]

The ‘Proportional Method’ process the raw value twice by using following formulas :

TAG Database 107


Scale = (Veng_max Veng_min) / (Vraw_max Vraw_min)Offset = Veng_min Vraw_min

Veng = Vraw x Scale + Offset

u Vraw : Read data from device. Not processed, raw value from device.

u Veng : Engineering data. (The data which will be displayed in XPanel’s screen)

u Veng_max , Veng_min : Engineering data range configurations

u Vraw_max , Vraw_min : Raw data range configurations

First, it calculates the scale and offset values from min/max configurations.

The calculated scale and offset values are applied to the same formula as ‘Scale/Offset Method’ for

acquiring the final engineering value.

(Example 2)

If an analog TAG was configured as following picture, and the Vraw from device is 32768,

then,

Scale = (3276.7- (-3276.8)) / (65535 0) = 0.1

Offset = (-3276.8) 0 = -3276.8

Veng = (32768 x 0.1) 3276.8 = 3276.8 3276.8 = 0

Note that above two examples gave the same result.

8.7 String TAG

The string TAG hold a string data. The maximum string length the string TAG can hold is 80 characters. In

order to use as a real TAG,

please refer to the manual of device driver. Most device drivers do not support real string TAG type.

CIMON-Xpanel108


Length of String

Give the maximum possible length of string. It can be up to 80 characters.

This configuration has meaning only on real TAG.

The device driver polls this size of continuous buffer at every period for reading a string data.

Initial Value

Give the initial value of virtual TAG. The maximum length of initial string is restricted to 22 characters.

When the XPanel is started up, the virtual TAG is initialized with designated value.


setting.

8.8 Database edit using EXCEL

This manual provides the function for easy edit via copy/paste as lots of tags are edited.

Paste (Database - > EXCEL)

Choose the area for copy at the database.

TAG Database 109


Click - [Edit] -> [Copy], or copy it to the clipboard by <Ctrl+C>.

Open- "EXCEL" file. Click - [Edit] -> [paste], or paste it to the clipboard by <Ctrl+V>.

EXCEL Edit

Referring to the table, edit the rows and columns opposed to the characters.

Columns

NumberDigital tag Analog tag String TAG Explanation

A Name of Tag Name of Tag Name of Tag

B Type of Tag(1) Type of Tag(2) Type of Tag(3)

C Des. Des. Des.

DReal/VirtualTAG

Real/Virtual TAG Real/Virtual TAG Real TAG = 1, Virtual TAG = 0

E I/O Device I/O Device I/O Device

F I/O Address I/O Address I/O Address

G initial value initial value initial value

H None None None

CIMON-Xpanel110


I None

Type of data0 : INT81 : INT162 : INT323 : UINT84 : UINT165 : UINT326 : BCD87 : BCD168 : BCD329 : UBCD810 : UBCD1611 : UBCD3212 : Float

String length

J None None None

K None None None

L None None None

M None Scale application None Scale/Offset=1,Max/Min = 0

N None Internal data-Min None

O None Internal data-Max None

P None Real data-Min None Scale application- >Scale value

Q None Real data-Max None Scale application- >Offset value

Paste (EXCEL - > Database)

Choose the area for copy at the EXCEL.

Click - [Edit] -> [Copy], or copy it to the clipboard by <Ctrl+C>.

Open- "Database" file. Click - [Edit] -> [paste], or paste it to the clipboard by <Ctrl+V>.

TAG Database 111



Part

IX

I/O Device 113


9 I/O Device

Xpanel provides the I / O device to communicate with serial communication(RS232/422/485) and Ethernet

communication(TCP/UDP).

For details on I/O Device setting, refer to the following manual

See :

· I/O Device Basic

· I/O Device Ethernet

· I/O Device Serial

9.1 I/O Device Basic

I/O Device Configuration

For creating a new device, use the menu ‘Tools’- >’I/O Devices’ Following picture shows the first step of

creating a new device.

EditSelect the existing device by clicking the button,the dialog box of the device type is

displayed.

New Device Select the new device. "I / O device type selection" dialog box is displayed.

Delete Delete the existing devices.

Close Close the dialog box.

CIMON-Xpanel114


I/O Device Type Selection

Device Name Input the name of the device is able to distinguish.

Device Type Select the Device Type.

OkRegister the new device. "Ethernet / Serial Device Communication Settings" dialog box

is displayed.

Cancel Cancel the dialog box.

9.2 I/O Device Ethernet

Communication Port Setup

The setting method for the communication parameters of the system (Xpanel)

I/O Device 115


Device Type Select the I / O device Type.

Protocol Select from the UDP and TCP.

Time Out Set the Time Out.

Retry No. Specify the Retry No. when communication error occurs

Dual line Set the network dual line

Station Setup

The setting method for the communication parameters of the I / O Device (PLC)

CIMON-Xpanel116


Add Station Register a new station. When you click on the button "show settings" dialog box is

displayed.

I/O Device 117


Station Name Input the name of the station is able to distinguish.

Station Type select the CPU type of PLC.

Network ID It is used as parameters to distinguish by the I / O devices.

IP Address Input the basic IP address of PLC.

Socket Port No. Input the Socket Port No. of PLC

16Bit Data Swap This field has no meaning in this driver.


Comm, Error Message

Pop UpWhen Communication error occurs, the message window is displayed.

Fixed XPANEL Socket

Port

If you select this option, XPanel use only one port to connect PLC defined by

‘Xpanel Socket Port No.’ If it is not, Xpanel will change the port no. when it

occurs communication error.

XPANEL Socket Port No.If you want to use "Fixed XPANEL Socket Port No. Input XPANEL Socket Port

No.

9.3 I/O Device Serial

Communication Port Setup

The setting method for the communication parameters of the system(Xpanel)

CIMON-Xpanel118


Device Type Select the I / O device Type.

Protocol Select from the COM1and COM2.

Baud Rate Select the data baud rate.

Parity Select the Type of Parity Bit

Data Bits Select the Data Bit.

Stop Bit(S) Select the Stop Bit.

RTS/CTS Select the control method of RTS / CTS

Comm. Type Select the RS232C/422/485 communication type.

I/O Device 119


Using

Transmission

Delay

Set "Using Transmission Delay" when you want to send the frame later.

Station Setup

The setting method for the communication parameters of the I / O Device (PLC)

CIMON-Xpanel120


Add Station The new station is registered. Click- Add Station. The [station] is displayed.

Station Name Input the name of the station is able to distinguish.

Station Type Select the CPU type of PLC.

Network ID It is used as parameters to distinguish by the I / O devices.

Station No. Input the basic IP address of PLC.



Using

CheckSumUsing CheckSum of the protocol

Comm, Error

Message Pop UpWhen Communication error occurs, the message window is displayed.


Part

X

CIMON-Xpanel122


10 Alarm

In case the value of a specific tag is over a set value, an alarm is used to inform the event.

To use this function, a tag should be set up as an alarm tag among optional functions when it isregistered to a database.

There are various kinds of events registered to Alarm Item.

· Alarm Occur Event : It is operated one time when tag’s value is reaching the alarm

condition

· Alarm Release Event : It is operated one time when tag’s value is canceled from the

warning condition.

· Stamp Event : Without the warning, users register it via the alarm summary voluntarily.

· Alarm Ack. : It changes the characters of events by the Ack. and the display color of the

alarm summery event that isn’t registered to another event.

See :

· Alarm Group

· Alarm Configuration

· Alarm Summary

10.1 Alarm Group

In the area of the registered alarm, there are ten groups ready that have no relationship between groups.

If there is an Event(Alarm On/Off) at the registered alarm, it is saved to the Alarm List.

Alarm List can save maximum 200 and check it at the Alarm Summery Object in the page.

The Alarm Summery expresses only the Alarm List of specified group, so register the Alarms to the same

group for the easy checking.

Alarm 123


< Alarm Action >

10.2 Alarm Configuration

Set or Edit - "Alarm"

Click - [Tools] -> [Alarms] of Xpanel Designer or Alarms icon of Xpanel Designer Toolbar.

CIMON-Xpanel124


Alarm Group Select - > Alarm Group.

Group Desc. Input description of selected group.

Using String Table Using string table in the Alarm Configuration.It can specify a index of string table by

checking.

String Group No. It can specify by checking of "Using string table".

Save Alarm When Xpanel power On/Off, alarm items are saved. Max.200 items are saved.

Add Select a Alarm Group. Click -> [Add]

Edit Select a Alarm. Click -> [Edit]

Delete Select a Alarm. Click -> [Delete]

Move UpSelected Alarm is moved up. Select a Alarm. Click -> [Move Up]

The alarm action and registered order are completely unrelated.

Move DownSelected Alarm is moved down. Select a Alarm. Click -> [Move Down]

The alarm action and registered order are completely unrelated.

Alarm Add, Edit

1. Select a Alarm Group.

2. Click -> [Add]

Alarm 125


3. Input - Tag Name, or click the Tag in the Database list by .

4. Select a Condition( >, =, <).

> : Tag’s value is more than competitive Value.

= : Tag’s value is equal to competitive Value.

< : Tag’s value is Less than competitive Value.

5. Input a competitive Value connected with Alarm condition.

6. Input - Alarm description It is displayed in the Alarm Summary Description.

· When "Using string table" is checked in Alarm Group, "Using string table" is also displayed in the Alarm

Configuration. It can specify a index of string table by checking.

· It can specify a index of string table by checking "Using string table".

7. Select - Alarm On Action . Alarm On career is saved only by checking <NONE>.

CIMON-Xpanel126


Alarm On Action

Open Page

The designated page is opened by the Command when the Alarm On.

Input - Name of page in Action Parameter, or click and choose a page only.

If you want to choose several pages, choose the Command and use - PageOpen("Name of page").

When warning is registered in the way above, it would be in the condition of the Alarm On when the value

of TEST_ANA00(T ag) is over 0.

At first, register the Alarm On event to the alarm list and then open the page file(PAGE1) on the monitor.

In the Alarm On, if tag’s value is less than or equal to 0, register the alarm release event to the alarm list

and release the condition of the Alarm On.

Alarm 127


Command

Set up the designated action by the Command when Alarm On.

Input - Command in Action Parameter, refer to Script for the content of the command.

When warning is registered in the way above, it would be in the condition of the Alarm On when the value

of TEST_ANA00(Tag) is 0.

At first, register the Alarm On event to the alarm list and then practice the specified command.

Change the value of TEST_ANA140(Tag) to 0. And increase the value of TEST_ANA130(Tag) as 1 and

open the page file("PAGE1") on the monitor.

Alarm Off Action

At the alarm release, practice a command registered to the alarm release action.

If there is no input content, no action will happen.

Alarm Ack. Action

At the alarm summary, practice a command registered to the alarm ack. action.

CIMON-Xpanel128


If there is no input content, no action will happen.

Apply Scroll Message

Register/Remove the alarm content at the automatic scroll massage window when the Alarm On.

It should be check the "Using Scroll Messages" of [Tools]->[CIMON-XPANEL Setup].

Refer to Scroll Message of help manual.

10.3 Alarm Summary

Alarm Summary is an object to display the alarm occur/release list to the page.

Click - [Draw] -> [Alarm Summary] of Xpanel Designer or Alarm Summary icon of Xpanel Designer

Toolbar.

Click - Page for Alarm Summary

Alarm 129


Alarm Group Select - Alarm Group

Background Select - Background of Alarm Summary

Ack Select - Color of Alarm Ack

Occur Select - Color of Alarm Occur

Release Select - Color of Alarm Release

Alarm Status

Select - Type of alarm event in Alarm Summary

· Occur : Alarm Occur Event is displayed.

· Release : Alarm Release Event is displayed.

· Acked : Acked Alarm Event is displayed.

· Display Active Alarm Only : Selected Alarm Occur Event is only displayed.

Display Items

Select - Display Items of Alarm Summary

· Buttons : Control Buttons is displayed on the monitor.

· Time : Time of Alarm Occur is displayed on the monitor.

· Device Name : Device Name of Alarm Occur is displayed on the monitor.

· Value : Value of Alarm Occur is displayed on the monitor.

· Alarm Status : Alarm Status is displayed on the monitor.

· Alarm Description : Alarm Description of registered tag is displayed.

· Column Header : Column Header of Alarm Summary is displayed.

Numbers Setup the event numbers to Alarm Summary.

Action· Run Specified Active On Double Click : it can calls to run 'Alarm Ack Action' by

double clicking alarm career of alarm summary screen.

Alarm Summary Screen

CIMON-Xpanel130


StopA real-time update of the Alarm summary is stopped.The update career of the alarm

summary is only stopped.

Stamp Register an unrelated Stamp event with the state of alarm in the alarm career.

AckChange the chosen events into the condition of the Alarm Ack. There is a change of

the Alarm Ack Color.

Setup"Alarm Summary" is displayed on the monitor. it can change the type of alarm event

and alarm group.

Config "Xpanel Configuration" is displayed on the monitor.

Font Changing of Alarm Summary

· Select - Object of Alarm Summary to change Font

· Click - [View] -> [Font Tool] of Xpanel Designer

· Change - Font Size or Display Type in Font Tool.

Make a Control Button of Alarm List Using Key Type.

· Select - Object to use by Button

· Double click - Object."Object Config" is displayed.

· Click - [Touch] -> [Key Input] of Action

Alarm 131


· Select - Key Type. Click - [Ok]

· Refer to the Key Type.

Button Action Key Type

Stop/Run Tab

Stamp Insert

Ack Space

Setup Home

Move Up Up

Move Down Down

Remove selection list Delete

Initialization of List End

CAUTION

* When two more alarm summaries are registered or the trend monitoring, the data logger, and the key

input window object are registered together, it is possible that the object you don’t want is

operated, so touch and choose the object to control before handling.

* In case of the Alarm Group setting to save to the file, even if you delete the list via 'selection list

Delete'/'initialization of List', the Alarm List is restored when inputting the power.

Print out the alarm list

Print out the alarm list using AlarmPrint()

[Ex] AlarmPrint(1,0,0,20,_ALMPRT_ALL_);

The most recent alarm list of group 1 will be printed with font size 10. Refer to the Script manual.

Print out the alarm list as CSV file

Print out the alarm list using AlarmCSVWr()

[Ex] AlarmCSVWr( 1, ”AlarmLog”, 0, _ALMPRT_ALL_, 0);

CIMON-Xpanel132


The most recent alarm list of group 1 will be printed with AlarmLog_XXXXXXXXXXX.CSV File . Refer to the

Script manual.

Clear Alarm List

Clear Alarm List in the designated alarm group using ClearAlarmLog()

In case of the Alarm Group setting to save to the file, the Alarm List is restored when inputting the power.

The content of the warning summery page is updated if the page is opened again.

[Ex] ClearAlarmLog(1);

All alarm list of alarm group 1 will be cleared. Refer to the Script manual.


Part

XI

CIMON-Xpanel134


11 Graphic Page Editor

The graphic page editor of XpanelDesigner provides easy and simple screen editing environment as followings.

· Provides easy and simple object based editing environment

· Provides various wizard library objects : ready to use button, lamp and switch objects

· Object window makes it possible to explore all the graphic objects with a tree view list.

· Provides the graphic page security system.

· Provides various trend functions.

· Various graphic processing speed optimization options.

The screen size of graphic page can be induced from the model code. The table below lists the screen size of

each model.

Model Screen Size Color Specification

XT04C 480 x 272 TFT, 160,000 Colors

XT05M 320 x 240 Mono STN, Black and White, 16 Grays

XT05S 320 x 240 CSTN, 256 Colors

XT06C 640 x 480 TFT, 65,535 Colors

XT07C 800 x 480 TFT, 65,535 Colors

XT10C 800 x 600 TFT, 65,535 Colors

XT12C 800 x 600 TFT, 65,535 Colors

When a new project is created, one of the model codes above should be specified via following dialog box.

According to this configuration,

the XpanelDesigner decides the page size when a new page file is created.

Graphic Page Editor 135


데이터베이스 설명

· Page Properties

· Frame Editor

· Library

· Object Properties

11.1 Page Properties

Every graphic page has its properties such as background color, position in screen and so on.

Those properties are configured via ‘Page Properties’ dialog box.

This dialog box can be opened by clicking the right button and “Page Setup” menu as shown in following picture.

Page Property

CIMON-Xpanel136


Description Fill in the description of current graphic page.

Popup Page

If this option was checked, the page will be opened in front of previous screen page at

runtime. Otherwise, without this option checking, the previous opened page will be

replaced with this page.

Fixed

Background

This option provides faster graphic processing speed by maintaining another copy of

background image in display memory. All the control-less objects are included in this

background image, and only the controlled objects will be redrawn at every data

updates in run time. If this option was not checked, all the objects would be redrawn at

every new data updates in runtime. This will give a big burden to Xpanel performance if

there are many graphic objects in page.

However, this option has a side-effect. All objects in Xpanel graphic page have their

depth level. Which object will be drawn first at runtime is decided by the depth level.

But, this option can change the depth levels between the objects with and without

control. This phenomenon can be easily shown at run time, especially for the

overlapped objects.

Using 256

Bitmap

Xpanel supports 64K colored bitmap objects. But, these objects consume so much

memory and disk space. This option converts the 64K colored bitmap to 256 colored

automatically. It is very useful when there is not enough disk space or memory. And

also it can be helpful to increase the graphic processing speed at run time.

Draw Changed

Object Only

This option can be used when there is need to get faster graphic processing speed at

run time. When this option was checked, only the object whose value or status was

changed will be redrawn.

However, this option has a side-effect too. When a controlled object was redrawn, the



depth level of the object will be ignored. The controlled object whose status was

changed will be the top most depth and other overlapping objects will not be redrawn.

This phenomenon can be easily shown at run time, especially between the overlapped

controlled objects.

Display Touch

AreaThis option can be used to show touch area. When this option was checked, drawrectangle on touch area at screen touch.

Enable Multi TouchAction

This option can be used when there is need to run many touch action at one time. When this option was checked, all touch actions that was wrapt over will be run atscreen touch.

Sec. Level

A graphic page can be assigned a security level between 0 and 10. Only the user who

has the same or higher security level can open and see the graphic page. (zero is the

lowest security level) Please refer to the section of ‘Security’ for more information about

security system.

Background Designate a background color of this page.

NOTE

To avoid the side effects of “Fixed Background” and “Draw Changed Object Only” options, please

follow the recommendations listed below.

· Do not overlap two or more animated objects.

· Put the animated object to the up-most position in the list of objects, if possible.

· When the “Draw Changed Object Only” option was checked, it is strongly recommended to check the

“Fixed Background” option together.

Page Position

CIMON-Xpanel138


'Edit Position'

Group

The new position and screen size can be specified via these fields. After fill in each

position and size of ‘Edit Position’ group, the ‘Copy’ button applies the new settings to

the actual position.

'Run Position'

Group

This group presents the current screen position and size.

The ‘Copy’ button will change these values to the new configuration as specified in ‘Edit

Position’ group.

Position In

Frame

If current editing page is a element of a frame, specify the actual position in frame.

One of four possible positions can be chosen. The frame will be described more

precisely in next section.

Action



On Open Page This option can be used when there is need to run one action at page open.

On ClosingPage

This option can be used when there is need to run one action at page Close.

11.2 Frame Editor

CIMON-Xpanel140


The frame function is a means to display multiple pages at the same time in a screen.

This function removes repeated and boring tasks from the graphic page designing. The frame editor is

activated through the menu ‘File’-‘Frame Editor’.

XPanelDesigner provides 12 styles of predefined multiple page layouts as shown in the above picture.

In this dialog box, the frame can be created, modified and deleted from current project. A frame includes

several pages for its layout elements.

The size and initial pages for each layout element are configured in this dialog box.

Note that the ‘Position in Frame’ property of each initial page should be matched with the assigned page

number (Page1 .. Page4).

Frame as a starting page

The frame file (.FRX) can be chosen as a starting page as shown in the above picture.

Open a new frame with touch

Following example picture shows the situation of giving a touch operation to a graphic object.

According to this example, touch action is given as “Open Page” and the frame name is given as a ‘Page

Name’. This example will work without any problem.

The touch operation processor can distinguish the name of page and frame.



Open a new frame with command expression

The “FrameOpen()” function is provided for opening a new frame. Refer to the ‘Script’ section for more

information about ‘FrameOpen()’ function.

CIMON-Xpanel142


Replace a page in frame

When a frame is opened, the pages opened with the frame are replaced by ”PageOpen()” function.

Refer to the ‘Script’ section for more information about the ‘PageOpen()’ function.

Every page is given a ‘Position in Frame’ property as shown in the above configuration dialog box. When a



page is

opened by ‘PageOpen()’ function or other ways, this property decides the page which will be replaced by the

new one.

The page which has the same position number with the new page designated in ‘PageOpen()’ function is

replaced.

However, if the new page has no position number (set as ‘None’), the entire frame will be closed and only

the new page

will be opened and displayed in the screen.

Frame closing conditions

A frame is closed at following conditions.

1) When a page without position number is opened.

2) When other new frame is opened by touch operation or function such as ‘FrameOpen()’.

11.3 Library

In XpanelDesigner, there are two different types of library objects.

One is called ‘Wizard Object’ and the other is ‘Library Object’. The difference between these two types of

objects is whether the object properties are given or not.

The wizard objects are marked with “(w)” string in front of their names as shown in the following picture.

CIMON-Xpanel144


SEE :

· Wizard Object

· User Library

11.3.1 Wizard Object

Each wizard object has its own configuration dialog box. In this section, all the configuration dialog boxes of

wizards are explained.

IN THIS TOPIC :

BitLamp

Color

TagVal

BitSwitch1

BitSwitch2

TagWrite

DataEntry

MomentWrite

Command

HoriSize

VertSize

Keyinput

KeyInput2

OpenPage

ClosePage

BitLamp



The BitLamp wizard object

shows two different shapes at

runtime according to the state

of assigned digital TAG. The

texts and their colors are

configurable.

Color

The ‘Color’ wizard object provides

two different display colors

according to the value of a

specified TAG. The TAG can be an

analog TAG as well as a digital

TAG.

TagVal

CIMON-Xpanel146


The ‘TagVal’ wizard object

displays the value of specified

TAG. The colors of background

and value text are kept as

option. One of six available

formats can be chosen as display

format. All the available formats

are explained in the following

table.

Format Description

????

Display format will be automatically decided according to the data type of TAG.

If the data type of TAG is ‘Float’, then ‘####.0000’ format will be applied automatically.

Otherwise, ‘# # # #’ format is applied.

# # # # Decimal integer value display format or string tag value.

# # # # . 0 Floating point value display format with 1 significant digit.

# # # # . 0 0 Floating point value display format with 2 significant digits.

#### .000 Floating point value display format with 3 significant digits.

####.0000 Floating point value display format with 4 significant digits.

BitSwitch1



The BitSwitch1 wizard object

shows two different shapes at

runtime according to the state of

assigned digital TAG. And also,

this object provides touch

operation controlling function.

When this object is touched at

runtime, the state specified

digital TAG will be changed via

one of three control types (set,

reset or toggle).

If the ‘Enable Condition’ check

box is checked, a conditional

expression can be declared. The

evaluated value of this

expression enables or disables

the controlling function. If the

evaluated value is false, then the

controlling function will be

disabled. For more information

about conditional expression,

refer to the section of ‘Script’.

BitSwitch2

The BitSwitch2 wizard object shows two different shapes at runtime according to the state of assigned

digital TAG.

And also, this object provides touch operation controlling function. When this object is touched at runtime,

the state specified digital TAG will be toggled.

There are two differences between BitSwitch1 and BitSwitch2 wizard object. The BitSwitch2 object provides

text configuration function,

but it allows only one type of TAG control, toggling.

CIMON-Xpanel148


If the ‘Enable Condition’

check box is checked, a

conditional expression can be

declared. The evaluated value of

this expression enables or

disables the controlling function.

If the evaluated value is false,

then the controlling function will

be disabled. For more

information about conditional

expression, refer to the section

of ‘Script’.

TagWrite



The ‘TagWrite’ wizard object

provides the function of writing a

predefined value to a TAG. When

the object is touched by operator,

the predefined value will be written

to the specified TAG. If the

‘Condition’ check box was checked

and a conditional expression was

given, this function will be

controlled by this expression. If the

evaluated logic is false, then the

TAG writing function will not work

even if this object is touched by

operator. For more information

about conditional expression, refer

to the section of ‘Script’.

DataEntry

CIMON-Xpanel150


The ‘DataEntry’ wizard object

provides a touch button

function which gets number

input from operator. Input

number will be applied to the

specified TAG. And also, input

range checking function

applicable to the input value.

Following three sample pictures show the available keypad window style. The size of keypad window is

different between each window style.

Window Style 1 Window Style 2 Window Style 3



MomentWrite

The ‘MomentWrite’ wizard object

provides a momentary push button

function. When the button is

pushed, a value specified as ‘When

Pushed’ is written to the device

memory. And next, when the

button is released, another value

specified as ‘When Released’ is

written to the device memory

again.

This object can be controlled by a

logical value from conditional

expression, by checking the

‘Enable Condition’ check box. If the

calculated logic of conditional

expression is false, this object does

not issue the control values even if

it was touched by operator. Refer

to the section of ‘Script’ for more

information about the conditional

expression.

Command

CIMON-Xpanel152


The ‘Command’ wizard runs the programmed

command script when it was touched by operator.

This function can be filtered by the conditional

expression. The conditional expression can be

declared by checking the ‘Enable Condition’

check box. If the evaluated value of this

conditional expression is false, then the command

script will not be executed. For more information

about the command script and conditional

expression, refer to the section of ‘Script’.

HoriSize

The ‘HoriSize’ wizard object

provides a variable sized bar

function (bar graph). This object

is a horizontal bar styled graph,

and one of three origin (base)

position can be chosen (leftmost,

middle, rightmost).

VertSize



The ‘VertSize’ wizard object

provides a variable sized bar

function (bar graph). This object

is a vertical bar styled graph, and

one of three origin (base)

position can be chosen (bottom

side, middle, top side).

KeyInput

The ‘KeyInput’ wizard object emulates

keyboard input when the object is

touched by operator. It is useful when

‘KeyInput’ wizard object accompanies

other objects which need keyboard

inputs, such as ‘Trend Graph’, ‘DataLog’,

‘Alarm Summary’ and ‘Key Input

Window’.

This object can be controlled by a logical

value from conditional expression, by

checking the ‘Enable Condition’ check

box. If the calculated logic of conditional

expression is false, this object does not

issue the keyboard input code even if it

was touched by operator. Refer to the

section of ‘Script’ for more information

about the conditional expression.

CIMON-Xpanel154


KeyInput2

The ‘KeyInput2’ wizard object emulates

keyboard input when the object is

touched by operator. This object is an

enhanced version of ‘KeyInput’ wizard

object. ‘KeyInput2’ wizard object displays

the symbol character of specified key

code and provides the selectable color

option. It is useful when ‘KeyInput2’

wizard object accompanies other objects

which need keyboard inputs, such as

‘Trend Graph’, ‘DataLog’, ‘Alarm

Summary’ and ‘Key Input Window’.

This object can be controlled by a logical

value from conditional expression, by

checking the ‘Enable Condition’ check

box. If the calculated logic of conditional

expression is false, this object does not

issue the keyboard input code even if it

was touched by operator. Refer to the

section of ‘Script’ for more information

about the conditional expression.

OpenPage

The ‘OpenPage’ wizard object provides the opening function of a screen page when it is touched by

operator.

The name of page to be opened by this object should be specified.



If the ‘Condition’ check box is

checked, a conditional expression

can be declared. The evaluated logic

of this expression at runtime enables

or disables the function of this

object. If the evaluated logic is false,

then page opening function will not

work even if this object is touched by

operator. For more information about

conditional expression, refer to the

section of ‘Script’.

ClosePage

The ‘ClosePage’ wizard object

provides the screen page closing

function when it is touched by

operator. The name of page to be

closed by this object should be

specified.

If the ‘Condition’ check box is

checked, a conditional expression

can be declared. The evaluated value

of this expression at runtime enables

or disables the function of this

object. If the evaluated value is false,

then page closing function will not

work even if this object is touched by

operator. For more information about

conditional expression, refer to the

section of ‘Script’.

11.3.2 User Library

Besides the provided library objects, user created graphic objects can be registered in the library.

CIMON-Xpanel156


Add a New Object to Library

1. Create a graphic object. And make the object as selected state as shown in the example below.

2. Open the library manipulating window. Follow the menu ‘Tools’-‘User Library Edit’.

3.Give a group name and object name of created object. If the group name is not registered before, a new

group with given name will be created automatically.

If the object name is the same name with existing object in library, this library object will

be replaced with the new one.



4. The ‘Add’ button of above dialog box will register the new object to library.

Open the library window and check the result as shown in the following picture.

Delete an Object from Library

CIMON-Xpanel158


1. Open the library manipulating window without any object selection. (‘Tools’-‘User Library Edit’ menu)

Then, the library manipulating window will be shown with ‘Delete’ button as shown in the following

example.

2. The object to be deleted can be found by using the ‘Group Name’ and ‘Object Name’ combo box.

If the object was found, press the ‘Delete’ button to remove the object from library.

11.4 Object Properties

XPanel page is a dynamic screen based on graphic objects. Every graphic object in page has its own properties.

Some of properties are static properties such as color, line style, line width and so on.

And some other properties are dynamic properties such as animation style, control type etc.

XPanelDesigner provides a integrated configuration window for setting up such kind of various properties of

graphic objects.

A configuration window example is presented below.



See

Style

Visble

Blink

V-Size

H-Size

V-Move

H-Move

Color

Touch

Entry Data

CIMON-Xpanel160


11.4.1 Style

All the static graphic properties can be configured in this page. Object’s position, size, color, fill pattern, fill color

etc. are the configurable properties.

Note that the upper-left corner of screen and object are the origin of position coordinate.



11.4.2 Visible

The ‘Visible’ property makes the object visible or not, according to the specified TAG’s value.

Typically a digital TAG is used to control the visibility of the object.

CIMON-Xpanel162


11.4.3 Blink

The ‘Blink’ property makes the object to blink when the TAG value is the given state.

The blinking speed is adjustable in the unit of 100mSec.

11.4.4 V-Size



The ‘V-Size’ property varies the height of the object depending on the value of specified TAG.

If TAG value is equal to the designated minimum value, the height of object will be 0.

And if TAG value is equal to the designated maximum value, then the height of object will be original height.

(Original height is the drawn height.)

11.4.5 H-Size

CIMON-Xpanel164


The ‘H-Size’ property varies the width of the object depending on the value of specified TAG.

If TAG value is equal to the designated minimum value, the width of object will be 0.

And if TAG value is equal to the designated maximum value, then the width of object will be original width.

(Original width is the drawn width.)

11.4.6 V-Move



The ‘V-Move’ property moves the object depending on the value of specified TAG.

If TAG value is equal to the designated minimum value, the position of the object will be originally drawn

position.

And if TAG value is equal to the designated maximum value, then the position will be moved with the amount

of pixel value assigned to

the ‘Move’ field. If the ‘Bottom’ was checked as the base position, the movement direction will be upward.

Otherwise (‘Top’), the movement direction will be downward.

11.4.7 H-Move

CIMON-Xpanel166


The ‘H-Move’ property moves the object depending on the value of specified TAG.

If TAG value is equal to the designated minimum value, the position of the object will be originally drawn

position.

And if TAG value is equal to the designated maximum value, then the position will be moved with the amount

of pixel value assigned to

the ‘Move’ field. If the ‘Left’ was checked as the base position, the movement direction will be right.

Otherwise (‘Right’), the movement direction will be left.



11.4.8 Color

The ‘Color’ property changes the fill color of object depending on the value of specified TAG.

Maximum 8 different color boundary values can be declared.

This means that there can be maximum 9 different colors including the original color of object.

11.4.9 Rotate

CIMON-Xpanel168


The ‘Rotate’ property rotates the object depending on the value of specified TAG.

The rotate direction and angle and center position are configurable parameters.

The center point can be easily calculated with the coordinate information in ‘Style’ properties (static properties)

.

For example, assume a following object’s coordinate data in ‘Style’ property page.

This object’s center point is :

Xcent = X + Width / 2 =

141 + 312 / 2 = 297

Ycent = Y + Height / 2 =

30 + 33 / 2 = 46.5 = 46



11.4.10Touch

The ‘Touch’ property creates an operator touch zone. Following table shows the list of available actions with

the ‘Touch’ property.

Action Description Configuration Items

Open Page Open a new page specified in below.

Close Page Close the specified page

Write Tag ValueWrite the specified value to the specifiedTAG.

CIMON-Xpanel170


Write Digital ValueControl the digital TAG with one of threeavailable control types.

Write MomentaryWrite two different values in series to thespecified TAG. One value at touch downand the other value at touch release.

Command Expression

Execute the programmed commandexpression. Refer to the ‘Script’ section formore information about the commandexpression.

Key InputIssue the specified key code at touch. Thisaction emulates the keyboard input.

If the ‘Condition’ check box above is checked, a conditional expression can be declared.

The evaluated value of this expression at runtime enables or disables the function of this property.

If the evaluated value is false, then the defined action will not work even if the touch zone is touched by

operator.

For more information about conditional expression, refer to the section of ‘Script’.

Furthermore, the touch zone has its own security level.

The specified action is executed only when the object is touched by the operator who has higher level of

privilege level

than the specified security level. For more information about the security system of XPanel, refer to the

‘Security’ section.



11.4.11EntryData

[ Number Enrty Data ] [ String Enrty Data ]

The ‘EntryData’ property creates an

operator touch area which pops up one

of three different sized number or

string pad. Input data from operator will

be applied to the specified TAG. And

also, input range checking function

applicable to the input value. Following

three sample pictures show the

available number or string pad window

style. The size of number or string pad

window is different between each

window style. (‘Window style 3’ number

CIMON-Xpanel172


pad fits small sized screen well, such

as 320x240 resolution)

[ Position Offset ]

Number Window Style 1 Number Window Style 2 Number Window Style 3

11.4.12Switch/Lamp

1. Overview

This function can express Switch/Lamp object on the monitor, practice the designated action or check the

condition of tag.

Each function of switch and lamp registered in the page can be used independently or two functions can be used

together by registering same tag.



2. Switch Function

Object Name It is a name of pertinent Switch/Lamp object.

Shape Select "State Image Select" of Switch/Lamp is displayed.

Shape nil

Switch/lamp will be displayed on the page as a transparent state like the area(size) of

switch/lamp.

A pertinent area is displayed in the dotted line.

Touch - Down / Touch- Up

The operation point of the function registered in a pertinent switch can be confirmed.

It is possible to add the new function and delete an existing function.

Function SelectionTab

Select - Switch / Switch Common / Lamp / Label Function

Switch FunctionSelection Buttons

Select - Switch according to each function. The screen above is a Bit Switch selection

screen.

1) Bit Switch

CIMON-Xpanel174


Tag Name Input - Tag Name to the Bit Switch

Function

Select - Function of Bit Switch

· Set : The specified tag enters the state of turning on if the switch is pushed. The

state is maintained.

· Reset : The specified tag enters the state of turning off if the switch is pushed. The

state is maintained.

· Toggle : The specified tag changes into the state of ON/OFF if the switch is

pushed.

Momentary This function is registered to the Special Function Switch.

2) Word Switch



Switch Function

Select - Switch Function of Word Switch

- Write Analog Value : The value that the user set to the specified tag can be input.

- Tag Operation :When acting switch, the Operation action to the specified tag can

be specified.

Operation that can be specified : +, -, AND, OR, XOR

Value

You can input the value of the tag registered in analogue switch and it is supported

with the data input of two shapes of 10/16 essence. Only if the switch action is the tag

Operation, the tag can be used.

HexaThe form of the input value can be specified. If it is not a check, it will basically

recognize it by the value of the decimal number.

Operator

When Tag Operation is selected in the Switch Function, Operation Function can be

used.

Operation that can be specified : +, -, AND, OR, XOR

CIMON-Xpanel176


3) Page

Page TypeSelect - Page Type when Page Function is used

- Normal Page / Keypad Page only one page can be registered in a pertinent switch.

Page Name Input - Page Name

Tag Name Input - Tag Name

HORIZ. / VER. Input - Size of Page

Max. / Min. Value Setup a Max. / Min. Value of Tag

4) Special Function



Switch Action

Command : Command that can be used with Xpanel Designer can be input.

Key Input : Set the Keyboard Input Function to Switch.

Write the Value of Momentary : It is a Momentary input function.

Key Value Select - Key Value. The same input as the input with a general keyboard is possible.

Down - Input Value When acting switch, set the Input Value in the condition that Switch Downs.

Up - Input Value When acting switch, set the Input Value in the condition that Switch Ups.

3. Switch Common

CIMON-Xpanel178


Use TouchSet the Touch Condition. When the relative terms are satisfied, the touch action of

switch is possible.

Touch Condition

SettingInput - Touch Condition

Use Security Function Check - Use Security Function

Security Setting Set the Security Level. The highest level is ten for the security level.

4. Lamp



Use Lamp Set - "Use Lamp".

Tag TypeSet - "Tag Type" of Lamp .

The string tag cannot be selected.

State

Ranges of the number of states are different because of the kind of pertinent tag and

the union of the state conversion condition.

Digital Tag Analog Tag

At each Bit condition

conversion2 - 5 2-17

With Data condition

conversion2-16 2-256

Tag RegistrationBecause the activated State is changed by the number of each State, register tags

after setting the number of the State.

5. Label

- The pertinent label could be expressed to each switch / lamp object.

- Label can express the registered string to the "direct input" and the "string table".

- "Font Set" can be set to each label.

CIMON-Xpanel180


Sate Select The "Sate Select" is activated based on the number of states set to the lamp.

Input Type Select - "Direct Input" or "String Table".

Direct InputThe user can make the content directly by being activated when the "Direct Input" is

selected.

String Table Set When the string table is selected, a pertinent string can be set.

Font Set "Font Set" can set the size, the color, and the alignment of the displayed string.

6. Image Setting of Switch/Lamp



1) Click - [Shape Select]

Part Palette The image library registered now is displayed.

CIMON-Xpanel182


PatternThere is a pattern in each image registered in each palette. The corresponding patterncan be selected.

Part No. The part images registered in a present palette can be selected.

New Palette Set - The name and the storage point of a new palette

Create Call - 'Part Registration' that selects images to register in the New Palette.

Delete Delete - The part image registered in the palette

Double Click - "State" Image or Select a state and Click the "Open" button to register image.

As you check the transparent state, the background picture without the shape of the object from the image

becomes transparent (the image expressed to the page has no background picture).


Part

XII

Keypad


12 Keypad Page

By using the function, you can use the page designed by the operator as the keypad for the data input.

See :

· Make Keypad Page

12.1 Make Keypad Page

Make Keypad Page

Make KeypadPage

Following picture shows how to create "Keypad Page".

*The keypad page should satisfy the following condition.

Select - "Keypad Page" in Page Properties

It should include ‘Keypad input window’ one more and be smaller than the picture’s

size in the setup.

Create - New Page and Set - "Keypad Page" in Page Properties

Change - The size of page in Page Position and Click - [->Copy]

CIMON-Xpanel186


Register - "Key Input Window"

•In the registration of the keypad input window, the designated tag is ignored when it is

operated by the keypad. Instead of it, ‘Command On Input’ is normally handled.

•When it is operated by the keypad, all key input windows registered to the page hand the

input figure to the tag registered to ‘Open the keypad page’ lastly called. If registered tag

is the number (analogue, digital) tag and the inputted content in the key input window is

not able to express numerically, the writing action will be ignored.

Register - "Key Input" button to input the value in "Key Input Window"

Keypad


Save the Page.

Using KeypadPage

Following picture shows how to use "Keypad Page".

Open - Page to call "Keypad Page" and "Object Config" to use by button.

Select - "Touch" function and Set - "Keypad Page Open" in the Print Page of Action

Register - "Tag Name" to input the value from the keypad page

Input - HORIZ. and VER. for position of keypad page

If Maximum/Minimum Value of input are applied, set up the range of Maximum/Minimum

Value.

Register - Keypad Page to "Page Name"

•If the registered page is normal and popup page, 'Action' will be "Open Page".

•As the keypad page is already opened, the page is moved to the designated position.


Part

XIII

Key Input Window 189


13 Key Input Window

The Keyboard-Input is expressed to the monitor and stored with a designated tag.

It utilizes to manage a bar code input and to compose the screen of a password log-in.

See :

· Key Input Setting

13.1 Key Input Setting

Click - [Draw] -> [Key Input Window] of Xpanel Designer

CIMON-Xpanel190


End-Code Save inputted contents after inputting the value of a designated key at the tag.

Input Tag Name Select - String Tag to save the input contents.

Command On

Input

Input - "Command"

The Command inputted here is operated after obtaining the input complete code

and storing the input content to the designated tag.

[Ex.] [When the input value is 1234, the "Main" page is opened.] Write the following

command.

IF(BARCODE_00 == “1234”)

PageOpen(“Main”) ;

Max. Input Set the length of the Max. String expressed to the key input window.

Key Input Window 191


Characters Not to express the String over the designated length on the input window.

Max. / Min ValueIf Analog Tag is selected, Set - "Max. / Min. Value". This setting is disregarded in

the string tag.

Min. Value Set - Input Min. Value

Max. Value Set - Input Max. Value

Clear Window At

Overflow

If this setting is checked, remove the last content and then express the new

content.

End-Code Process The state of the key input widow is changed referring to the setting of "End-Code".

Remove Input

FocusRemove Input Focus of key input widow. The string is not input any more.

Move Focus To

Next Input Window

Other key input windows are automatically selected. The selection of key input

window that input completes is canceled.

Clear Window

Clear - Content of key input window

After checking and obtaining the input complete code, save the tag’s value and

remove the content expressed to the present key input window.

If the check is canceled, the tag’s value will be saved and the last input content is

displayed before obtaining next key input.

Password Type The string is displayed in the key input window by “***" form if checked.

Show Keyboard

On Double Click

Show Keyboard On Double Click 'Key Input Window'

It will disappear when a soft keyboard is displayed.

CAUTION

If two more key input windows are registered in the one screen, the key input is applied to only the one

window that is activated.

So, in case of using the key input with other Objects, the control of the key input of other Objects are not

handled normally.


Part

XIV

Data Logging 193


14 Data Logging

This function is used to save the tag value for logging in file type.

The tags for logging are analog and digital tag. Only the tags selected for data logging when tags are registered

to a database are available.

For logging tag values, a data-logging model should be set up and be registered to a project.

According to selected model, the data of a corresponding tag are logged and saved in file type.

The logged tag data is used as the data for a trend.

· The function to save a logged data in file is provided.

· Data are logged according to regular interval or in case that a value is changed.

· Files that are classified according to file size and logging term are saved.

· Back-up function, which is used to save logged data file to other location automatically, is provided.

· A specific data saved in a file can be read through Script language.

· Logged data can be displayed on a trend window through Historical Trend.

See :

· Data Logging Configuration

· Using Data Logging

14.1 Data Logging Configuration

Click - [Tools] -> [Data Logging] of Xpanel Designer

CIMON-Xpanel194


Description of Control Button

Add

If you press the Add button after you configure data logging, a new model will be

added. If a same logging model name exists, an Error dialogue box will appear.

ApplyThis is used to register a corresponding data-logging model. If you press this button,

a registered model will be displayed in the data logging model list on the left.

Delete

This is used to delete a created model. If you press the Delete button after you select the model deleted in a datalogging model list, a Warning dialogue box will appear. If you want to delete,select “Yes”. Otherwise, select “No”.

Data Logging 195


Close

This is used to close a Data Logging Configuration. If you change or add a data-logging model, the dialogue box to ask whethera model is registered will appear.

Configuration of Data Logging

Logging ModelName

This is used to enter the name of the data-logging model created.

The limited conditions

1. It is available to enter in the combination of English, Korean, numeral and

specific characters.

2. There is no limitation on the number of the characters entered.

If you do not enter it, an Error dialog box will appear as follows.

Start Type

Xpanel provides 5 different start types. Each of these is based on period,

command, tag and time.

Whenever a new log task is started, a new block file will be created and the old

task will be stopped and closed automatically.

The name of a block file is automatically generated based on the started time.

CIMON-Xpanel196


Periodic

A log task is started periodically. The period of task invoking is configured in the unit

of minute. During one day, log task is started on every multiple of designated

minute. For example, if the ‘Base Time’ was configured as 1H 30M, the log task

will be invoked on 00:00, 01:30, 03:00, 04:30, ..., 22:30.

This example assumes that ‘Time Offset’ is configured as ‘0’. The ‘time offset’ is a

delay of start. If it is assigned as 10, the log task of previous example will be invoked

on 00:10, 01:40 and so on.

Called (by command)

This type of invoking is triggered by a command. A command can be issued by touch

operation or script program. The command has a following format :

DataLog("ModelName", 1)

Trigger TAG

The log task is triggered by the state change of a TAG. When the value of a TAG

changes from zero to non-zero, the log task will be invoked. The value change from

non-zero to zero does not affect to the log task. Designate the name of TAG in ‘Tag

Name’ field.

Enable TAG

The log task is triggered by the state change of a TAG. When the value of a TAG

changes from zero to non-zero, the log task will be invoked. And when the value

changes from non-zero to zero, the log task will be terminated. That is, the log task

keeps logging only while the value of TAG is non-zero. Designate the name of TAG

in ‘Tag Name’ field.

On Time

The log task is invoked only once in a day. Set the time of log in ‘Base Time’ field.

Log Type

(1)Periodic

Tag values are logged at "Periodic".

In case of logging at "Periodic", input a logging Period by the second.

Data Logging 197


(2)Tag Value

If the value of tag is changed, data is logged.

In case of logging at "Tag Value", input a Name of Tag.

The setting of tag is possible only the tag registered in [Tools] ->

[Database] of Xpanel Designer.

Maximum Log No.

Per Block

Setup - Maximum Log No. Per Block

The setting range is 1~2048, and the Data Logging of the block is closed when

the setting maximum number is exceeded.

Maximum Block

No.

Setup - Maximum Block No.

The setting range is 1~32.

[CAUTION] When the setting Maximum Log No. is exceeded, data is covered

to the data block that became the oldest.

Tags

Register - Log Data

The tag that can be registered is digital tag and analog tag.

The selecting of tag is possible only the tag registered in [Tools] -> [Database]

of Xpanel Designer.

14.2 Using Data Logging

How to Save Logging File

Because the Data Logging file is saved by the XXXX type, the user is not seen.

Therefore, it is necessary to change to the CSV format for which the user can utilize this data. The following

two functions are offered in Xpanel for this.

MakeCsv(S1, R2)

MakeCsvUsb(S1, R2)

For details on Internal Function, refer to the Script manual.

On Screen Display

Click - [Draw] -> [Data Log] of Xpanel Designer

CIMON-Xpanel198


Log Model NameSelect - Log Model Name to display on screen.

Only the model registered by the process of two can be selected.

Text Color,Line

Color,Line TypeSetup - Table type of the Log Model

Column No., Row

No.

Setup - Shape of the table

Column first displays 'Date' and 'Time' of "Display" and the name of tag registered in

the Data Log Model is sequentially displayed.

Row displays the Log Data that corresponds to each tag and when 'Maximum

Value', 'Minimum Value', 'Average Value', and 'Summation Value' of "display" are

selected, the selected display item is displayed by reverse order in the Row of the

end of table.

When the setting Maximum Log No. is exceeded, it is possible to see by moving the

data of table via [Draw] -> [Key Input Window] of Xpanel Designer. Refer to the

"Keypad Page" manual

Date TypeSetup - Date Type when 'Date' is selected in "display".

Date Type provides 'YY/MM/DD', 'DD/MM/YY', 'MM/DD', and 'DD/MM'.

Display Display - Necessary item in six-kind item like 'Date' and 'Time' etc.


Part

XV

CIMON-Xpanel200


15 Data Bridge

Data bridge of Xpanel makes data synchronization between the communication measures possible.

Data bridge by the designated event sends the data of Source Device to the designated area of Destination

Device.

< Data Bridge data flowchart >

See :

· Edit Data Bridge Model

15.1 Edit Data Bridge Model

Click - [Tools] -> [Data Bridge] of Xpanel Designer

Data Bridge 201


Icon Description

Icon Description

Add Data Bridge Model

Edit Data Bridge Model

Delete Data Bridge Model

Add Data Bridge Tag

Edit Data Bridge Tag

Delete Data Bridge Tag

Basic Setup

CIMON-Xpanel202


Model Name Input - Data Bridge Model Name. Model Name should be entered but should not be

duplicated.

Model Type Tag Base :

If "Tag Base" is checked in the model type, the model will have Source tags and

Destination tags.

If the event happens by the designated Sync. Type, the operation of the data

synchronization starts and the value of the Source tag is sent to the Destination tag in a

registered order. In case of it, if the communication of one side is not operated or the

value of each tag is same, the operation of the synchronization will be canceled and

next tag will start.

Under the operation of the synchronization, if the synchronization events happen, the

letter event will be ignored.

Block Base :

If "Block Base" is checked in the model type, block information area of the model editor

is activated.

If the event happens by the designated Sync. Type, by reading the address area of the

tag designated to the 'Source Block Start Tag', data as same as the block size is sent to

the address area of the 'Destination Block Start Tag'. In case of it, if the communication

of one side is not operated, the operation of the synchronization will be canceled and

there are no data comparison to pertinent areas before the operation of the

synchronization.

Under the operation of the synchronization, if the synchronization events happen, the

letter event will be ignored.

Sync. Type Immediately :

It is possible to select "Immediately" when "Tag Base" is checked in the model type.

The value of the Source tag is always compared with the value of the Destination tag

and if the wrong value, the value of the Source tag is sent to the Destination tag.

Trigger : Sync. Event happens when the value of the specified Trigger tag is changed

from 0 to none 0.

Periodic : .Sync. Event happens by the time designated in "Sync. Period"

Trigger Tag It is activated when "Trigger" is checked in the Sync. Type and Sync. Event happens by

the value of the designated tag.

Sync. Period It is activated when "Periodic" is checked in the Sync. Type and Sync. Event happens by

the periodic value of the designated tag.

Block

Information

Setup - Synchronization Parameters of Block unit model. It is activated when "Block

Base" is checked in the model type.

· Block Size : Setup -Block Size for the data synchronization

Data Bridge 203


The data of the registered number is sent to the Destination Block.

· Source Block Start : Register - Source Block Start Tag

Real Tag of the device with a consecutive address should

be registered .

· Source Handshake : The value of the tag registered before reading the data of the

Source Block is made as 1,

the value is initialized by 0 after work is completed. It is

used to confirm the Source Data Reception

and Digital Tag should be registered.

· Destination Block Start : Register - Destination Block Start Tag

Real Tag of the device with a consecutive address

should be registered.

· Destination Handshake : The value of the tag registered before writing the data of

the Destination Block is made as 1,

the value is initialized by 0 after work is completed. It

is used to confirm the Destination Data

Transmission and Digital Tag should be registered.

CIMON-Xpanel204


Point

Other communication work to I/O Device will be delayed while synchronization working.

When you use the data bridge function too much or frequently generate the synchronization event,

please note the communication update can be delayed.


Part

XVI

CIMON-Xpanel206


16 Modbus Slave

1. Function

By the function, the communication can be composed between Master equipment and Xpanel using the Modbus

protocol(RTU, TCP).

Xpanel has memory for Modbus Slave action inside, and if Master asks via the designated communication

channel, it answers to put the content of the memory in the frame.

The Modbus memory is composed of Coil(Max Size: 5000) and the Holding Register(Max Size: 10000) area and

Digital tag can be registered in the Coil area and Analogue/String tag be registered in the Holding Register Area.

· Ex. When Tag1 is registered in Holding Register 400001, If it keeps reading the value of 400001 in Master, the

value of Tag1 is understood and moreover if it keeps writing the value in 400001, the value of Tag1 can be

changed.

Function Contents

1 Coil Area Reading

3 Hold Register Area Reading

5 Coil 단독 Writing

6 Holding Register 단독 Writing

Modbus Slave 207


15 Coil 연속 Writing

16 Holding Register 연속 Writing

< Modbus Function >

If the data form of the registered tag is bigger than Word (UINT 32, INT32, float..) or is the string tag, the

designated number will be used as the beginning number of data.

· Ex 1. When the Form of Tag1 registered in Holding Register 400001 is UINT32, the data of Tag 1 is updated

to 400001 and 400002. When the value is written in 400002 with Master, the value of Tag 1 is also changed.

· Ex 2. When Tag 3 registered in Holding Register 400001 is string tag(string size : 10), the data of Tag 3 is

updated to 400010 ~ 400014. When the value is written in 400014 with Master, the value of Tag 3 is also

changed.

16.1 Modbus Slave Setting

Open Modbus Slave

Click - [Tools] -> [Data Sever] -> [MODBUS Slave] of XpanelDesigner or Modbus Slave item of Project

CIMON-Xpanel208


window.

Communication Setting

The communication channel means a physical passage(Serial, Ethernet) for connection with Master. Setup -

Communication Parameter of the port and the Modbus Unit No. etc. in the channel setting.

The communication channel without the action form is registered up to 3, and each channel can be connected

with one Master.

Communication Setting

Communication Editing

Communication Deletion

· Unit No. is a Modbus Unit No. of Xpanel.

· The communication port should be set not to be duplicated with another communication channel or I/O device.

Modbus Slave 209


· The "Soket No." defined in the Modbus TCP protocol is 502.

· When you register the TCP channel by the addition, The "Soket No." should be set not to be duplicated. In this

case, it is necessary to edit the setting of Master.

Coil Area Tag 등록

· The Coil Area can be registered up to 05000(5000).

CIMON-Xpanel210


· Register - Tag in the Coils Area. If the tag is not registered, the basic value(0) would be answered.

· Click - "Coils Area" in the left window. Register or Edit - Tag using (Registration), (Editing) buttons.

Holding Register Area Tag 등록

· The Holding Register Area can be registered up to 410000(10000).

· Register - Tag in the Holding Register Area. If the tag is not registered, the basic value(0) would be answered.

· Click - "Holding Register Area" in the left window. Register or Edit - Tag using (Registration), (Editing)

buttons.


Part

XVII

CIMON-Xpanel212


17 Recipe

The recipe service of Xpanel supports the multiple models. This makes it possible to manipulate different recipe

for multiple devices with an Xpanel.

In an Xpanel, every recipe model has its own name, parameters and group data. Up to 1024 group data can be

registered in a recipe model.

But at any time, only one group data can be manipulated in Xpanel. The reason is that a group data must be

located in the memory of Xpanel for manipulation.

A group data can be transferred between four types of media.

And the Xpanel memory is located at the center of these transfers. Following picture shows paths of group data

movement.

Each of group data movement is issued by the internal functions for recipe operation. More precise explanations

can be found on the script section of this manual.

RcpCsvRd(S1, S2,

R3)

A group data can be imported from external memory through CSV formatted file.

CSV formatted file can be created or read by the spreadsheet utilities such as

MS-Excel on PC

RcpMemUp(S1), A group data can be uploaded from the device through communication. For normal

Recipe 213


RcpMemDown(S1) recipe operation,

the communication driver must support the recipe functions.

This can be known from the manual of the communication driver. Refer to the

driver’s manual.

RcpFileStore(S1, R2),

RcpFileRead(S1, R2)

The group data in memory can be stored to the recipe configuration file.

The stored group data will be maintained while power off.

And the function for reading a group data from configuration file is provided also.

RcpUpload(S1, R2) Compounded functions are provided for convenience.

RcpUpload() function is a compounded form of RcpMemUp() and RcpFileStore()

RcpDownload(S1,

R2)

RcpDownload() function is a compounded form of RcpFileRead() and

RcpMemDown().

See :

· Model Configuration

· Recipe Operator Interface

17.1 Model Configuration

A recipe model is defined by following dialog box of Xpanel Designer.

CIMON-Xpanel214


Basic Properties

Mo

del

Na

me

Every recipe model has its own name. This name will be used in the functions for recipe operation.

Nu

mb

er

of

Gr

ou

p

One or more recipe group data can be predefined in a recipe configuration file.

‘Number of Group’ field gets the total number of predefined group data.

These group data can be read or written by RcpFileRead() or RcpFileStore(). Each group is distinguished by the

index number in those functions. According to the following example picture, index 0 is the Vanilla, and index 1 is

Choco and so on.

Re

cip

e

Ar

ea

Sta

rt

Po

siti

on

One of analog TAG in database can be assigned to this field. The device address of the TAG must be designated

with the first address of the recipe data memory area of a device. This memory area must be continuous. The

analog TAG of this field specifies not only the first address but also specifies the type of data. Xpanel supports

WORD (16 bits) and DWORD (32 bits) type of data for recipe. Therefore, the data type of an analog TAG for this

field should be one of INT16, UINT16, INT32 or UINT32. Following picture shows the property page of analog

TAG.

Recipe 215


Nu

mb

er

of

Da

ta

This field gets the total number of recipe group data items. All groups in a model have the same number of data.

The exact size of a recipe group data can be calculated from this value and the data type described in the

previous field (Recipe Area Start Position).

Handshake with the Device

Xpanel does handshake with a device while up/download a recipe data via communication.

The handshake is progressed on the basis of device memories. These handshake memories must be

declared as TAGs in the database of Xpanel.

Wo

rd

Ha

nd

sh

ak

e

Word handshake is a group of up/download request flags. It must be declared as an analog TAG with 16 bits

property. This word is divided into two different areas. High nibble of the word is the flags for request from

device (for example a PLC), and low nibble of word is the flags for request from Xpanel.

CIMON-Xpanel216


BIT

Ha

nd

sh

ak

e

The bit handshake must be declared as a digital TAG in database. It is set or reset by Xpanel.

This flag indicates that the recipe data transfer is under the progressing.

Therefore, by this flag, the device can recognize the fact that its recipe data are ready for use or not.

Gr

ou

p

Nu

mb

er

This field retains the group number for upload or download. And it is effective only when the recipe data

transfer is issued by device (PLC) side. The device can choose a group in Xpanel configuration file which is

wanted to be up/downloaded. The group number can be a number between 0 to 1023.

Following time chart shows the status of handshake signals during recipe data transfer. It is an example of

up/download issued by PLC side. For transfer a new recipe data from Xpanel to device (PLC), the group

number should be decided foremost and written to the memory of group number. And next, the device

signals the bit08 (or bit09) flag of word handshake. Immediately after detection of that signal, Xpanel sets the

bit handshake and starts to transfer the recipe group data which is designated by the group number field.

After the successful transfer, Xpanel resets the bit handshake signal and clears the word handshake also. The

device can recognize the completion of transfer through those handshake signals.

Following time chart shows an example of recipe data transfer issued by Xpanel side. All the handshake

signals are controlled by Xpanel. The group number field has no meaning at Xpanel issued transfer. Since the

group number was designated in the parameter of functions already (RcpUpload(), RcpDownload()) or does

not need the group number because data are not for file access (RcpMemUp(), RcpMemDown()). The device

can recognize the progress of recipe data transfer with word and bit handshake signals.

Recipe 217


Post Process for Uploaded Data

Automatically

File Store On PLC

Managed Upload

This option is effective only for the uploaded data by device side. As explained in

previous section, the device (PLC) can control the uploading process by using

handshake signal (bit9 of word handshake) and a group number.

If this option is checked, Xpanel will store the received recipe group data to the

configuration file automatically at the end of upload process. At that moment, the

group number from device will be used to determine which group in a file should be

replaced with the newly received data. Stored group data will be retained permanently

in flash memory even while Xpanel is powered off. If this option is not checked, the

uploaded data will be stored only in RAM.

17.2 Recipe Operator Interface

Recipe Functions

Xpanel provides 9 functions for recipe operation.

Those functions can be used as command of touch operation as well as script. Following table shows a list

of recipe functions.

(Please refer to the ‘Script’ section for more information)

Function Description

RcpDownload(S1, R2) Read a group of recipe data from file, and download it to device

RcpUpload(S1, R2) Upload the specified recipe group data from device, and store it to file.

RcpStop(S1) Stop and terminate the processing job of specified recipe model.

RcpFileStore(S1, R2) Stores the recipe data to the file..

CIMON-Xpanel218


RcpFileRead(S1, R2) Read the recipe data from file.

RcpMemDown(S1) Download the current recipe data to device.

RcpMemUp(S1) Upload the recipe data from device.

RcpCsvRd(S1, S2, R3) Read the recipe data from CSV formatted file.

RcpConfig() Pops up a dialog box for recipe data manipulation.

Recipe Dialog Box

RcpConfig() function pops up a dialog box on screen. This dialog box provides some tools for manipulating

recipe data in memory.

Each data item in a group can be modified by touch operation. Following picture shows a example of recipe

dialog box.

Save Save button stores the recipe group

data to the recipe configuration file.

The storage media can be the internal

flash memory of Xpanel or other

external none-volatile memory device

such as SD/MMC. It is dependent on

the location of project folder which is

determined on start-up.

Upload Upload button reads the recipe data

from device. Current recipe data in

memory will be discarded and

replaced with those of device. This

button gives the same result with the

function RcpMemUp()

Downl

oad

Download button writes current recipe

data in memory to device. This button

gives the same result with the

function RcpMemDown()

CSV File Importing

Xpanel provides a way to import the external recipe group data.

Recipe 219


External data must be a CSV formatted file and the SD/MMC or USB memory can be used for importing

media.

Following picture shows the work flow of recipe data importing.

Writing a CSV file CSV formatted file can be generated by spreadsheet program of PC such as Excel.

A CSV file can include one group data and the first data of this file should be the number of

following recipe data. This number must same with the ‘Number of Data’ field of recipe

configuration dialog box.

Importing the

CSV file

on external

memory

RcpCsvRd() function is used for importing a CSV file from external memory media. External

memory can be the SD/MMC or USB memory. If there is no fault to access the CSV file in

external memory, the recipe group data will be loaded to RAM of Xpanel. After successful loading

of recipe group data, they can be manipulated in various ways. They can be stored in

configuration file and also can be downloaded to the device, Please refer to the ‘Script’ section

for more information about RcpCsvRd() function.


Part

XVIII

System Memory 221


18 System Memory

System Memory function supports useful continuous memory space for the script, recipe and so

on.

This function also uses continuous data storage at the script or editing buffer at the script.

· System Memory : Continuous Data Space

· Continuous data storage for the Script.

· Editing group data space for the Recipe

See :

· Using System Memory Tag

· Example of using system memory about opened page log.

· Editing recipe data using system memory

18.1 Using System Memory Tag

System Memory Configuration

CIMON-Xpanel222


Select menu [Tools] -> [Project(P)]

“System Memory Size” configures system memory size. If it is inputted 1000 like above figure then it

assigns range 0 ~ 999.

Registering Tag

Register the tag at data base for use system memory as like virtual tag.

This case can handle system memory value directly and monitor the value.

System Memory 223


Input tag name. Select the kind of tag.

(System Memory area must be used as the Digital/Analog tag.)

Select real tag at the general tab. Select “SYSTEM MEMORY” at the I/O device.

( “SYSTEM MEMORY” item has been registered basically.)

Input I/O address will be used. If it is inputted “5” like above figure then address 5 data can be handled ormonitored.

(If it is inputted less than 0 or out of the range assigned, the system tag will not be worked.)

18.2 Example of using system memory about opened page log.

Follow example shows the method of making opened page log by using system memory.

· Select system memory size

· Register two virtual tags at the data base.

Name : PAGE_NUM, Type : Analog, Initial Value : 0

Name : PAGE_LOG_SIZE, Type : Analog, Initial Value : 0

CIMON-Xpanel224


· Register 10 system memory tags at the data base.

Name : SYSTEM_00, Type : Analog

Change I/O address as the follow figure and register 10 tags until SYSTEM_09.

· Select menu [Tools] -> [Script(S)]

· Create the script as follow.

System Memory 225


· Input commands at script as follows

// Move system memory data from address 0 to PAGE_LOG_SIZE based on address 1.

Sysmemmove(0,1,PAGE_LOG_SIZE);

// Save current page number at the system memory address 0.

SetSysMem(0,PAGE_NUM);

// If PAGE_LOG_SIZE if less than 10 then increase 1.

if(PAGE_LOG_SIZE < 10)

PAGE_LOG_SIZE = PAGE_LOG_SIZE + 1;

· "Create new page “Page1”

CIMON-Xpanel226


· Select [Tools] -> [Page setup]

· Input as follow figure in the action tab.

· If “Page1” is opened, PAGE_NUM tag value is set 1 and runs InserPageLog function.

· Create “Page2”, “Page3” and input as above figure changing PAGE_NUM tag value.

System Memory 227


· Arrange tag object at the page and let it indicates “SYSTEM_00” tag.

· Through the same method arrange SYSTEM_01, SYSTEM_02,…SYSTEM_09 tags at the page.

· Copy above objects and paste to all pages.

CIMON-Xpanel228


· Insert Side5Button wizard from library and register page open action at each button.

System Memory 229


· Open configure window through [Tools]->[CIMON-XPANEL setup(X)].Indicate starting page anddownload project.

· Every time when the page is opened by using side button, logs of opened page are updated.

CIMON-Xpanel230


< Xpanel acting page, recently opened page >

18.3 Editing recipe data using system memory

Bellow example shows the method of editing recipe internal buffer using system memory.

Registering System tag

Register system memory tag at the data base for displaying system value tag value at the monitor.

Register 10 tags address 0 ~ 9 according to the following figure.

Registering tag for Recipe model

Register tags for the Recipe model. Refer the manual for more details. In this example is registered

bellows.

Recipe Area Start Position : START

Handshake Word : CONTROL

Handshake Bit : CTL_BIT

Handshake Group Number : GROUP

Registering Recipe model

System Memory 231


Register model for recipe working. Refer the manual for more details.

Page construction for editing system memory

Construct page for editing and displaying system memory. Arrange tag value object at the page and

register system memory tag.

CIMON-Xpanel232


Check the EntryData and register same system memory tag.

System Memory 233


Register remained 9 system memory tags at the page same method.

Make button to bring system memory from recipe data.

CIMON-Xpanel234


Input commands as follows after selection of [Touch] -> [Command Expression] at the button

configuration.

When button is touched it brings buffer data of “SAMPLE” recipe model to system memory address 0. It

updates 10 areas from address 0 to 9.

RcpGetSysMem("SAMPLE",0)

Register button to transfer system memory to the recipe

System Memory 235



configuration.

When button is touched it transfers buffer data of “SAMPLE” recipe model to system memory address 0.

It updates 10 areas from address 0 to 9.

RcpSetSysMem("SAMPLE",0)

Making Recipe Upload Button


configuration.

When button is touched it updates “SAMPLE” recipe model’s buffer by reading device’s data.

RcpMemUp("SAMPLE");

Making Recipe Download Button


configuration.

When button is touched it downloads “SAMPLE” recipe model’s buffer data to device.

RcpMemDown("SAMPLE");

CIMON-Xpanel236


· Save project and download project to Xpanel. It realizes download function about download at once after

reading continuous data and modifying

data according to order as like [Upload] -> [Bring recipe data to system memory] -> [Modifying system

memory] -> [Inputting system memory data] ->

[Download] in displaying monitor.


Part

XIX

CIMON-Xpanel238


19 Trend

Xpanel provides various kinds of trend functions. Each trend function has its own distinguishable and specialized

data manipulation method and trending style.

System engineer can choose the best fitting trend function among those trend functions for their application.

See :

· YT Trend / Scope Trend / SPC Trend / ST Trend / LOG Trend /

XY Trend

19.1 YT Trend

The ‘YT Trend’ is periodical time based generic trend. The data for trending are collected by Xpanel. Y axis

represents the value of trending data and X axis represents the time. Maximum 8 different data (pens) can be

shown in a trend window at the same time. Each pen has its own data buffer (RAM) with capacity of 5000 data.

The datum of each pen is sampled and stored periodically to this buffer by Xpanel. This buffer makes it possible

to support the historical trend of sampled data.

Trend Config

Display Basis Designate the side which displays the more recent data. For example, if the ‘Right’ is

selected, the trend screen will be

Trend 239


scrolled right to left direction and the right most data will be the most recent data.

Display Time Designate the time span of trend window. The maximum configurable time can be

derived from the sampling time.

(Max. 5000 x Sampling time)

Sampling

Time

Designate the data sampling time. Xpanel will collect the pen data at every this sampling

time.

The data buffer of a pen has the capacity of 5000 samples.

File Saving This option can be used when the historical trend data must be preserved in non-volatile

memory. Without this option, the historical data are stored in RAM (volatile memory).

One of three kinds of non-volatile memory media can be chosen for the storage of

historical data. Following table shows the logging path of each media. The log file has its

own format, it cannot be read other application software.

Media Logging Path

Main Memory //Xpanel/Log/<trend name>/

SD Memory //Log/<trend name>/

USB Memory //Log/<trend name>/

Object Style & Trend Area Style

The ‘Object Style’ and ‘Trend Area Style’ configuration tab decide the color of trend window as shown in the

following sample picture.

CIMON-Xpanel240


Pen

A trend can be assigned maximum 8 pens. Each pen has its own properties and these properties must be

configured individually.

Trend 241


Tagname Define a TAG for each pen. Xpanel will log the value of this TAG in memory

periodically. Maximum 5000 data can be logged in memory for each pen.

Comment Designate a display name of pen. This name will be shown at the bottom of trend

window, as shown in the following example.

Min Value / Max

Value

Designate the minimum and maximum values of Y axis. If these values are denoted as

question mark (‘?’), those values defined in the TAG database will be applied.

Pen Color Designate a color to the pen.

CIMON-Xpanel242


Control Button

If the ‘Show Control Buttons’ option is checked, the operator can use the ‘Control Button’ of the trend as

shown in the following example.

Switch the trending mode between real-time and historical.

Up and down page of the trending window. These buttons are activated only at

historical mode.

Zoom in or out page of the trending window.

Change the primary pen. Min/Max values of Y axis are those of the primary pen.

Open the online trend configuration tool. The following picture shows the online

configuration tool window. Operator can change the monitoring time and pen by using

this tool.

Trend 243


Legend

The date and TAG value can be shown or hidden by option in ‘Legend’ tab.

Following example window shows the ‘Date’ and ‘TAG Value’ area which can be controlled by above options.

Grid

CIMON-Xpanel244


The number of grids and their color can be configured in this configuration tab. Following sample picture

shows the grids with above configuration.

Y-Axis Legend & X-Axis Legend

The legend of each axis can be hidden or shown by the above options. Following sample trend shows those

two legends.

Trend 245


19.2 Scope Trend

The ‘Scope Trend’ is useful at the system of test equipment. This trend can display maximum 8 different sampled

data lists on the same window.

The sampled data lists can be located in device memory or Xpanel’s log file.

Trend Config

Display Basis Designate the side which represents the origin of X axis. For example, if the ‘Right’ is

selected, the right most trend screen will be the position of index zero (0) data.

CIMON-Xpanel246


Object Style & Line Color

The ‘Object Style’ and ‘Line Color’ configuration tab decide the color of trend window as shown in the


Pen



The scope trend can read the pen data not only from the device memory but also from the logged data file

of Xpanel.

Trend 247


Using DataLog

Model

If this field was checked, then all the declared data logger models are listed in the

combo-box as shown in the following picture.

When one of data logger models is chosen, the TAGs registered in this data logger

model are automatically listed in the pen list.

If this field was not checked, then Xpanel will read pen data from the device

memory. Following dialog box is used for defining the properties of each pen.

Tagname Define a TAG for each pen. In case of scope trend, this TAG’s address represents the

origin of a Y axis data list.

Comment Designate a display name of pen.

Min Value / Max

Value

These items have no meaning in scope trend.


CIMON-Xpanel248


Grid





two legends. The ‘Size (Pixcels)’ configuration item decides the width of Y-Axis legend.

Trend 249


Scope Option

Data Porint Every data in trend window can be distinguished by dot. These dots have the shape of

rectangular.

· [Size (Pixels)] : Designate the size of dot in the unit of pixel.

Draw Border The outline of the trend window can be shown by this option. Please refer to the


CIMON-Xpanel250


Scope Tags

Following TAGs must be configured in this configuration tab.

Control Bit This field is effective only on device memory based trend. If the trend is based on data

logger model, just leave this field as empty.

If the trend is based on the device memory sampled data, designate a real digital TAG to

this field. (The virtual digital TAG can not be used for this ‘Control Bit’.) The TAG is used for

handshaking purpose while transferring sampled data. The PLC sequence program can be

Trend 251


noticed the data transfer by monitoring ON (1) signal of this TAG. During this signal, the

time schedule data should not be modified for data consistency.

Control Designate an analog TAG. The value of this TAG controls the trend window as shown in the

following table.

Value Action

2 Clear the trending window

3 Clear the current trend window and draw a new time schedule trend.

Other Values No action.

This analog TAG can be a real TAG as well as a virtual TAG. This means that the sequence

program in PLC can control or update the trend window of Xpanel.

Data Count This field indicates total number of sampled data in device memory. It can be the range

between 1 and 2048. This field is not effective on data logger model based trend.

Minimum /

Maximum

These fields specify the range of Y axis. The specified range is effective to all pens.

Block Number This field is effective only on the data logger based trend. The block number of logged data

is identified by the value of this TAG.

19.3 SPC Trend

The ‘SPC Trend’ has no time axis. All axes are based on sampled or predefined value lists stored in the device.

The SPC trend visualizes the relationship between those data. X axis can be assigned only one data list. Y axis can

be assigned maximum 8 different data lists. Note that all those data lists must be stored in device memory.

Xpanel supports a real-time cursor which represents the position from current X and Y values.

Following picture shows the first configuration tab page of SPC trend. As shown in this picture, there is no need

to time configuration.

Trend Config

CIMON-Xpanel252


Display Basis Designate the side which represents the minimum value of X axis. For example, if the

‘Right’ is selected, the right most trend screen will be the position of lowest X axis value.




Trend 253


Pen



Tagname Define a TAG for each pen. In case of SPC trend, this TAG’s address represents the

origin of a Y axis data list.

Comment Designate a display name of pen.

CIMON-Xpanel254


Min Value / Max

Value

These items have no meaning in SPC trend.


Grid






Trend 255


SPC Option

Using Moving

Point

The moving point is a real-time data cursor. This point moves at every data update. The

coordinate of the movement is calculated by the TAG values of ‘X Axis Moving’ and ‘Y

Axis Moving’ configuration items. Please refer to the next section for information about

these configuration items.

· [Color] : The real-time data cursor has the shape of small rectangular dot. The color

of this dot can be designated. Please refer to the following example picture.

· [Size (Pixels)] : Designate the size of cursor in the unit of pixel.

CIMON-Xpanel256


Data Point Every data in trend window can be distinguished by dot. These dots have the shape of

rectangular.




Draw Data

Connection

If this option is checked, lines will be drawn between every neighboring data. Please

refer to the following sample picture.

SPC Tags

Trend 257



Control Designate an analog TAG. The value of this TAG controls the trend window as shown in

the following table.

Value Action

1 Draw a new trend without clearing (overwrite).


3 Clear the current trend window and draw a new trend.


This analog TAG can be a real TAG as well as a virtual TAG. This means that the

sequence program in PLC can control or update the trend window of Xpanel.

Data Count Designate an analog TAG. The value of this TAG represents the number of data be

drawn in the trend window. It can be a value between 0 and 2048.

X Axis Min. /

Max

Designate analog TAGs. The values of these TAGs reconfigure the range of X axis when

the ‘Control’ TAG’s value is changed to 1 or 3.

Y Axis Min. /

Max

Designate analog TAGs. The values of these TAGs reconfigure the range of Y axis when

the ‘Control’ TAG’s value is changed to 1 or 3.

Control Bit Designate a real digital TAG. (The virtual digital TAG can not be used for this ‘Control

Bit’.) The TAG is used for handshaking purpose while the transfer of trend data. The

PLC sequence program can be noticed the data transfer by monitoring ON (1) signal of

this TAG. During this signal, the trend data should not be modified for data consistency.

X Axis Moving /

Y Axis Moving

Designate analog TAGs which represent the coordinate of real-time cursor. These

configurations are valid only when the ‘Using Moving Point’ option of ‘SPC Option’ tab

was checked.

X Axis Start Designate a real analog TAG. (The virtual TAG can not be used in this field.) The device

address of the designated TAG is considered as the origin (start address) of X axis data.

Xpanel assumes that the data are stored continuously in device memory and the length

of data is the value stored in the TAG of ‘Data Count’ field.

CIMON-Xpanel258


19.4 ST Trend

The ‘ST Trend’ is useful at the system of temperature control and monitoring. This trend provides a display

solution for time schedule of control. Maximum 8 different schedules and 2 real-time traces can be displayed in

the same trend window. The schedule data are composed of a time span and destination value pair. Each

schedule data can include up to 2048 pairs of schedule point. The X axis of ST trend is an accumulated time of

those schedule data. The configuration of ST trend is described as followings.

Trend Config

Display Basis Designate the side which represents the time origin of X axis. For example, if the ‘Right’

is selected, the right most trend screen will be the position of zero (0).

Sampling Time Designate the sampling time for real-time trace. The unit of this time is 100 mSec.


Trend 259




Pen

A pen of ST trend represents a time schedule. Maximum 8 different time schedules can be displayed in the

same trend window.

The pen of ST trend must have a given data format. Each point in a time schedule is represented by a pair

of data as shown in the above diagram. One preceding datum (delta-T of above diagram) represents the

time duration and the other following datum (v of above diagram) represents the control value. These two

data pair represents a point in trend window and those pairs should be stored in the continuous device

memory.

The TAGs which will be designated in the following dialog box should have the address of the first delta-T.

CIMON-Xpanel260


Tagname Designate a TAG which represents the first data memory address of time schedule list.

Comment Designate a description of the pen.

Min Value / Max

Value

These items have no meaning in ST trend.


Data Count Tags

Designate the analog TAG which has the number of total pen data. As noted in the previous part, a pen data

is expressed with a pair of two values. Hence, this TAG must have the value of 2n (n is the number of time

Trend 261


schedule points).

Grid



Y- Axis Legend & X-Axis Legend



CIMON-Xpanel262


The X-Axis legend has 4 different time expression formats as shown in the above picture. One of them can

be chosen as an actual format.

ST Trend Options

Trace Point Every trace data can be distinguished by dots. These dots have the shape of

rectangular.

· [Color] : The real-time trace data cursor has the shape of small rectangular dot. The

Trend 263


color of this dot can be designated. Please refer to the following example picture.


Data Point Every time schedule data in trend window can be distinguished by dot. These dots have

the shape of rectangular.

[Size] : Designate the size of dot in the unit of pixel.



ST Tags


CIMON-Xpanel264


Control Bit Designate a real digital TAG. (The virtual digital TAG can not be used for this ‘Control Bit’.)

The TAG is used for handshaking purpose while the transfer of time schedule data. The PLC

sequence program can be noticed the data transfer by monitoring ON (1) signal of this TAG.

During this signal, the time schedule data should not be modified for data consistency.

Control Designate an analog TAG. The value of this TAG controls the trend window as shown in the

following table.

Value Action


3 Clear the current trend window and draw a new time schedule trend.

4 Starts the real time trace

5 Pauses the real time trace

6 Resets the real time trace


This analog TAG can be a real TAG as well as a virtual TAG. This means that the sequence

program in PLC can control or update the trend window of Xpanel.

Trace Point Designate an analog TAG to be traced. ST trend collects the data of this TAG at every

sampling period, and stores the data in memory up to 2048 samples. Those sampled trace

data will be drawn on the trending window by real time. The real time trace data can be

easily visualized and compared with the time schedule data which were drawn already in

trending window.

Trend 265


Minimum

Value / Using

Fixed Minimum

Value

‘Minimum’ represents the minimum value of the Y axis. It can be designated by not only a

fixed value but also a TAG. If the ‘Using Fixed Minimum Value’ item was checked, the

minimum value should be given by fixed constant.

Maximum

Value / Using

Fixed Maximum

Value

‘Maximum’ represents the maximum value of the Y axis. It can be designated by not only a

fixed value but also a TAG. If the ‘Using Fixed Maximum Value’ item was checked, the

maximum value should be given by fixed constant.

Trace Display

Time / Using

Fixed Trace

Display Time

‘Trace Display Time’ represents the maximum value of the X axis. It can be designated by not

only a fixed value but also a TAG. The unit of display time is second. If the ‘Using Fixed Trace

Display Time’ item was checked, the maximum time value in second should be given by fixed

constant.

19.5 LOG Trend

The ‘Log Trend’ is similar to the ‘YT Trend’. It is based on a time axis, and 16 different data can be displayed at

the same time.

However, the ‘Log Trend’ does not require the periodical data sampling. The data can be sampled or initialized at

any time by a trigger.

Trend Config

CIMON-Xpanel266


Display Basis Designate the side which represents the origin of X axis. For example, if the ‘Right’ is

selected, the right most trend screen will be the position of index zero (0) data.

File Saving This option generates CSV formatted file at runtime. At every 10 seconds all the

sampled data is written to the log file in CSV format. A log file includes up to 30,000

logs. One of three kinds of non-volatile memory media can be chosen for the storage of

log files. Following table shows the logging path of each media.

Media Logging Path & CSV File name

Main Memory //Xpanel/Log/<trend name>/YYMMDDHHmmSS.CSV

SD Memory //Log/<trend name>/YYMMDDHHmmSS.CSV

USB Memory //Log/<trend name>/YYMMDDHHmmSS.CSV

Following picture is a sample view of CSV log file.

Trend 267





Pen

CIMON-Xpanel268




Tagname Define a TAG for each pen.

Comment Designate a display name of the pen.

Min Value / Max

Value

In log trend each pen can be assigned different minimum and maximum Y axes values.

The minimum value must be assigned as a smaller value than maximum value.


Grid



If ‘Using Multi-Channel’ of ‘Log Option’ tab was checked, the Y-Axis grid number has no meaning. Y-axis grid

Trend 269


is not displayed when multi-channel trend mode.




CIMON-Xpanel270


Log Option

The log trend specific options can be configured in this tab.

Buffer Size Log trend keeps the sampled data in Xpanel’s memory. This field specifies the size of

buffer for sampled data.

Sampling Type Log trend can handle not only periodically sampled data but also trigger sampled data.

This field decides which type of sampling to be used.

Trend 271


Sampling Time If the periodical sampling type was chosen at ‘Sampling Type’ field, the trend needs the

period in 100mSec. unit.

Trigger Tag If the trigger sampling type was chosen at ‘Sampling Type’ field, the trend needs the

name of TAG which represents the trigger signal. The sampling is done when this signal

changes from zero to non-zero value.

Control Tag This TAG controls the operation of trend window. The table below shows the effects of

each code that this control TAG can have.

Value Action

0 Do the normal sampling and trending job.

1 Pause the sampling and trending job.

2 Reset and clear the sampling buffer.


Data Point : Size

(Pixels)

Every sampled data in trend window can be distinguished by dot. These dots have the

shape of rectangular. Designate the size of dot in the unit of pixel.

Draw Border The outline of the trend window can be shown by this option. Following picture shows

the border of trend window.

19.6 XY Trend

The ‘XY Trend’ has no time axis like the ‘SPC Trend’. And it does not take block data from device, but the Xpanel

collects the trending data periodically or on every trigger event. This trend can display the correlation between a

designated data (X-axis) and up to 16 data (Y-axis). Maximum 800 pairs of correlation data are maintained in

memory.

CIMON-Xpanel272


Trend Config

File Saving

This option generates CSV formatted file at runtime. At every 10 seconds all the sampled data is written to

the log file in CSV format. A log file includes up to 30,000 logs. One of three kinds of non-volatile memory

media can be chosen for the storage of log files. Following table shows the logging path of each media.

Media Logging Path & CSV File name

Main Memory //XPanel/Log/<trend name>/YYMMDDHHmmSS.CSV

SD Memory //Log/<trend name>/YYMMDDHHmmSS.CSV

USB Memory //Log/<trend name>/YYMMDDHHmmSS.CSV

Following picture is a sample view of CSV log file.

Trend 273





Pen

CIMON-Xpanel274




Tagname Define a TAG for each pen.

Comment Designate a display name of the pen.

Min Value / Max

Value

In log trend each pen can be assigned different minimum and maximum Y axes values.

The minimum value must be assigned as a smaller value than maximum value.


Grid


Trend 275






XY Option

CIMON-Xpanel276


The XT trend specific options can be configured in this tab.

Buffer Size XY trend maintains the sampled data in Xpanel’s memory. This field specifies the size of

buffer for sampled data.

Sampling Type XY trend can handle not only periodically sampled data but also trigger sampled data.

This field decides which type of sampling to be used.

Sampling Time If the periodical sampling type was chosen at ‘Sampling Type’ field, the trend needs the

period in 100mSec. unit.

Trigger Tag If the trigger sampling type was chosen at ‘Sampling Type’ field, the trend needs the

name of TAG which represents the trigger signal. The sampling is done when this signal

changes from zero to non-zero value.

Control Tag This TAG controls the operation of trend window. The table below shows the effects of

each code that this control TAG can have.

Value Action

0 Do the normal sampling and trending job.

1 Pause the sampling and trending job.

2 Reset and clear the sampling buffer.


Trend 277


Data Point : Size

(Pixels)

Every sampled data in trend window can be distinguished by dot. These dots have the

shape of rectangular. Designate the size of dot in the unit of pixel.

Draw Border The outline of the trend window can be shown by this option. Following picture shows

the border of trend window.

Draw Data

Connection

This option makes Xpanel draw the line between data points. If this option was not

checked, then following trend would be displayed. There is no line between points.

Display Time Xpanel can display the time of last sampled data. This option controls the time will be

shown or not. Please see the picture of ‘Draw Border’ option above.

XY Min/Max

The minimum and maximum values of x axis are configured in this tab. These configurations can be not only

static numbers (fixed value) but also TAGs. When a TAG is assigned to the minimum or maximum value, the

range of x axis would be changed dynamically at runtime.

CIMON-Xpanel278



Part

XX

CIMON-Xpanel280


20 String Editor

String editor constructs a number of string groups. These string groups are managed like string tables at

runtime.

Each group can be distinguished by group number. And all the strings defined in each group can be referenced by

index number.

Constructed string groups are useful when there is a need to make (or display) different string according to the

status code.

It can be accomplished by two different ways as shown in the following picture.

One method is done by the String Value graphic object and the other is done by the StringTable() script

function.

These two different applications will be described in next sections of this manual.

See :

· String Construction

20.1 String Construction

String Group Construction

Click - the ‘Tools’-‘String Editor’ menu or the icon.

String Editor 281


Add String

Group

A new string group will be created by this icon (menu).

Delete String

Group

This icon (menu) deletes a group.

Add String A new string can be added to the current group by this icon (menu).

Edit StringA string can be modified by this icon or double click of mouse.

Delete String This icon deletes a selected string.

Insert Multiple Language StringGroup

A new multiple language string group will be created by this icon(menu).Please refer to the section of "Using Multiple Language".

CIMON-Xpanel282


String Display

Ho

w

to

us

e ‘

Str

ing

Val

ue'

Click - the 'Draw’-‘String Value' menu

String Editor 283


* The string is not output when there is no input string of the value of analog tag in the input string table. (Null)

Ho

w

to

us

e ‘

Stri

ng

Ta

ble

()'

1) Register - String Tag

(It is necessary to register the string tag that displays the script to use the script.)

CIMON-Xpanel284


2) Click - [Tools] -> [Scripts] -> [Add Script]

3) Write - Script Program

Following script example shows the usage of ‘StringTable()’ function. For more information about the

‘StringTable()’, please refer to the section of ‘Script’.

4) Select a Object and Click - [Draw] -> [Tag] -> [Tag Name]

String Editor 285



Part

XXI

Using Multiple Language 287


21 Using Multiple Language

· You can change the displaying language to Korean, Japanese or Chinese by using multiple

language tables.

· If your windows system based language is English, you must install MUI for multiple language.

You can download MUI at the Microsoft home page (www.micorsoft.com).

See :

· How to Set Multiple Language

· Multiple language string display

· Using Multiple Language (Change the displayed language by using multiple language table)

21.1 Multiple Language setup

This manual provides how to use Multiple Language.

By the function, languages of various countries are displayed to the screen.

IN THIS TOPIC :

Register IME Language and IME Selection

Register IME

In English Window, IME should be used for inputting the language of another country(Japan, China..).

Following pictures describes how to register IME.

1. Click - [Control Panel] -> [Regional and Language Options]

2. Select - "Languages" Tab -> Click - [Details...]

CIMON-Xpanel288


3. Check - language and the IME registered in the English Window.

4. For example, if you want to input Japanese, Japanese and one more IME should be registered in the

installed service.

5. How to register IME

5.1. Click - [Add]

5.2 Select - Language in 'Input Language'



6. Select - IME in 'Keyboard layout/IME'. When the input language is selected, the basic IME is

automatically selected.

7. Click - [Ok]

Language and IME Selection

1. Click - [Control Panel] -> [Regional and Language Options]

2. Select - "Languages" Tab -> Click - [Details...]

3. Click - [Language Bar], Check - "Show the Language Bar on the desktop", Click - [Ok]

4. Select - Language of "Language Bar"

CIMON-Xpanel290


5. Select - IME by clicking IME icon.

6. Letters are input via the selected IME.

21.2 Multiple language string display

Make - Page to input the string. Register - String by using each language.

Register Japanese String

1. Change the language to the Japanese in the "Language Bar".

2. Select - [Microsoft Natural Input 2002 ver.8.1] by clicking IME icon ( To select the relative item, the IME of the relative language should be registered in the window. Refer to the "Multiple Language setup")

3. Change - Input Mode(Hiragana) by clicking "Input Mode" button

4. Input - Japanese using Keyboard



5. Change the font to the "MS Gothic" in Font Toolbar. MS Gothic selected here is a Japanese basic

font.

It is possible that if the inputted string is not expressed as a designated font, it might not be

expressed normally, so change to the font of the relative country.

Register Chinese String

1. Change the language to the Chinese in the "Language Bar".

2. Select - [Microsoft Pinyin IME 3.0] by clicking IME icon

3. Change - Input Mode(Chinese) by clicking "Input Mode" button

4. Input - Chinese using Keyboard

5. Change the font to the "SimSun" in Font Toolbar. SimSun selected here is a Chinese basic font.

CIMON-Xpanel292


It is possible to use it by inputting other languages except Japanese and Chinese to Xpanel.

21.3 Using Multiple Language (Change the displayed language byusing multiple language table)

· You can change the displaying language to Korean, Japanese or Chinese by using multiple

language tables.

· If your windows system based language is English, you must install MUI for multiple language.

You can download MUI at the Microsoft home page (www.micorsoft.com).

IN THIS TOPIC :

Configure Multiple Language

Register Multiple Language Table

Multiple language table display by using multiple language string.

Configure Multiple Language

1. Tools -> Project

2. Click Language Configuration button to open multi language configuration window.



3. Check “use multiple language” for using multiple language.

4. Register analog tag at “Table Control Tag” to control column. For example, above figure

shows that selects valid tag as like “COLSEL” and

it decides referencing column by its value.

5. When program runs the initial column indicated by ‘Table initial Value’.

6. Register language name and representative font at Language 0 ~ 9.

Language string register at ‘multiple language tables’ and it displayed here with registered

name and font.

Register Multiple Language Table

1. To input language string at multiple language tables, select Tools-> String Editor.

CIMON-Xpanel294


2. Before you register multiple language tables, click button () to register language which

will be used.

3. After above language setting, Column 0 is Korean(Gulim), Column 1 is Chineses(SimSun)

and Column 2 is Japanese(MS Gothic).

4. After complete registering language, click ‘OK’ to save the configurations.



5. Click “Add String Group” button (), select “Multiple Column” and then “OK”. Multiple

column is string group having 16 columns and

Single column is string group having only one column.

6. Select one group in the already registered, click “Add String” button() to open add string

window.

7. Input string at each column while changing IME. At above example shows inputting multiple

languages.

CIMON-Xpanel296


Column 0 is configured Korean, so use Korean IME for inputting string. Column 1 is

configured Chinese,

so use Chinese IME for inputting string. Input strings to remained table by the same method.

8. String table allows Cut & Past at Excel.

Multiple language table display by using multiple language string.

1. Multiple language string object display changed column of indicated string group which

controlled by “Table Control Tag”.

2. Select ‘Draw -> Muli String’ or click button () to make object at page.



3. Input the value at String Group and String Value.

4. According this procedure, make the multi String object and download this project.

If you change the tag(you registered as “COLSEL”) for control multiple language table to 0,1,2

then you can see the

displaying string changed to “가나다”,”俄色的德大??佛??”,”ああでｆっでぶぷでへべほ”.

Each displayed strings

reference indicated font at corresponding column.

* “Table Control Value"s value means string table column number and it is irrelevant to the

order of registered language

at language configuration window.


Part

XXII

Network Data Server 299


22 Network Data Server

Xpanel provides TAG values to CIMON SCADA system through Ethernet. For this purpose, there are two memory

areas in Xpanel as shown in the

following picture. Each memory area has 1,000 buffers. The SCADA system can read and write those memory

areas through Ethernet.

Following sections describe how to define the memories in Xpanel and configure the network and SCADA.

See :

· Data Definition in Xpanel

· The Configuration of CIMON SCADA

22.1 Data Definition in Xpanel

To enable the network data server service, the service memory areas need to be configured. Use the

‘Tools’-‘Data Server’ menu or the icon.

CIMON-Xpanel300


Following picture shows the memory definition window of Xpanel.

The memory is composed with two areas. One area is data memory (D) and the other is string memory (S).

Each area can be filled with up to 1,000 TAGs.

And these TAGs are designated the address ranged from 0 to 999.

Analog and digital TAG can be assigned in ‘D’ area. The ‘D’ memory area has the value of floating point type.

On the other side, only the string TAG can be assigned in ‘S’ memory.

Point

The data server function needs a fixed IP address in network. For configuring the IP address of Xpanel,

please refer to the section of “Configuration” of this manual.

22.2 The Configuration of CIMON SCADA

Device Driver Configuration

CIMON SCADA deals the Xpanel just like a general device such as PLC.

That is, the same concept of configuration as PLC is applied to Xpanel in SCADA.

1. Create a Device First of all, the Xpanel must be registered in SCADA system though the ‘I/O device

configuration’ window as shown in the following picture.



Choose the ‘I/O Device Type’ as “KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-XPANEL Ethernet”

in the above windows. The following picture shows the dialog boxes for

configuration of Xpanel.

2. Create a Station

Every Xpanel registered as a station has to be identified by its IP address. Specify

CIMON-Xpanel302


the IP address of Xpanel at “#1-1 IP Address” field of above window.

3. Create the

Comm.Block

If the station is created successfully, then define the communication blocks which

include the data to be used. The Xpanel provides two different memory areas, ‘D’

and ‘S’. These two memory areas are described in the previous section of this

chapter.

Point

Ensure that all data to be monitored are included in the ‘COM Block’. Otherwise,

it will not be monitored normally during online.

4. Identify the

SCADA

IP Address



The IP address of SCADA itself must be identified. Move to the “COM Port” tab of

the main dialog box.

And give the IP address of SCADA to the “#1 IP Address” field as shown in the

above picture.

TAG Configuration

1. Analog / Digital

Tag

The ‘D’ memory area can be used as an analog or digital TAG in SCADA.

In the case of analog TAG, the ‘Float’ data type is recommended as shown in

the following picture.

CIMON-Xpanel304


In the case of digital TAG, the value is 1 (true) when the value from Xpanel is

non-zero.

Ensure that the address of TAG is included in the ‘COM Block’ definition.

Otherwise, the data is not monitored normally at online.

2. String TAG

The ‘S’ memory area can be used in the string TAG in SCADA as shown in the

following picture.

Point

1.The maximum length of the string is 80 characters (bytes).

2.Ensure that the address of TAG is included in the ‘COM Block’

definition.

Otherwise, the data is not monitored normally at online.


Part

XXIII

CIMON-Xpanel306


23 Security

Xpanel provides the security function which protects the secret screen or operation from unauthorized

access.

Every regal user, screen and touch operation in Xpanel has its own privilege level. The 11 privilege levels are

denoted by the number from 0 to 10.

The zero is the lowest level. The operator can see the page or operate the touch zone which has lower

privilege level than his.

See :

· User Registration

· Access Privilege

· User LogOn / LogOff

23.1 User Registration

The Xpanel Designer provides a tool for user security configuration as shown in the following picture.

Security 307


Above user security configuration tool can be opened by ‘Tools’-‘Security’ menu or the icon in

toolbar.

Each user has following properties.

User ID User ID can be any combination of alpha-numeric characters.

The maximum length of ID string is 15 characters.

Level Assign the privilege level of the user.

This level can be a number between 0 and 10. 10 is the most authorized level.

Password Only the numeric characters (‘0’ to ‘9’) can be used as password.

The maximum length of password string is 15 characters.

CIMON-Xpanel308


Description Give a simple description to the user data.

The maximum length of description is 256 characters.

Log On action

Script

This field is not necessarily edited. But, it is very useful when there is a need to do

something at user logon.

Describe the command script in this field.

Please refer to the ‘Script’ section for more information about the ‘command script’.

Log Off Action

Script

This field is not necessarily edited. But, it is very useful when there is a need to do

something at user logoff.


Please refer to the ‘Script’ section for more information about the ‘command script’.

23.2 Access Privilege

Xpanel provides the security for page and touch operation.

The user can access the page and touch zone which have the equal or lower privilege level than his.

Page Security

Security 309


The page security can be configured at ‘Page Properties’ window as shown in the above picture.

This window can be opened by ‘Tools’-‘Page Setup’ menu.Every pages are designated a security level

between 0 and 10.

Zero level is the default and lowest level. The user whose privilege level is lower than this cannot access

(open) the page.

Touch Operation Security

CIMON-Xpanel310


Touch zone security configuration is performed based on the above dialog box.

This dialog box is the ‘Object Config’ window. The ‘Touch’ and ‘EntryData’ have the ‘Security’ property page.

Assign a security level to this field.

The user whose privilege level is lower than this cannot access (touch) this object.

23.3 User LogOn / LogOff

Xpanel system’s default user privilege level is zero. The default user privilege level is applied when there is no

logon user in Xpanel system.

To logon Xpanel system, the operator must submit his ID and password though the following window.

This window is popped up by “LogOnWin()” command or function.

Xpanel provides following functions for security manipulation.

Security 311


Please refer to the section of ‘Script’ for more information.

LogOnWin() Pop up the ID and password entry dialog box.

LogOn(“I D”,

“Password”)

Log on without user interface.

This level can be a number between 0 and 10. 10 is the most authorized level.

LogOff() Log off the current user.

The security level of system is returned to the default level (zero).

GetSecurity() Get current security level of system. (0..10)


Part

XXIV

Script 313


24 Script

The script of Xpanel is very similar with the ‘C’ programming language. Variables can be used in script.

And script provides function call mechanism and supports almost keywords defined in standard ‘C’ language

such as switch-case, for, while, if-else, goto.

All user programmed scripts are executed in multi-thread environment.

Each script is assigned a priority among total 10 levels, such that the execution speed of a script is dependent

on this level. (most high priority = 10, most low priority = 1)

· Uses the ‘C’ language style statement

· All TAGs defined in Xpanel database can be used as variables in script. It does not need additional

definition, symbol or configuration.

That means, values of all TAGs can be referenced or changed in every script program freely.

· Two kinds of variable types are supported, real and string type. Actual type of a variable is decided

automatically during program execution.

But, only one type of value can be used in a script scope. All real type data are processed in 64 bits.

· Does not distinguish capital letters. That is, ‘VAR’ and ‘var’ are the same keyword.

See :

· Structure of Program

· Operator

· Scripts for command and condition

· Statements

· Internal Functions

24.1 Structure of Program

Declaration Part

Declare internal variables and input parameters

Program Part

All program statements can be located here.

Except declarations.

Comments can be located on any place in a script.

A comment must be started by ‘//’ and all strings following this symbol are treated as a comment

CIMON-Xpanel314


string until the end of a line.

Declaration Part

Variable

Declaration

VAR variable_name [, variable_name];

Declare internal variables. The scope of these variables restricted in a declared

script.

The initial value of declared variable is zero. If there is need to declare several

variables, comma(,) can be used between each variable name. This statement can

be used in multiple, until the beginning of program part.

Input

Parameter

Declaration

PARAM 1stparameter [, 2ndparameter … ] ;

This declaration is needed when the program can be called by another program or

command statements.

The order of declaration must be matched with the order of input parameters.

Parameters will be initialized with input parameters from caller. If there is need to

declare multiple parameters,

use comma (,) between parameter names.

This statement can be used in multiple, until the beginning of program part.

Example : MyPgm

VAR a, b;

VAR c;

PARAM p1, p2;

PARAM p3;

Assume that the name of above example program is ‘MyPgm’.

This program can be called by external program or command line as following

statement.

MyPgm(1, 2, 3);

Parameters p1, p2, p3 will be initialized to 1, 2, 3 each. Notice that variables a, b, c

will be initialized to zero.

Program Part

In program part, all the programming statements can be used except variable(VAR) and parameter(PARAM)

declarations.

Script 315


Calculation, storing a data in some variable, function call and many other expressions can be used in a

statement.

Following is a simple example of statements.

Tag_a = Tag_a + 1;

Tag_b = MyPgm(Tag_a, 2, 3);

A statement must be ended by ‘;’ character.

All functions return a value to caller. In the above program example, the returned value will be stored in

Tag_b.

Constants

Following notation is used for each type of constant.

Oc

tal

co

nst

ant

Number characters between 0 and 7 can be used. It must be started by zero. (ex : 01277)

De

ci

ma

l

co

nst

ant

Normal notation is used. (ex : 15, 3.14, 2.45E-12)

He

xa

de

ci

ma

l

co

nst

ant

It must be started with ‘0x’. Alphabet and number character between ‘0’ ‘F’ can be used. (ex : 0xFFFF)

Str

ing

co

A string must be described between two ‘“’. (ex : "string variable " )

CIMON-Xpanel316


nst

ant

Pr

ed

efi

ne

d

co

nst

ant

_PI_ (pi : 3.14......) etc. (refer to the following table)

Constant Name Value/Usage Remark

_PI_ 3.141592...... (pi)

_LOCAL_ 0, Local flash memory Can be used as parameters for functions orcommands.

_SDMEM_ 1, SD/MMC memory

_USBMEM_ 2, USB memory

_COM232_ 0, COM1, RS232C mode COM port number. See the serialcommunication functions.

_COM422_ 1, COM1, RS422 mode

_COM485_ 2, COM1, RS485 mode

_COMAUX_ 3, COM2 (RS232C only)

_BPS300_ 300 bps Baudrate code. See the OpenPort() function.

_BPS600_ 600 bps

_BPS1200_ 1200 bps

_BPS2400_ 2400 bps

_BPS4800_ 4800 bps

_BPS9600_ 9600 bps

_BPS19200_ 19200 bps

_BPS38400_ 38400 bps

_BPS56000_ 56000 bps

_BPS57600_ 57600 bps

_BPS115200_ 115200 bps

_BPS128000_ 128000 bps

_BPS256000_ 256000 bps

_PARITY_NONE_ No parity Parity code. See the OpenPort() function.

_PARITY_EVEN_ Even parity

_PARITY_ODD_ Odd parity

_PARITY_MARK_ Mark parity

_PARITY_SPACE_ Space parity

_STOPBIT_ONE_ 1 stop bit Stopbit code. See the OpenPort() function.

_STOPBIT_TWO_ 2 stop bits

_STOPBIT_ONE5_ 1.5 stop bit

_ALMPRT_ALL_ Print all items of alarm data Option flags for AlarmPrint() function.

_ALMPRT_TIME_ Print the time of alarm data

_ALMPRT_ADDR_ Print the address of alarm point

_ALMPRT_VALUE_ Print the value of alarm

_ALMPRT_TYPE_ Print the alarm type

_ALMPRT_DESC_ Print the alarm description

Script 317


_UINT_ Unsinged integer Data type options. These definition can beused in the NumToStr() function.

_INT_ Signed integer

_FLOAT_ Floating point value

_HEX_ Hexa-decimal number

_EXP_ Real number with exponent

24.2 Operator

Operators for calculation

The result row of following table assumes that the value of variable ‘A’ is 3 and ‘B’ is 4.

Operator Description Example Result

+ Addition A + B 7

- Subtraction A B -1

* Multiplication A * B 12

/ Division A / B 0.75

% Remainder of division(1) A % B 3

| Bitwise OR(1) A | B 7

& Bitwise AND(1) A & B 0

^ Bitwise XOR(1) A ^ B 7

~ Bitwise Invert(1) ~A 0xFFFFFFFC

<< Bitwise Shift Left A << B 48

>> Bitwise Shift Right A >> B 0

(1) Remainder of division (%) and all bitwise operators are performed with 32 bits integer data.

Logical/Comparative Operators

The result row of following table assumes that the value of variable ‘A’ is 2 (true) and ‘B’ is 0 (false).

Xpanel treats all values except zero as logical TRUE. Only zero is treated as logical FALSE.

When the result of logical operation is TRUE, the value 1 will be returned and stored.

Operator Description Example Result

&& Logical AND A && B 0 (false)

|| Logical OR A || B 1 (true)

! Logical NOT !A 0 (false)

== EQUAL A == B 0 (false)

!= NOT EQUAL A != B 1 (true)

CIMON-Xpanel318


> Big A > B 1 (true)

>= or => Big or Equal A >= B 1 (true)

< Small A < B 0 (false)

<= or =< Small or Equal A <= B 0 (false)

Other Operators

Operator Description Example Result Value

= Store A = B Store the value of B to A, and uses it as a result value.

Store (=) operator can be used in a series. For example :

A = B = C;

In this case, The value of ‘C’ will be stored to ‘A’ and ‘B’. The value of right side of the operator is store in

left side and this value is treated as a return value of the operator. The internal processing order of above

example is :

B <- C

A <- B

Warming

This feature of ‘=’ operator places a bug in program sometimes. That is the confusion with a

comparative operator (==). Following example is illustrating this kind of bug. In this example, a

programmer confused comparative operator(==) with store operator (=). But, XpanelDesigner

cannot detect such error. The reason is, the store operator has a return value and this value can

be used as a logical value in ‘if’ statement. This bug makes unexpected flow of program, and

furthermore, unwanted value will be stored in ‘A’.

//============================

/ /An example of unsolvable program mistake

//============================

IF (A=B) // Compare values of A and B. It is miss-spelling of A=B

...

Script 319


24.3 Scripts for command and condition

In some application, there is a need to use a simple script on graphic object configuration.

For example, to assign a touch operation on an object, one or several command lines must be written in case of

Command Expression action type

(see an example configuration dialog box below). And further more, for making it conditional touch operation, a

conditional expression must be described.

All these conditional expression and command script have the same rules with script programming.

Conditional Expression

The conditional expression always returns only a logical value. A logical value can be one of two values,

TRUE or FALSE.

Xpanel uses the number ‘0’ as the value of logical FALSE, and ‘1’ as the value of logical TRUE.

A logical expression needs some special operators. The logical operators in Xpanel are shown in as following

table.

For more precise information, refer to the section 3.2.

Logical Operator Description Example

&& Logical AND A && B

CIMON-Xpanel320


|| Logical OR A || B

! Logical NOT !A

Comparative Operator Description Example

== EQUAL A == B

!= NOT EQUAL A != B

> Big A > B

>= or => Big or Equal A >= B

< Small A < B

<= or =< Small or Equal A <= B

All logical operators get one or two values for input (operands) and return a logical output value. According

to the above examples, ‘A’ and ‘B’ are those inputs.

The value for logical arithmetic operand is not restricted to only two logical values (TRUE or FALSE). The

input value can be any number.

But, only zero is treated as logical FALSE. All the other values are treated as TRUE.

Comparative operators get two real values for operands and return a logical output value. Those logical

output values can be used in other logical expression.

Here is some examples of conditional expression that can be used in object configuration dialog box.

Conditional Expression Example Remark

(Tag_a != 1) && (Tag_b == 10) If the value of Tag_a is not equal to 1 and the value of Tag_b is

equal to 10, then the expression returns TRUE. Otherwise FALSE.

Sin(Tag_a) == 1 If the sine of Tag_a is 1, then the expression will return TRUE,

otherwise FALSE.

Tag_a < 100 If the value of Tag_a is smaller than 100, then the expression will

return TRUE, otherwise FALSE.

(Tag_a + Tag_b) < (Tag_a + Tag_c) If the sum of Tag_a and Tag_b is smaller than the sum of Tag_a

and Tag_c, then the expression will return TRUE, otherwise

FALSE.

Command Script

The command in Xpanel is not restricted to use only one instruction. A long list of instructions can construct

a command.

That is, the command is a special kind of script program. Within a command script, all kinds of keywords

and functions can be used.

But only one thing, the priority of command script is different with the normal script. When a command

Script 321


script is issued by touch operation or any other method,

it will be executed with top-most priority. For that reason, if a command script has a time consuming loop

inside, all the other process will be halted until the end

of command script. So, especially for calling other function within a command script, the programmer has to

keep in mind that the priority.

If the function has a loop, ‘RunScript’ keyword must be used. This keyword is used for parallel execution.

The calling command script does not wait the termination of called function.

Assume that a programmer wants to call a function named as ‘MyLoop’, and this function has a time

consuming loop.

Then, following instruction must be used, instead of calling directly.

RunScript MyLoop();

Following table shows some typical command script examples.

Command ScriptExample

Remark

Tag_a = 100;

PageOpen(“NewPage”) ;

After changing the value of Tag_a to 100, open a page named as "NewPage "

Tag_b = Tag_b + 1 Increase the value of Tag_b by 1.

Tag_a = 100;

Tag_b = 1;

RunScript MyLoop();

MakCsv(“LogModel”, 1);

After changing the values of Tag_a and Tag_b, invoke MyLoop() script

function.

After that, do not wait the termination of MyLoop(), and create a CSV formatted

file of the ‘LogModel’ on SD memory card.

24.4 Statements

IF-ELSE Statement

WHILE/DO-WHILE Statement

FOR Statement

SWITCH-CASE Statement

GOTO Statement

CONTINUE Keyword

RETURN Keyword

RUNSCRIPT Keyword

CIMON-Xpanel322


24.4.1 IF-ELSE Statement

IF ELSE statement is one of the most frequently using logical decision making statement.

It supports nested IF statement like IF - ELSE IF - ELSE IF... There is no limit on level of nested IF. Else

statement can be omitted.

If (A == 1)

// performed when the value of A is 1

Else

// performed when the value of A is not 1

24.4.2 WHILE/DO-WHILE Statement

These statements are loop statements.

WHILE keyword is followed by a logical expression. During the value of this expression is TRUE, all statements in

WHILE statement are performed repeatedly.

A = 0;

While (A < 10)

// Describe the job should be performed repeatedly

// during the value of logical expression is TRUE

// (This example performs following statement 10 times)

A = A + 1;

WHILE statement makes decision before performing the loop. Such that, statements in loop can never be

performed.

But, DO-WHILE statement performs the loop at least one time. And then makes decision by evaluating logical

expression.

This is a difference between WHILE and DO-WHILE statement.

Do

// Describe the job should be performed repeatedly

Script 323


// during the value of logical expression is TRUE

// (This loop is performed at least 1 time)

While (A < 10); // Semi-colon (;) must be used for marking end of statement.

24.4.3 FOR Statement

It is a little bit complex statement. But, after familiar with this statement, it will be very useful loop statement.

The specialty of this statement is that all expressions for initializing, decision making and post loop processing are

described in one statement line.

Following example shows the same job with the example of WHILE statement presented in former section.

Compare it with WHILE statement.

For (A=0; A<10; A=A+1)

// describe the job to repeat here

FOR keyword is followed by a pair of parenthesis. Expression for initializing, decision making and post loop

processing are described in this parenthesis.

Each expression must be separated by semicolons (‘;’).

FOR ( initializing exp. ; decision making exp. ; post processing exp. )

24.4.4 SWITCH-CASE Statement

This statement is very useful when there are many different processing way depend on a variable or expression.

Each different processing way is described by CASE keyword followed by a constant value. There is no limit on

the number of CASE.

switch (A)

Case 1:

// describe the job to perform when the value of A is 1

Break;

Case 5:

Case 7:

// describe the job to perform when the value of A is 5 or 7

Break;

Default:

// describe the job to perform when A is any other value

CIMON-Xpanel324


// DEFAULT statements can be omitted

Break;

CASE keyword must be followed by a constant value and terminated by a colon (:). A TAG, variable or expression

cannot be used in CASE statement.

DEFAULT statement can be used only once in a SWITCH statement.

It does not need a following constant, and this statement will be performed when there is no matching case.

DEFAULT statement can be omitted if needless.

BREAK keyword in CASE/DEFAULT statement plays role of terminating SWITCH statement.

If there is no BREAK keyword in the progress of program execution until reaches the other CASE/DEFAULT

keyword, the program will continue to execute the

statements in the other CASE/DEFAULT scope. This feature of SWITCH statement is helpful for short and simple

programming, only if it is used intentionally.

24.4.5 GOTO Statement

This statement controls the flow of program execution directly. This statement needs a matching index in a

program scope.

Index is a unique name of a jump destination in a program scope, and it is started with ‘@’ character.

VAR A;

A = 0;

@ComeHere // destination of jump

If (A < 10)

A = A + 1;

Goto ComeHere; // change the flow of program

This example program processes the same job with the previous examples of FOR and WHILE statement section.

The name of index (‘JumpHere’ in the above example) can not be duplicated with variables, tags and program

names.

24.4.6 CONTINUE Keyword

Continue keyword is very useful in loop. When a CONTINUE keyword is met in the progress of a program,

the flow of the program will be moved to the first statement in the loop. This keyword is effective in the loop of

WHILE, DO-WHILE and FOR statement.

Script 325


It is especially useful when there are many decision making in the loop such as IF-ELSE.

Following two program examples process the same job.

While (A<10)

A = A + 1;

If (A < 5)

// Job to do when A is smaller than 5

Else

// Job to do when A is larger than or equal to 5

While (A<10)

A = A + 1;

If (A < 5)

/ / Job to do when A is smaller than 5

Continue;

/ / Job to do when A is larger than or equal to 5

24.4.7 RETURN Keyword

Every program returns a result value to caller. RETURN keyword is used for designating a value to return and

terminating the program.

Following example program processes three input parameters and returns the sum of them to caller.

PARAM p1, p2, p3;

Return p1 + p2 + p3;

Assuming that the name of above program is ‘MyPgm’, it can be called from another program as following

program line.

RtnValue = MyPgm(1, 2, 3);

CIMON-Xpanel326


After ‘MyPgm’ call, a value of 6 will be stored in ‘RtnValue’.

24.4.8 RUNSCRIPT Keyword

When a program calls another program, the caller program will be stalled until when the called program

terminates.

RUNSCRIPT keyword provides another way of invoking other program. It does not make stall the caller program.

After invoke another program, the caller program continues it’s own job. As a result, both programs will run in

parallel and this is the feature of multi-threading.

Following example shows the multi-threading feature by using RUNSCRIPT keyword. It is assuming that the name

of another program is ‘NewThread’.

If(A == 0)

RunScript NewThread(); // Invoke another program (NewThread)

A = A + 1; // Continues next job without stalling.

24.5 Internal Functions

IN THIS TOPIC :

Trigonometric Functions Other Mathematic Functions Special Functions

* R1, R2, .... : Real type input parameters * S1, S2, .... : Stringtype

input parameters

Trigonometric Functions

Function DescriptionRetur

n

Sin(R1) Sine Real

Cos(R1) Cosine Real

Tan(R1) Tangent Real

Asin(R1) Arc Sine Real

Acos(R1) Arc Cosine Real

Atan(R1) Arc Tangent Real

Sinh(R1) Hyperbolic Sine Real

Cosh(R1) Hyperbolic Cosine Real

Script 327


Tanh(R1) Hyperbolic Tangent Real

Atan2(R1, R2) Arc Tangent, Atan(R1/R2)와 동일 Real

Other Mathematic Functions

Function DescriptionRetur

n

Log(R1) Calculates logarithm Real

Log10(R1) Calculates logarithm Real

Ceil(R1) Calculates the ceiling of a value Real

Floor(R1) Calculates the floor of a value Real

Abs(R1) Calculates the absolute value Real

Sqrt(R1) Calculates the square value Real

Rand() Generates a pseudorandom number Real

Fmod(R1, R2) Calculates the floating-point remainder (R1/R2) Real

Special Functions

Function Description Return

PageOpen(S1) Opens a new page named as S1

PageClose(S1) Closes an opened page

FrameOpen(S1) Opens a new frame named as S1

StringTable(R1, R2) Get a string from string table

(R1=Group No., R2=String No.)

String

GetTime(R1) Get a clock data (R1 : type of data) Real

TimeStr(R1, S2) Assemble a string of time

R1 : clock value from GetTime(0)

S2 : Format string

String

RunApp(S1, S2) Executes an external program

S1 : Program name

S2 : Program input parameter

MakeCsv(S1, R2) Makes a CSV formatted log file in SD memory

S1 : Name of log model

R2 : Number of block (0=current logging block)

MakeCsvUsb(S1, R2) Makes a CSV formatted log file in USB memory

CIMON-Xpanel328




MakeLogCsv(S1, R2, R3) Makes a CSV formatted log file



R3 : Storage media code (0=local, 1=SD/MMC, 2=USB)

DataLog(S1, R2) Start / Stop the data logging


R2 : 0=Stop, 1=Start

RcpDownload(S1, R2) Read a group of recipe data from file, and download it to

device

S1 : Name of recipe model

R2 : Zero based group number

RcpUpload(S1, R2) Upload the specified recipe group data from device, and

store it to file.



RcpStop(S1) Stop and terminate the processing job of specified recipe

model.


RcpFileStore(S1, R2) Stores the recipe data to the file.



RcpFileRead(S1, R2) Read the recipe data from file.



RcpMemDown(S1) Download the current recipe data to device.


RcpMemUp(S1) Upload the recipe data from device.


RcpCsvRd(S1, S2, R3) Read the recipe data from CSV formatted file.


S2 : File name

R3 : File location (0=local, 1=SD/MMC, 2=USB)

RcpCsvWr(S1, S2, R3) Create a CSV formatted file with current recipe group data in

memory.


S2 : File name


Script 329


RcpConfig() Pops up a dialog box for recipe data manipulation.

TrendCsvWr(S1, R2) Make a CSV formatted file from trend data.

S1 : Trend name


ScrCapture(S1, R2) Make a BMP formatted file of current screen

S1 : BMP file name.


Sleep(R1) Put delay on the script program

R1 : delay time in milli-second

HardCopy() Print out the current screen image to USB printer.

OpenPort (R1, R2, R3, R4,

R5)

Open a serial port for communication.

R1 : Port number (predefined as _COMxxx_)

R2 : Baudrate code (predefined as _BPSxxxx_)

R3 : Parity code (predefined as _PARITY_xxx_)

R4 : Data bits (7 or 8)

R5 : Stop bits code (predefined as _STOPBIT_xxx_)

1:OK.

2:Error

ClosePort(R1) Close a serial port.


1:OK.

2:Error

SendByte(R1, R2) Transmit a byte datum though the R1 port.


R2 : A datum to transmit. (0..255)

1:OK.

2:Error

SendString(R1, S2) Transmit a string data though the R1 port.


S2 : A string to transmit.

1:OK.

2:Error

ReceiveByte(R1, R2) Receive a byte datum though the R1 port.


R2 : Time-out in milli-second.

Receiveddata orerror

StrToNum(S1, R2) Converts a numeric string to a value

S1 : Numeric string

R2 : Base (0, 2..36)

Converte

d Value

NumToStr(R1, R2, R3) Converts a numeric data to a string

R1 : Numeric value

R2 : Value type

S3 : Format string

Converte

d Value

LogOn(S1, S2) A user log on

S1 : User ID

S2 : Password

1: OK

0: Error

LogOff() A user log off. 1: OK

0: Error

CIMON-Xpanel330


LogOnWin() Open a user log on window.

GetSecurity() Gets the current security level (0..10) Security

Level

OpenConfigWin() Open the online configuration tool window.

SoftKeyboard(R1, R2, R3) Show or hide the software keyboard

AlarmPrint(R1, R2, R3, R4,

R5)nt(R1, R2, R3, R4, R5)

Print a alarm list of designated group.

R1 : Group number (1..10)

R2 : Number of alarm to print

R3 : Time/Date format code

R4 : Font size

R5 : Option flags (_ALMPRT_xxxx_)

AlaramCSVWr(R1, S2, R3,

R4, R5)

Create a CSV formatted file with designated alarm group.

R1 : Alarm group number

S2 : File name

R3 : Time/Date format code

R4 : Option flags (_ALMPRT_xxxx_)


TouchCalib() Opens the touch panel calibration window.

ClearAlarmLog(R1) Clear all messages listed in the designated alarmgroup (summary)R1 : Alarm group number

AddMessage(R1, S2) Add a new string to the scroll message window.R1 : String IDS2 : A string to add.

RemoveMessage(R1) Remove a string which was already registered to thescroll messagewindow by AddMessage() function.R1 : String ID which was designated on AddMessage()function call.

RcpGetSysMem(S1, R2) Copy/move a block of system memory to the memoryof the recipe group data.S1 : Name of recipe modelR2 : System memory address

RcpSetSysMem(S1, R2) Copy/move the recipe group data in memory to systemmemory.S1 : Name of recipe modelR2 : System memory address

SetSysMem(R1, R2) Set a value to the designated system memory.R1 : System memory addressR2 : Value to set

GetSysMem(R1) Get a value from the designated system memory.R1 : System memory address

Real

SysMemMove(R1, R2, R3) Move a block of data within the system memory.R1 : System memory address (source)R2 : System memory address (destination)

Script 331


R3 : Number of data to move

SysMemFill(R1, R2, R3) Fill a block of system memory with the designatedvalue.R1 : System memory addressR2 : Fill valueR3 : Number of data to fill

LcdBrightUp() LCD brightness control (lighten)

LcdBrightDown() LCD brightness control (darken)

LcdBacklight(R1) LCD backlight control (turn on / off)

StaticBeepCtrl(R1) Turn on or turn off beep on Xpanel.

R1 : Beep on / off value (0: Off, 1: On)

SetSpeed(R1) Script process speed control.

R1 : Speed value (0: Normal, Another value: High)

SetDate(R1,R2,R3) Change date on Xpanel.

SetTime(R1) Change time on Xpanel

24.5.1 PageOpen(S1)

PageOpen(S1) Opens a new page

[S1] new page name (without extension)

Opens a new screen page. If the new page has no special style, then previous page or

frame will be closed automatically. Otherwise, according to the style of the new page,

following result can be shown.

A pop-upstyle

If a new page has a style of pop-up, current page does not affected by this new page.

The new page pops up over current page.

A page forframe

This kind of page has a position number in a frame. For open this page, the frame has

to be opened in advance. The old page which has the same position number in the

frame will be replaced by this page automatically.

24.5.2 FrameOpen(S1)

FrameOpen(S1) Opens a new frame

[S1] new frame name (without extension)

CIMON-Xpanel332


Opens a new screen frame. Previous page or frame will be closed automatically.

The default pages for frame will be opened automatically.

24.5.3 StringTable(R1, R2)

StringTable(R1,

R2)

Gets a string data from string table

[R1] String group number

[R2] String number in a group

Gets a string data from the string table. The string table must have been configured by ‘

String Editor’. Assign the group number of a string table to the R1, and the string

number of a string in that group to the R2 parameter. Returned data is a string type

value, and it can be used for string tag, variable or other function’s parameter.

ExampleProgram

StrTag = StringTable(1, 14)

Result StrTag : “A string that is defined as 14 in group#1”

24.5.4 GetTime(R1)

GetTime(R1) Gets the current clock data

[R1] type of clock data

0 : The number of seconds after 1st. January 1970 UTC

1 : the number of year (1970..)

2 : the number of month (1..12)

3 : the number of day (1..31)

4 : the number of hour (0..23)

5 : the number of minute (0..59)

6 : the number of second (0..59)

7 : the number of day of week (1..7 : 1=Sunday, 2=Monday, 7=Saturday)

8 : the number of today’s minute count (0..1439 : 0=midnight)

9 : the number of today’s second count (0..86399, 0=midnight)

Script 333


24.5.5 TimeStr(R1, S2)

TimeStr(R1,

S2)

Makes a string of clock

[R1] Clock data (It can be acquired by GetTime(0) function call)

The number of seconds after 1st. January 1970 UTC

[S2] Format string (can include following symbols)

%A : Full name of weekday (ex : Sunday)

%a : Abbreviation of weekday (ex : Sun)

%B : Full name of month (ex : January)

%b : Abbreviation of month (ex : Jan)

%d : date (1..31)

%H : Hour in 24-hour format (0..23)

%I : Hour in 12-hour format (1..12)

%m : Month (1..12)

%M : Minute (0..59)

%p : A.M. / P.M. indicator for 12-hour format (A.M., P.M.)

%S : Second (0..59)

%y : Number of year without century (00..99)

%Y : Number of year with century (ex : 2006)

ExampleProgram

CurTime = GetTime(0);

StrTag = TimeStr(CurTime, "%Y/%m/%d/ %H:%M:%S");

Result StrTag : “A string that is defined as 14 in group#1”

24.5.6 RunApp(S1, S2)

RunApp(S1,

S2)

Executes an external application program

[ S 1 ] Application program name with path and extension

[ S 2 ] Input parameter string for the application program

CIMON-Xpanel334


Executes an external application program.

This program can be not only system included program, also user programmed

program.

Example

ProgramRunApp(“Ping.EXE”, “- t 100.100.100.1”) ;

Result Ping test screen will be popped up when this command or program is issued.

24.5.7 MakeCsv(S1, R2)

MakeCsv(S1,

R2)Makes a CSV Formatted log file in SD memory

[ S 1 ] Log model name

[R2 ] Block number of designated log model

Converts the designated block file to a CSV formatted file and stores it on the SD/MMC

memory.

A SD/MMC memory has to be plugged before the issuing of this function. A CSV file will

be written in the folder ‘Xpanel’ of the SD/MMC memory card. The CSV file name is

assembled with the date and time log started, and it’s from original block file.

(YYMMDD HHmmSS.CSV)

When the R2 parameter is zero, this function will try to convert the current log

proceeding (uncompleted) block file. If the logging task of designated model is not

running at the moment of the function call, no CSV file will be created.

The parameter R2 can be designated up to the ‘Maximum Block No.’ which should have

been set in the model configuration dialog box. When the R2 parameter is 1, this

function will try to convert the most recently log completed block file.

Obsolete : See the 'MakeLogCsv(S1, R2, R3)' function below.

Example

ProgramMakeCsv(“ModelName”, 1);

Script 335


24.5.8 MakeCsvUsb(S1, R2)

MakeCsvUsb

(S1, R2)Makes a CSV Formatted log file in USB memory


[R2 ] Block number of designated log model

Converts the designated block file to a CSV formatted file and stores it on the USB

memory.

An USB memory has to be plugged before the issuing of this function. A CSV file will be

written in the folder ‘Xpanel’ of the USB memory card. The CSV file name is assembled

with the date and time log started, and it’s from original block file. (YYMMDD

HHmmSS.CSV)

When the R2 parameter is zero, this function will try to convert the current log

proceeding (uncompleted) block file. If the logging task of designated model is not

running at the moment of the function call, no CSV file will be created.

The parameter R2 can be designated up to the ‘Maximum Block No.’ which should have

been set in the model configuration dialog box. When the R2 parameter is 1, this

function will try to convert the most recently log completed block file.

Obsolete : See the 'MakeLogCsv(S1, R2, R3)' function below.

24.5.9 MakeLogCsv(S1,R2,R3)

MakeLogCsv(S1,

R2,R3)Makes a CSV formatted log file.


[R2 ] Block number of designated log model.

[R3 ] Storage type (_LOCAL_, _SDMEM_, _USBMEM_

Converts the designated block file to a CSV formatted file and stores it on the

designated storage (R3).

CIMON-Xpanel336


Storage Media Number Symbol CSV file location

Internal FlashDisk

0 _LOCAL_ \ \XPane l \LOG\ [modelname] \

SD/MMC 1 _SDMEM_ \ \ L O G \ [ m o d e l n a m e ] \

USB 2 _USBMEM_ \ \ L O G \ [ m o d e l n a m e ] \

The CSV file name is assembled with the start date and time of log data, and it’s

from original block file. (YYMMDD HHmmSS.CSV) When the R2 parameter is zero,

this function will try to convert the uncompleted block file which is under logging. If

the logging task of designated model is not running at the moment of the function

call, no CSV file will be created. The parameter R2 can be designated up to the

‘Maximum Block No.’ which should have been set in the model configuration dialog

box. When the R2 parameter is 1, this function will try to convert the most recently

log completed block file.

This function includes all functionalities of “MakeCsv()” and “MakeCsvUsb()”

functions. This function is strongly recommended for creating a CSV formatted file

from log data instead of using the two obsolete functions.

Example

Program MakeLogCsv(“ModelName”, 1, _LOCAL_);

Result A CSV file will be created on the local flash memory with the data from the most

recently log completed block file.

24.5.10DataLog(S1, R2)

DataLog(S1,

R2)Data logging start / stop


[R2 ] 0 or 1 (0 : STOP, 1 : START)

This function is effective only on the log model of external call start type. Models with

other start type such as periodic, trigger tag, enable tag or on time are not affected by

this function.

If the R2 parameter is 0, the designated logging task will be terminated. Otherwise, the

logging task will be invoked by this function. This function treats the non-zero value of

R2 as 1.

Script 337


Example

ProgramDataLog(“ModelName”, 1);

Result Data logging task will be invoked.

24.5.11RcpDownload(R1)

RcpDownload

(R1)

Reads a recipe data group form file, and downloads to device

[ S 1 ] Recipe model name

[R2 ] Zero based group number

Reads a group data from the recipe configuration file, and download them to the device.

After this function, the group data in Xpanel memory will be changed to the read group

data. The group data must have been configured in Xpanel Designer before this function

call.

Example

ProgramRcpDownload(“ModelName”, 1);

Result Reads the #1 group data from "ModelName" recipe file, and download them to the

device.

24.5.12RcpUpload(R1)

RcpUpload(R1)Uploads a recipe group data from device, and stores them to the

recipe configuration file



Reads a group data from the device through communication, and stores them to the

CIMON-Xpanel338


recipe configuration file. After this function, the group data in Xpanel memory will be

changed to the read group data. The designated recipe group must have been declared

in Xpanel Designer before this function call.

Example

ProgramRcpUpload(“ModelName”, 2);

ResultUploads the recipe data from the device, and stores them to the group #2 of

"ModelName" recipe file.

24.5.13RcpStop(S1)

RcpStop(S1) Stops and terminates the recipe operations


This function terminates any job related with designated name of recipe model. For

example, if download process is proceeding through communication when this function

is issued, then the communication will be stopped and terminated. Be careful to use

this function, because there is a possibility of storing unwanted data group in file or

device. Use this function only when there is a unrecoverable network or device

breakdown.

24.5.14RcpFileStore(S1, R2)

RcpFileStore

(S1, R2)

Stores the current recipe data in memory to the file



This function stores a group data in memory of Xpanel to the configuration file.

The designated recipe group must have been declared in Xpanel Designer before this

function call.

Script 339


24.5.15RcpFileRead(S1, R2)

RcpFileRead

(S1, R2)

Stores the current recipe data in memory to the file



This function reads a group data in the configuration file and stores them to the

memory of Xpanel. The designated recipe group must have been configured by Xpanel

Designer, or stored by other way before this function call..

24.5.16RcpMemDown(S1)

RcpMemDown

(S1)

Downloads a group of recipe data in memory to the device


This function downloads a group data in memory of Xpanel to the device.

The group data must have been loaded in memory by other way before this function

issue.

24.5.17RcpMemUp(S1)

RcpMemUp(S1) Uploads a group of recipe data to memory from the device


This function uploads a group data in device to the memory of Xpanel.

The uploaded group data can be processed by other functions or recipe tool window.

CIMON-Xpanel340


24.5.18RcpCsvRd(S1, S2, R3)

Rc

pC

sv

Rd

(S1

,

S2,

R3)

Reads a group of recipe data from CSV formatted file

[ S1] Recipe model name

[ S 2 ] CSV file name (without extension and path)

[R3 ] CSV file location code (0 : local, 1 : SD/MMC, 2 : USB)

This function reads a group of data from CSV formatted file and stores them to the memory of Xpanel.

The CSV formatted file must have information about the number of data it has.

This number must be located in the top most of data list, and the number must be matched with the one

that assigned

in the recipe model setup dialog box.

Script 341


The second parameter S2 is a name of CSV file to read. There is no need to specify the extension. But,

the path of the CSV file location must be root folder of each storage media.

The third parameter R3 indicates the storage media where the CSV file was stored. It can be one of

three numbers, 0 to 2. Xpanel provides predefined constants for them. That is, following constant

symbols can be used as parameter R3 instead of number.

Media Number Symbol CSV file location

Internal Flash Disk 0 _LOCAL_ Xpanel

SD/MMC 1 _SDMEM_ Root

USB 2 _USBMEM_ Root

Ex

a

m

pl

e

Pr

og

ra

m

RcpCsvRd(“ModelName”, “RcpFileName”, _SDMEM_);

Re

sul

t

Reads a CSV formatted file named as "RcpFileName.CSV" in SD/MMC memory card, and stores the data

in memory of Xpanel.

24.5.19RcpCsvWr(S1, S2, R3)

RcpCsvWr(S1,

S2, R3)Create a CSV formatted file with current recipe group data in memory.


[ S 2 ] CSV file name (without extension and path)


This function creates a CSV formatted file with a group data in XPanel’s memory. The

created CSV formatted file includes a number which represents how many number of

recipe group data are followed as shown in the following picture.

CIMON-Xpanel342


The second parameter S2 is a name of CSV file to create. There is no need to specify

the extension. But, the path of the CSV file location must be root folder of each storage

media. If there is a file with same name and extension, it will be replaced with the newly

created CSV file without any warning or notification.

The third parameter R3 indicates the storage media where the CSV file will be created.

It can be one of three numbers, 0 to 2. XPanel provides predefined constants for them.

That is, following constant symbols can be used as parameter R3 instead of number.


Internal Flash Disk 0 _LOCAL_ \ \ X P a n e l \


USB 2 _USBMEM_ Root

Example

ProgramRcpCsvWr(“ModelName”, “RcpFileName”, _SDMEM_);

ResultCreate/Replace a CSV formatted file named as “RcpFileName.CSV” in SD/MMC memory

card with the data in memory of XPanel.

24.5.20RcpConfig()

RcpConfig() Pops up the recipe data manipulation tool window

No Parameter

Script 343


This function pops up a tool window for recipe. This tool window shows the current

recipe data in memory. And it provides some tools for editing individual datum in a

group, changing current group, saving the current data to file and up/downloading the

recipe data from/to the device. (Please refer to the ‘Recipe’ section for more

information)

24.5.21TrendCsvWr(S1, R2)

TrendCsvWr

(S1, R2))Makes and stores a CSV formatted file from trend

[ S 1 ] Trend name


This function makes a CSV formatted file from a trend object. Output CSV file can be stored

in not only local flash disk, but external memory card. Next screen capture shows an example

of output CSV file.

The name of generated CSV file has the format of "Trendname_MMDDHHmmSS.CSV

". This name is generated from trend name, date and time.

The second parameter R2 indicates the storage media where the CSV file will be stored. It

can be one of three numbers, 0 to 2. Xpanel provides predefined constants for them. That is,

following constant symbols can be used as parameter R2 instead of number.

CIMON-Xpanel344





USB 2 _USBMEM_ Root

Example

ProgramTrendCsvWr(“TrendExample”, _SDMEM_);

Result

Makes a CSV formatted file on SD/MMC cards. The data will be taken from the

"TrendExample" trend data.

24.5.22ScrCapture(S1, R2)

ScrCapture(S1,

R2)Captures current screen and makes a BMP format image file

[ S 1 ] Seed for making BMP file name

[R2 ] BMP file location code (0 : local, 1 : SD/MMC, 2 : USB)

This function captures current screen display and makes a BMP formatted image file. The name

of BMP file will be made with the seed string of S1 parameter and time. File name format is "

Seedname_HHmmSS.BMP".

The second parameter R2 indicates the storage media for generated BMP file. It can be one of

three numbers, 0 to 2. Xpanel provides predefined constants for them. That is, following

constant symbols can be used as parameter R2 instead of number.




USB 2 _USBMEM_ Root

Example

ProgramScrCapture(“Mybmp”, _SDMEM_);

Result Makes a CSV formatted file on SD/MMC cards. The data will be taken from the "TrendExample"

Script 345


trend data.

24.5.23Sleep(R1)

Sleep(R1) Ruts some delay to the current script program

[R1 ] Delay time in milli-seconds

This function suspends the execution of the current script program for a specified

interval (R1).

The interval must be specified in milli-seconds unit.

24.5.24HardCopy()

HardCopy() Prints out the current screen image to USB printer

This function prints out the screen image to USB printer.

The printer must support PCL (Printer Control Language).

24.5.25OpenPort(R1, R2, R3, R4, R5)

OpenPort

(R1, R2, R3, R4,

R5)

Opens the R1 serial port for communication.

[R1 ] COM port number (use the predefined symbol. _COMxxxx_)

[R2 ] Baudrate (use the predefined symbol, _BPSxxxx_)

[R3 ] Parity (use the predefined symbol, _PARITY_xxx)

[R4 ] Data bits (7 or 8)

[R5 ] Stop bits (use the predefined symbol, _STOPBIT_xxx)

This function opens a serial port for communication. Xpanel has two serial

CIMON-Xpanel346


communication ports (COM1 and COM2). The COM1 port can be configured as one of

three modes (RS232C, RS422 and RS485). Predefined symbols for R1, R2, R3 and R5

parameters are provided, please refer to the ‘Constants’ section of this manual.

The port which is being used for device communication or already opened, cannot be

opened by this function. Before calling this function, ensure that the designated port is

not being used in device driver. And also, if the port has been opened and used

previously before this function call, ensure that it was closed by ClosePort() function. If

there is an error for opening a port, this function returns zero (0). When the port was

opened successfully, this function returns non-zero value.

Example

Program

OpenPort(_COM485_, _BPS19200_, _PARITY_NONE_, 8, _STOPBIT_ONE_);

SendByte(_COM485_, 2);

……

ClosePort(_COM485_);

Result

Opens the COM1 port for communication if it is available for using.

The port will be set up as RS485 communication mode, 19200 bps, no parity, 8 data

bits and 1 stop bit.

24.5.26ClosePort(R1)

ClosePort(R1) Closes the R1 serial port which has been opened


This function closes the designated serial port which has been opened by OpenPort()

function.

Predefined symbols for R1 parameter are provided, please refer to the ‘Constants’

section of this manual.

Example

Prog



……

Script 347


ClosePort(_COM485_);

Result Closes the COM1 port.

24.5.27SendByte(R1, R2)

SendByte(R1,

R2)Transmits a string (S2) through the R1 port


[R2 ] A datum to transmit. The value can be between 0 and 255.

This function transmits a datum through the designated serial port (R1) which has

been opened by OpenPort() function. Predefined symbols for R1 parameter are

provided, please refer to the ‘Constants’ section of this manual.

The R2 parameter must be a byte datum, between 0 (0x00) and 255 (0xFF). If a value

larger than 255 (0xFF) was designated to the R2, the upper bytes will be discarded and

only the lower 1 byte datum will be transmitted. For example, if the value 0x1234 was

assigned to the R2, the 0x34 will be transmitted.

Ensure that the R1 port must have been opened by OpenPort() function, before calling

this function.

Example

Program



……

Result Transmits a byte datum 2 (0x02) through the COM1 port in RS485 mode.

24.5.28SendString(R1, S2)

SendString(R1,

S2)Transmits a string (S2) through the R1 port

CIMON-Xpanel348



[ S 2 ] A string to transmit. The maximum length of the string is 255

characters

This function transmits a string through the designated serial port (R1) which has been

opened by OpenPort() function. Predefined symbols for R1 parameter are provided,

please refer to the ‘Constants’ section of this manual. The S2 parameter must be a

string or string tag.


this function.

Example

Program


SendString(_COM485_, “This string will be transmitted.”) ;

……

ResultRS485 통신을 하는 COM1를 통해 문자열데이터 “This string will be transmitted.”를 전송

합니다 .

24.5.29ReceiveByte(R1, R2)

ReceiveByte

(R1, R2)Recives a byte datum from R1 port

[R1] COM port number (use the predefined symbol. _COMxxxx_)

[R2 ] Timeout in milli-second

This function waits and receives a byte datum from designated port (R1) which has

been opened by OpenPort() function. If there is no datum until when the timeout (R2)

expires, this function will return 256 (0x100). Otherwise, a received byte datum will be

returned. (0 to 255)

R1 parameter specifies the COM port for receiving data, and predefined symbols can be

used for this parameter. Please refer to the ‘Constants’ section of this manual.


Script 349


this function.

Example

Program

VAR RxData;


RxData = RecieveByte(_COM485_, 1000);

If(RxData < 256)

……

ResultReceives a datum from the COM1 port in RS485 mode, and stores the datum in ‘RxData’

variable..

24.5.30StrToNum(S1, R2)

StrToNum(S1,

R2)Convers a numeric string to a value

[ S 1 ] Numeric string. It can be the following form when the base (R2)

is 10 :

[sign][digit][.digit][d|D|e|E[sign]digit]

The sign is either plus (+) or minus (-), and digits are one or more decimal digits. If no

digits appear before the radix character, at least one must appear after the radix

character. The decimal digits can be followed by an exponent, which consists of an

introductory letter (d, D, e, or E) and an optionally signed integer. If neither and

exponent part nor a radix character appears, a radix character is assumed to follow the

last digit in the string.

This function returns 0, if no conversion can be performed or an error occurs.

[R2 ] Base number (0 or 2..36).

I f base is 0 the following rules are applied :

CIMON-Xpanel350


1) The initial characters of the string are used to determine the base. If the first

character is 0 and the second character is not ‘x’ or ‘X’, the string is interpreted

as an octal integer. (ex : 01237)

2) If the first character is ‘0’ and the second character is ‘x’ or ‘X’, the string is

interpreted as a hexadecimal integer. (ex : 0xF5EA)

3) Otherwise, it is interpreted as a decimal number.

When the base in bigger than 10, the letters ‘a’ through ‘z’ (or ‘A’ through ‘Z’) are

assigned the values 10 through 35. Only letters whose assigned values are less than

base are permitted.

Example

Program

VAR Val;

Val = StrToNum(“3.14e3”, 10);

……

Result The variable ‘Val’ will be 3,140.

24.5.31NumToStr(R1 , R2 , S3)

Nu

mT

oSt

r

(R1

,

R2

,

S3)

Converts a numeric value to a string

[R1 ] Numeric value to convert

[R2 ] Value type (_UINT_, _INT_, _FLOAT_, _HEX_, _EXP_)

[ S 3 ] Format of string to be built.

A format specification, which consists of optional and required fields, has the following form:

“[width] [.precision]”

Each field of the format specification is a number signifying a particular value type.

The simplest format specification contains nothing.

Script 351


width

Optional number that specifies the minimum number of characters output.

It is a nonnegative decimal integer controlling the minimum number of

characters printed. If the number of characters in the output value is less

than the specified width, blanks are added to the values until the minimum

width is reached. If width is prefixed with 0, zeros are added until the

minimum width is reached (not useful for left-aligned numbers).

The width specification never causes a value to be truncated. If the

number of characters in the output value is greater than the specified

width, or if width is not given, all characters of the value are printed.

precisionOptional number that specifies the maximum number of characters printed

for all or part of the output field, or the minimum number of digits printed

for integer values.

Ex

a

m

pl

e

Pr

og

ra

m

VAR Val1,Va2,Val3;

Val1 = NumToStr(“123.456”, _FLOAT, “3”) ;

Val2 = NumToStr (“123.456”, _FLOAT, “04”) ;

Val3 = NumToStr (“123.456”, _FLOAT, “6.2”) ;

……

Re

sul

t

The string stored in ‘StrTag’ is “034”.

24.5.32LogOn(S1, S2)

LogOn(S1, S2) Logs on a user

[ S 1 ] User ID string.

This ID should have been registered by the “Security” configuration tool of Xpanel

Desinger.

[ S 2 ] Password string

The password can be composed only with numeric characters.

CIMON-Xpanel352


Please refer to the “User Security” section of this manual.

Example

Program

LogOn(“John” , “1234”) ;

……

Result

I f ‘John’ is regal user of this system and the password is matched, then the current

security

level of system will be changed to the John’s level.

24.5.33LogOff()

LogOff() Logs off the current user

No Parameter

This function makes the current user to log off. The security level of the system will be

the lowest level (level 0).

Example

ProgramLogOff();

24.5.34LogOnWin()

LogOnWin() Popup the log on window.

No Parameter

Script 353


Example

ProgramLogOnWin();

24.5.35GetSecurity()

GetSecurity() Gets the security level of current system

No Parameter

This function returns the security level of system. The returned value is between 0 and

10. (0 is the lowest level.)

Example

Program

Var Sllevel;;

……

Slevel = GetSecurity();

24.5.36OpenConfigWin()

OpenConfigWi

n()Opens the online configuration tool window

No Parameter

This function opens the online configuration tool window.

CIMON-Xpanel354


Example

Program OpenConfigWin();

24.5.37SoftKeyboard(R1,R2,R3)

SoftKeyboard

(R1,R2,R3)Opens the online configuration tool window

[R1 ] Show (non-zero value) or Hide (zero)

[R2 ] Software keyboard position in screen. (X coordinate, 0..799)

[R3 ] Software keyboard position in screen. (Y coordinate, 0..599)

The origin position (R2, R3) is upper-left corner of the keyboard.

Example SoftKeyboard(1,10,10);

Script 355


Program

Result The software keyboard will be displayed at the position (10, 10) of screen.

24.5.38AlarmPrint(R1,R2,R3,R4,R5)

AlarmPrint

(R1,R2,R3,R4,

R5)

Print out the alarm list.

[R1 ] Alarm Group number (1..10)

[R2 ] Number of alarm to print (1..200)

[R3 ] Time/Date format code

0 = YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

1 = DD/MM/YYYY HH:MM:SS

2 = MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS

3 = MM/DD HH:MM:SS

4 = DD/MM HH:MM/SS

5 = HH:MM:SS

[R4 ] Font size: 1 0 or larger value (30 is preferred)

[R5 ] Option flags : Select the items to be printed. All items are already defined

as following table. Multiple items can be specified by

bitwise ORing.

(ex) _ALMPRT_TIME_ | _ALMPRT_DESC_

Item Symbol Number

All items _ALMPRT_ALL_ 511

Alarm time _ALMPRT_TIME_ 1

Device Address _ALMPRT_ADDR_ 2

Value _ALMPRT_VALUE_ 4

Alarm type _ALMPRT_TYPE_ 8

Alarm description _ALMPRT_DESC_ 16

CIMON-Xpanel356


Example

ProgramAlarmPrint(1, 10, 1, 10, _ALMPRT_ALL_);

Result At the moment when this function was called, the most recent 10 alarm data of group 1 will be

printed

with font size 10 and “DD/MM/YYYY HH:MM:SS” format.

24.5.39AlarmCsvWr(R1,S2,R3,R4,R5)

AlarmCsvWr

(R1,S2,R3,R4,

R5)

Create a CSV formatted file with the designated alarm group data.

[R1 ] Alarm group number (1..10)

[R2 ] CSV file name (without extension and path)

[R3 ] Time/Date format code

0 = YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

1 = DD/MM/YYYY HH:MM:SS

2 = MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS

3 = MM/DD HH:MM:SS

4 = DD/MM HH:MM/SS

5 = HH:MM:SS

[R4 ] Option flags : Select the items to be written in CSV file.

All item flags are already defined as following table. Multiple items can be

specified by bitwise ORing.

ex) _ALMPRT_TIME_ | _ALMPRT_DESC_

Item Symbol Number

All items _ALMPRT_ALL_ 511

Time and date _ALMPRT_TIME_ 1

Memory Address _ALMPRT_ADDR_ 2

Value _ALMPRT_VALUE_ 4

Alarm type _ALMPRT_TYPE_ 8

Script 357


Alarm description _ALMPRT_DESC_ 16


This function creates a CSV formatted file with the designated group of alarm data.

The group number is identified by the first parameter R1.

The second parameter S2 is a name of CSV file to create. There is no need to specify the

extension. But, the path of the CSV file location must be root folder of each storage media

designated by R3 parameter. If there is a file with same name and extension, it will be replaced

with the newly created CSV file without any warning or notification.

The third parameter R3 indicates the storage media where the CSV file will be created. It can

be one of three numbers, 0 to 2. XPanel provides predefined constants for them.

That is, following constant symbols can be used as parameter R3 instead of number.


Internal Flash Disk 0 _LOCAL_ \ \ X P a n e l \


USB 2 _USBMEM_ Root

Example

ProgramAlarmCsvWr(1, “AlmGrp1”, 0, _ALMPRT_ALL_, _SDMEM_);

Result

Create/Replace a CSV formatted file named as “AlmGrp1.CSV” in SD/MMC memory card with the

group 1 alarm data. All alarm information is written to the output file with the time format of

“YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS”.

24.5.40TouchCalib()

TouchCalib() Opens the touch panel calibration window.

This function opens touch panel calibration window. Follow the instruction displayed in

this window.

CIMON-Xpanel358


Example

ProgramTouchCalib();

ResultAfter completion of touch panel calibration, the system should be shutdown.

Otherwise, the calibration parameters will be lost at next power on.

24.5.41ClearAlarmLog(R1)

ClearAlarmLog

(R1)Clear all messages listed in the designated alarm group (summary)

[R1 ] Alarm group number (1 .. 10)

Example

ProgramClearAlarmLog(1);

Result Clear all alarm messages in the alarm group #1 and summary window.

24.5.42AddMessage(R1, S2)

AddMessage Add a new string to the scroll message window.

Script 359


(R1, S2)

[R1 ] String ID (valid range : 0 .. 9999)

[ S 2 ] The string to add.

Example

Program AddMessage(123, “this message will be scrolled in the bottom window”) ;

Result The given message (S2) string will be scrolled in the scroll message window.

24.5.43RemoveMessage(R1)

RemoveMessa

ge(R1)

Remove a string which was already registered to the scroll message

window by AddMessage() function.

[R1 ] String ID (valid range : 0 .. 9999) which was designated at AddMessage()

function call or -1

(clear all messages in scroll window).

Example

Program RemoveMessage(123);

Result

The message of which ID is 123 will be removed from the scroll message

window.

24.5.44RcpGetSysMem(S1, R2)

RcpGetSysMe

m

(S1, R2)

Copy/move a block of system memory to the recipe group data.

CIMON-Xpanel360


[S1] Recipe model name

[R2 ] System memory address

This function fills the recipe group data with the block data designated by thesystem memory address R2.

Example

Program RcpGetSysMem(“ModelName”, 100);

Result

The recipe group data in memory will be filled with the data block located in the

system memory address 100.

The number of data is determined by the recipe model configuration

24.5.45RcpSetSysMem(S1, R2)

RcpSetSysMe

m

(S1, R2)

Copy/move the recipe group data to the system memory..

[S1] Recipe model name

[R2 ] System memory address

Script 361


Example

Program RcpSetSysMem(“ModelName”, 100);

Result

The recipe group data in memory will be copied to the system memory address

100.

The number of data is determined by the recipe model configuration.

24.5.46GetSysMem(R1)

GetSysMem

(R1)Get the value stored in the designated system memory

[R1] System memory address

Example

Program Rtn = GetSysMem(100);

Result The function returns a real value stored in system memory address 100.

CIMON-Xpanel362


24.5.47SysMemMove (R1)

SysMemMove

(R1)

Move/copy a block of data to the other location within the system

memory.

[R1] System memory address (source)

[R2 ] System memory address (destination)

[R3 ] Number of data

This function copies R3 data from address R1 to R2. If some regions of thesource area and the destinationoverlap, this function ensures that the original source bytes in the overlappingregion are copied before being overwritten.

Example

Program SysMemMove(100,200,10);

Result 10 data (address 100 109) are copied to the memory block of address 200 209.

Script 363


24.5.48SysMemFill(R1,R2,R3)

SysMemFill(R1,

R2,R3)Fill a block of system memory with a specified value.

[R1] System memory address

[R2 ] Fill value

[R3 ] Number of data

This function fills the system memory block started from R1 and size of R3 withthe value of R2.

Example

Program SysMemFill(100, 1234, 10);

Result 10 system memory (address 100 109) are set with a value of ‘1234’.

24.5.49LcdBrightUp()

LcdBrightUp() Lightening the LCD display

XPanel has total 32 steps of LCD brightness. This function increases one step of LCD

brightness from current level.

I f current level is the highest level, this function has no effect.

Example

Program LcdBrightUp();

Result Increase a step of LCD brightness.

24.5.50LcdBrightDown()

LcdBrightDow

n()Darkening the LCD display

CIMON-Xpanel364


XPanel has total 32 steps of LCD brightness. This function decreases one step of LCD

brightness from current level.

I f current level is the lowest level, this function has no effect.

Example

Program LcdBrightDown();

Result Decrease a step of LCD brightness.

24.5.51LcdBacklight(R1)

LcdBacklight

(R1)Turn on / off the LCD backlight

[R1]

Non zero value à Turn the LCD backlight on,

Zero à Turn the LCD backlight off.

This function controls the backlight of LCD.

Any non-zero value of R1 turns on the backlight, and zero turns off the backlight.

Example

Program LcdBacklight(0);

Result Turn the LCD backlight off.

24.5.52StaticBeepCtrl(R1)

StaticBeepCtrl(R1)

Turn on or turn off beep on Xpanel.

[R1]

Beep on / off value (0: Off, 1: On)

This function turn on or turn off beep on Xpanel.

Example

ProgramStaticBeepCtrl(1);

Result It is turn on beep.

Script 365


24.5.53SetSpeed(R1)

SetSpeed(R1) Script process speed control.

[R1]

Speed value (0: Normal, Another value: High)

This function turn on or turn off beep on Xpanel.

Example

Program

TAG0 = TAG0 + 1;

SetSpeed(1);

TAG1 = TAG1 + 1;

TAG2 = TAG2 + 1;

Result After it is called “SetSpeed”, script process speed is faster.

Caution If used “SetSpeed” function on that have function to repeat, Xpanel will be slow

until be end function to repeat.

User script function that called by “Runscript” fall not under “SetSpeed”.

24.5.54SetDate(R1,R2,R3)

SetDate(R1,R2,

R3)Change date on Xpanel.

[R1 ] Year

[R2 ] Month

[R3 ] Day

This function change date on Xpanel.

Example

ProgramSetDate(2010,1,20);

Result Date will be changed.

24.5.55SetTime(R1)

CIMON-Xpanel366


SetTime(R1) Change time on Xpanel

[ [ R 1 ] Hour

[R2 ] Minute

[R3 ] Second

This function change time on Xpanel.

Example

ProgramSetTime(13,10,0);

Result Date will be changed.


Part

XXV

CIMON-Xpanel368


25 Scroll Message

Scroll Message is very useful when you want to display alarm or important message emphatically.

If you use scroll message, it will create small window at bottom of the screen for the scroll message.

It will let you reminding the electric signboard or TV caption.

You can configure the scroll message window size, character size, scroll direction, speed and gap between

message as you want.

Applied message at the scroll message will be repeated until it removed. The maximum number of scroll message

is 100 that can be registered.

See :

· Scroll Message Configuration

· Apply Scroll Message

Scroll Message 369


25.1 Scroll Message Configuration

Scroll Message Configuration

[Tools] -> [CIMON-XPANEL Setup(X)] -> [Using Scroll Message] -> [Scroll Message]

Configuration Items

CIMON-Xpanel370


Scroll Message

Height

Scroll Message is created from the bottom of the screen.

So scroll message height must be shorter than screen height.

Text Size Configure text size of scroll message. Text size must smaller than scroll message

height

Scroll Message

Gap

It configures distance between messages.

Scroll Message

Speed

It configures message scrolling speed.

Text Color, Back

Color

It configures text color and background color.

Scroll Direction It configures the scrolled direction.

25.2 Apply Scroll Message

Apply from alarms

[Tools] -> [Alarms] -> [Add],[Edit] -> [Apply Scroll Message]

Scroll Message 371


Message index at alarms

When scroll messages are applied from alarms, each message is allowed index automatically.

Please reference scroll message index generated automatically from the alarms as the following.

Alarm Group Index number

Group 1 10000 - 10063

Group 2 10100 - 10163

Group 3 10200 - 10263

Group 4 10300 - 10363

Group 5 10400 - 10463

Group 6 10500 - 10563

Group 7 10600 - 10663

Group 8 10700 - 10763

Group 9 10800 - 10863

Group 10 10900 - 10963

Apply scroll message using script

CIMON-Xpanel372


You can apply scroll message by using script function.

When you add scroll messages, you must attend the scroll message index. If it is duplicated, it will not be

added.

Ad

d

me

ss

ag

e

AddMessage(R1, S2)

[R1] Appling Index(0-9999) [S2] Appling Message

Example ) AddMessage(1, "Warning")

Re

mo

ve

Me

ss

ag

e

RemoveMessage(R1)

[R1] Removing Index(0-9999, If you use number-1, then it will remove all items)

Example ) RemoveMessabe(1);

Scroll Message 373



Part

XXVI

Indirect Address 375


26 Indirect Address

Indirect Tag

The indirect tag is to describe one tag by two tags that are divided into Target tag and Offset tag.

As described by the indirect tag, the address of Target tag is handled to change, referring to the tag’s value

designated as Offset tag.

For example, if the tag’s value designated as Offset tag is 0, it will be same value with the designated

address of tag designated as Target tag

Also, if the value of Target tag is 2, it will express the value that is 2 plus the address designated to Target

tag.

Notation Method

Write - “#” between Target Tag and Offset Tag

Ex) Target_Tag#Offset_Tag

Attention

Offset tag is that all analogue tag and digital tag with sate value(in case of I/O device, there are some tags

without sate value) are registered,

but Target tag is specified only real tag with the I/O device below.

In case of using the tag with I/O device that is not described on the bottom is managed as normal tag.

Supporting Indirect Tag Device

KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-PLC

KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-PLC HMI

KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-PLC Loader

KDT SYSTEMS XPANEL

Allen Bradley DF1

DELTA TAU PMAC Drive

FUJI Micrex SX

KEYENCE PLC (KV mode)

KOYO DirectNet

LSIS GLOFA PLC Cnet

LSIS GLOFA PLC Enet

CIMON-Xpanel376


LSIS Master-K S-Series Enet

LSIS Master-K H Series PLC Cnet

LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Cnet

LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Loader

LSIS XGT/XGB Series PLC Cnet

LSIS XGT Series FEnet

MITSUBISHI MELSEC A Loader

MITSUBISHI MELSEC 1C (AnA/Anu CPU)

MITSUBISHI MELSEC 1C (A CPU)

MITSUBISHI MELSEC FX

MITSUBISHI MELSEC 1E

MITSUBISHI MELSEC 3E

MITSUBISHI MELSEC 3E (ASCII)

MITSUBISHI MELSEC FX Loader

MITSUBISHI MELSEC-Q Loader (Q00/01)

MITSUBISHI MELSEC-Q Loader (Q02/06/12/25)

YASKAWA MEMOBUS RTU

MODBUS ASCII protocl

MODBUS RTU protocl

MODBUS TCP

MAIS FPO MEWTOCOL-COM

OMRON PLC (Host Link)

SIEMENS RK512/3964R

SIEMENS S7 Ethernet

SIEMENS S7 MPI

SIEMENSE S7 PPI Direct

SAIA S-BUS

YOKOGAWA Computer Link Protocol

It is ignored when the value of Offset tag is under 0, and numbers under a decimal point are thrown.

26.1 Using Indirect Tag

Indirect Tag can be used by following functions.

Supporting Functions of Indirect Tag

Tag Value, Key Input Window, String Value, Animation bitmap, Visible, Blink, V-Size, H-Size, V-Move, H-

Move, Color, Rotate, Touch, Entry Data, Command, Script.

Example for Indirect Tag



Register - I/O device to support the Indirect Tag

Refer to the Indirect Device Item described ahead. "KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-PLC HMI" is used here.

Register - Target Tag and Offset Tag to Database

ANA_01 -> Target Tag

CIMON-Xpanel378


ANA_00 -> Offset Tag

Open a Page and Select a Tag Value Object. Register "Object Configuration" as follows.

Display - The value of Offset Tag



Display - The basic area value of Target Tag

Display - The value of Indirect Tag

The value of other areas is displayed by the value of Offset Tag(ANA_00).

Make - Buttons to change the value of "Offset Tag" and "Indirect Tag"

CIMON-Xpanel380


Input commands as like follows at ‘+’ button property of Offset change.

ANA_00 = ANA_00 + 1;// When touching, the value of Offset Tag will automatically increases by 1.

Input commands as like follows at ‘- ’ button property of Offset change.

if(ANA_00 > 1) // If the value is larger than 1,

ANA_00 = ANA_00 - 1; // When touching, the value of Offset Tag will automatically decreases by 1.

Input commands as like follows at ‘+’ button property of Data change.

ANA_01#ANA_00 = ANA_01#ANA_00 + 1; // When touching, the value of Indirect Tag will automatically

increases by 1.

Input commands as like follows at ‘- ’ button property of Data change.

ANA_01#ANA_00 = ANA_01#ANA_00 - 1; // When touching, the value of Indirect Tag will

automatically decreases by 1.

Download the project and check the changing value while touching button.


Part

XXVII

CIMON-Xpanel382


27 Communication Driver

Company Driver

ASI Controls ASIC Protocol

Barcode Scanner Barcode Scanner

Danfoss Danfoss VLT Automation Drive FC300

DELTA TAU DELTA TAU PMAC

HITACHI HITACHI Inverter SJ300/L300P

KDT SYSTEMS KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-PLC HMI (RS232C/RS422A)

KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-PLC Loader (RS232C/RS422A)

KDT Systems Xpanel Master

Keyence Keyence KV Mode

KOYO KOYO DirectNet

LSIS LSIS GLOFA Cnet

LSIS GLOFA Enet

LSIS GLOFA Loader

LSIS XGT Cnet

LSIS XGT Enet

LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Loader

LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Cnet

LSIS Master-K H Series PLC Cnet

LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Enet

LSIS Inverter Starvert

MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI Inverter FR-E500

MITSUBISHI Melsec 1C (ACPU, AnA/AnU CPU)

MITSUBISHI Melsec 3E(Q/QnA)

MITSUBISHI Melsec 1E

MITSUBISHI Melsec 3E ASCII

MITSUBISHI Melsec A Series (Programming Port)

MITSUBISHI Melsec FX Series

MITSUBISHI Melsec FX Series (Programming Port)

MITSUBISHI Melsec Q Series (Programming Port)

MITSUBISHI Melsec FX2N-10/20GM(Programming Port)

MODBUS Protocol MODBUS RTU protocl

MODBUS TCP protocl

NAIS NAIS PLC FP Series (MEWTOCOL-COM)

Communication Driver 383


OMRON OMRON HostLink

FINS Ethernet

SAIA SAIA S-BUS

SIEMENS SIEMENS RK512/3964R

SIEMENS S7 Ethernet

SIEMENS S7 MPI

SEIMENS S7 PPI Direct

ALLENBRADLEY ALLENBRADLEY DF1

YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA Personal Computer Link

Fuji Fuji Micrex SX Ethernet

METRONIX APD METRONIX APD

FARA N70/700 PLUS FARA N70/700 PLUS

Samsung BRAIN SPC Series Samsung BRAIN SPC Series

27.1 ASIC Protocol

This driver supports the ASI communication protocol of ASI Controls.

This protocol provides communication access to a network of ASI controllers from Xpanel.

Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create a newdevice For creating a new device activate the menu ‘Tools’- >’I/O Devices’ or icon in tool-bar.

Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

CIMON-Xpanel384


I/O Device Name : Give a device name.

This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of database accompanied by the ‘Station

Name’.

Select a devicetype

Select a device type : ASI Communication Protocol

After selecting the ‘OK’ button of previous step, ‘Serial Communication Configuration’ dialog

box will be popped

up as shown in following picture.



In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘ASI Communication Protocol’ and configure the

proper serial communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with PLC

configuration.

Local ID : The host address of Xpanel has to be designated in this window.

It is 16 bits value between 1 and 65535. There are reserved address ranges which

cannot be used by

Xpanel or DDC. Please refer to the DDC manual from ASI Controls for more information

about the address.

Create a station Move to the ‘Station’ tab of ‘Serial Communication Configuration’ dialog box.

In this dialog box, all the connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the

CIMON-Xpanel386


Xpanel.

Each field can be configured with following rules.

Station Name Give a name to the PLC.

This name will be used in the database window accompanied with the

‘Device Name’.

Station Type Choose the type of connected PLC among the “ASIC”.

Network ID This field has no effect

Station No. Specify a decimal number between 1 and 65535.

This number must be matched with the node address of the DDC.

16Bit Data

Swap

This option swaps bytes of all word or double word sized data.

Following diagram shows an example of byte swapping.



Almost all of the data type will be influenced by this option except

INT8 / UINT8 / BCD8 / UBCD8.

32Bit Data

Swap

This option swaps words of all double word sized data.

Following diagram shows an example of word swapping.

INT32 / UINT32 / BCD32 / UBCD32 / FLOAT type of TAG values will be

influenced by

this option.

Using

CheckSum

This field has no effect.

This communication driver always checks the check-sum.

Comm.Error

Message Pop

Up

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification

message at every Rx and Tx error. Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not

display the message at data receive error. Only when there is data transmit

(writing a TAG value to the station) error, the notification message is popped

up. This message box will be closed automatically about 5 seconds after.

Data Address

Xpanel supports reading object and table data from DDC. These two data can be referenced by following

TAG address format.

[Object] O[ Obj No ].[ Size ].[ Index ].[ Attribute ](:Bit No) [Table] T[ Table No ].[ Offset ](:Bit No)

Obj No / Table No

Designate the object (table) number of data location.

Please refer to the object definition of connected DDC, for more information about

object.

Size Designate the data type. It can be 1 (BYTE) or 2 (WORD).

Offset Designate the byte offset within the table.

Index Designate the assigned index number within the given object.

Attribute Designate the attribute number of data.

:Bit No Designate the bit number. This bit address notation is used in digital TAG. Notice

CIMON-Xpanel388


that the TAG with this bit number only can be read.

That is, the digital TAG writing is not supported with ASIC protocol driver.

Bit number has to be within the range of data size. In case of a table (T) or object

(O) with size 1 (BYTE), bit number can be between 0 and 7. Elsewhere, object with

size 2 (WORD), bit number can be between 0 and 15.

AddressExamples

O33.2.0.0 Object 33, WORD, Index 0, Attribute 0

T10.0 Table 10, Byte offset 0

O32.1.0.8 Object 32, BYTE, Index 0, Attribute 8

O3.2.11.0:0 Object 3, WORD, Index 11, Attribute 0, Bit 0

TAG Data Type ASIC DDC supports two types of data, BYTE and WORD. If the data type of TAG was

larger than that, Xpanel will read next continuously positioned data for making

designated data. For example, if UINT32 type of TAG referred to the address of T1.2,

Xpanel will read T1.2, T1.3, T1.4 and T1.5 for assembling the UINT32 data.

Wiring Diagram

RS232C



RS422/485

27.2 Barcode Scanner

This driver provides the function of communication with the barcode scanner via RS232C.

The barcode scanner driver is distinct from other standard drivers. It does not support real TAG.

This driver receives the characters from barcode scanner and converts them to keyboard input.

Because of that, in Xpanel kernel’s point of view, the barcode scanner is just like as a standard

keyboard.

To utilize the data from the barcode scanner, the ‘keyboard input window’ object must be used in the

graphic page design.

This topic is described in this manual.

Communication Setup : Barcode Scanner

Follow the manual from barcode scanner vender.

Make the confirmation of following condition during barcode scanner setup.

· ‘Enter (0Dh)’ or other special code must be added at the end of data transmission.

· Prepare the communication parameters from vender’s documentation. (Baudrate, Parity, Stop Bit,

Data Bits, Stop Bit)


Create a newdevice For creating a new device, use the menu ‘Tools’- >’I/O Devices’ or icon in tool-bar.


CIMON-Xpanel390


I/O Device : Give a device name.

Select a devicetype

Select a device type : ‘Barcode Scanner’


box will be

popped up as shown in following picture.



Device Tpe Barcode Scanner

Comm. Port COM1

Baud Rate 9,600 bps

Parity None

Data Bits 8 Bits

Stop Bit(s) 1 Bit

RTS/CST OFF

Comm.Type RS-232

Retry No. 3

Time Out 30

CIMON-Xpanel392




XPanel.


Station Name Give a name to the barcode scanner.)

Station Type Choose the ‘BarCode’. (No other type can be selected.)

Network ID his field has no effect.

Station No. 0

16Bits Data

Swap

his field has no effect.

32Bits Data his field has no effect.



Swap

'Key Input Window' Object : Xpanel (Page Designer)

‘Key input window’ object displays the input character to the screen and executes the assigned

commands when the predefined terminating code

input is detected.

End Code

(HEXA)

This field must be matched with terminating code of the barcode scanner.

Typically 0Dh (Enter) code is widely used.

Input Tag Name This field must be designated a string TAG.

The input string from barcode scanner is stored in this string TAG.

Command On

Input


When the ‘End Code’ is received, this command script is executed automatically.

Password Type This option can be used when there is need to hide input characters.

If this option was checked, the input characters will be seen as ‘*’ character.

CIMON-Xpanel394


Clear at End

Code

If this option was checked, the string on screen will be cleared when ‘End Code’

is received. Otherwise, the string on screen will be cleared when there is a new

input.

Communication Cable Wiring

RS232C

Above picture shows only the RS232C port of Xpanel. This is the standard DB9 RS232C pin assignment.

Typically RD and SG pins are enough to communicate with general barcode scanner. Refer to the manual

of your barcode scanner for signal description.

27.3 Danfoss VLT Automation Drive FC300

This driver can communicate with the VLT AutomationDrive FC 300 inverter series from Danfoss.

Communication Setup : Inverter Setting(FC300, VLT2800)

InverterSetting(FC300)

For normal communication, following parameters of the inverter must be set as stated.

· Parameter 8-10 : FC profile [0]

· Parameter 8-30 : FC MC [1]

Parameter Number Set Value Description

8-311 [1] Station number 1. (any number between 1 to 126)

8-321 [3] 19200 bps

8-351 [10] 10 ms Min. response delay



8-361 [5000] 5000 ms Max. response delay

8-371 [25] 25 ms Max. inter-char delay

8-102 [ 0 ] FC Profile

8-302 [ 1 ] FC MC

(Note 1) Those parameters (8-31 to 8-32) must be matched with the settings of Xpanel.

(Note 2) The parameters of 8-10 and 8-30 must be set as the value shown in this example.

If those parameters were set as other values, Xpanel can not communicate with the inverter.

InverterSetting(VLT2800)

For normal communication, following parameters of the inverter must be set as stated.

· Parameter 512 : FC profile [1]


5001 [1] Station number. (any number between 1 to 247)

5011 [5] 9600 bps

5022 [ 1 ] FC Profile

(Note 1) Those parameters (500 and 501) must be matched with the settings of Xpanel.

(Note 2) The parameter of 512 must be set as the value shown in above table.

If this parameter was set as other value, Xpanel can not communicate with the inverter.


Createanewdevice

For creating a new device the menu, 'Tool > I/O Devices' or icon in tool bar.


CIMON-Xpanel396


I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of

database accompanied by the 'Station Name'.

Selectadevicetype

Device type : ' DANFOSS VLT AutomationDrive FC-300 '

After selecting the ‘OK’ button of previous step, ‘Serial Communication Configuration’ dialog box will

be popped up as shown in following picture.



Note

FC 300 supports the RS485 only with even parity, 8 data bits and 1 stop bit.

In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘DANFOSS VLT AutomationDrive FC-300’ and configure

the

proper serial communication parameters.

Createastation

Move to the ‘Station’ tab of ‘Serial Communication Configuration’ dialog box.

In this dialog box, all the connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the Xpanel.


CIMON-Xpanel398



This name will be used in the database window accompanied with the 'Device Name'.

Station Type Choose the 'FC-300'. (No other type can be selected.)

Network ID This field has no effect.


16Bits Data

Swap


32Bits Data

Swap


Using Checksum This field has no effect.

Comm. Error

Message pop Up

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification message at

every Rx and Tx error.



Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data receive error.

Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error, the

notification message is popped up. This message box will be closed automatically

about 5 seconds after.

Address Notation

The address of TAG in Xpanel has the following format.

TAG Type Format Example

Analog [Symbol][Decimal Number] P023

Digital [Symbol][Decimal Number][.][Hexadecimal Number] P000.F

Symbol

Address

Description Access

P 0001 -

1760

Parameter Area

The address of each TAG can be induced from the parameter number of

FC 300 or VLT 2800. For example, to monitor the ’16-17 Speed [RPM]’

of FC 300, the address should be designated with ‘P1617’. For more

parameters, please refer to the ‘How to Program’ section of “FC 300

Design Guide”.

The value written to this address will be transferred to the FC 300 or VLT

2800 directly. That means, parameters of the inverter can be modified by

writing a desired value to this address. The new value can be stored in not

only RAM also EEPROM of FC 300. For storing set value to the EEPROM,

C002 point must have a non-zero value.

R/W

C 000 Control Code

1 word sized control data. Each bit has its own control meaning which is

shown in following [control code] table. To control FC 300 or VLT 2800,

write a value of combination of the table.

Ensure that the reference (C001) must be set as desired value before

issuing of this control code.

W

001 Reference

This point is a signed word data (-32767 - +32767), and the range of data

corresponds to -200% to +200% of reference. For example, the value of

CIMON-Xpanel400


16384 represents 100% of reference.

This reference value must be set before the actual control by control code

(C000).

002 EEPROM Writing

If this is non-zero, the value written to the parameter area (Pnnnn) will

be saved to the EEPROM as well as RAM of FC 300 or VLT 2800.

Otherwise, the set value will be stored only in RAM. Ensure that the value

of this point is what you wanted before parameter writing.

Above addresses can be used in both of analog and digital TAG.

For more information of each point, please refer to the ‘FC 300 Design Guide’.

[C000 : Control Code for FC300]

Bit No. Bit Value = 0 Bit Value = 1

00 Reference value External selection lsb

01 Reference value External selection msb

02 DC brake Ramp

03 Coasting No coasting

04 Quick stop Ramp

05 Freeze output Use ramp

06 Ramp stop Start

07 No function Reset

08 No function Jog

09 Ramp 1 Ramp 2

10 Data not valid Data valid

11 Relay 01 open Relay 01 active

12 Relay 02 open Relay 02 active

13 Parameter set-up Selection lsb

14 Parameter set-up Selection msb

15 No function Reverse

[ Note ] For more information of each bit, refer to the ‘Control Word According to FC Profile (CTW)’

section of ‘FC 300 Design Guide’.

[C000 : Control Code for VLT2800]

Bit No. Bit Value = 0 Bit Value = 1

00 Preset ref. lsb

01 Preset ref. msb



02 DC brake

03 Coasting stop

04 Quick stop

05 Freeze output freq.

06 Ramp stop Start

07 Reset

08 Jog

09 Ramp 1 Ramp 2

10 Data not valid Data valid

11 Relay 01 activated

12 Digital output terminal 46 activated

13 Selection Setup, lsb

14 Selection Setup, msb

15 Reverse

[ Note ] For more information of each bit, refer to the 'Control Word According to FC Profile(CTW)'

section of 'FC 2800 Design Guide'.

[Example : Monitors the frequency data]

1. Make an analog TAG for frequency data. The address can be induced from parameter number 16-13.

Designate ‘P1613’ as the address of new analog TAG.

2. Setup the scale factor of the analog TAG if needed. ‘Conversion index’ of parameter 16-13 is -1.

Configure the scaling factor of the TAG in database as 0.1. (The ‘Conversion index’ and other useful

information of each parameter

can be found on the ‘Parameter Lists’ section of the ‘FC 300 Design Guide’.)

CIMON-Xpanel402


[Example : Changes the 'speed PID lowpass filter time']

1. Make two analog TAGs. One TAG is for EEPROM storage control and the other TAG is for the parameter.

The address of parameter TAG can be induced from parameter number 7-06. Designate P0706 as the

address of the new analog TAG.



2. Setup the scale factor of the analog TAG. In this example, the value of 0.1 was designated as the scale

factor.

This value came from the ‘Conversion index’ of the parameter 7-06. But the conversion index of par.

7-06 is -4.

This index is based on the unit of second. For convenience, we can use the unit of milli-second, such

that the index can be thought as the value of -1.

3. The parameter of FC 300 can be modified by changing the TAG.

If needed but not necessarily, before the writing a new parameter value, the EEPROM storing option can

be arranged.

Following picture shows an example of changing parameter.

CIMON-Xpanel404


[Example : Start Controls ]

1. Make two analog TAGs for control. One TAG is for reference value (C001, INT16) and the other TAG is

for control word (C000, UINT16).

2. To control the FC 300, write a desired reference value to the ‘Reference’ point (C001) first. And then,

write a control value to ‘Control’ point.

For example, write the value of 0x047F for issuing a start command.

Following picture shows an example of a command expression for control. (Start with 100%)

CIMON-Xpanel406


NOTE

(Note 1) Shielded twisted pair cable must be used for P-N pair.

(Note 2) Ensure that shield cable was connected to the COM terminal (61) of FC 300.

27.4 DELTA TAU PMAC

This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between Xpanel and DELTA TAU

PMAC series drivers.

Communication Setup : PMAC

For normal communication between Xpanel and PMAC, the some of I-variables should have the values

described below.

I -variable

SetValue

Remark

I0 0 .. 15 The station number ‘0’ is the default value of PMAC. To set up the PMAC to

communicate as station 1 to 15 on a multi-drop serial cable, first communicate with

the board as station 0. Set I0 to specify the new station number. Also set I1 to 3 to

enable the station number addressing.



I1 3 CS handshake not used; software card address required.

I3 2 Communication handshake style and code

I4 0 Checksum disabled, serial errors reported immediately

I6 1 Error reporting mode.

I9 0 or 2 0 (short form of decimal) or 2 (short form of hexadecimal)

I63 1 Echo the <Control-X> character

I64 1 Internal response tag enable

Store these values to the non-volatile flash memory with the ‘SAVE’ command. Then turn off power.

Please refer to the manual of PMAC for more information.


Create a newdevice For creating a new device activate the menu ‘Tools’ -> ’I/O Devices’ or icon in tool-bar.


CIMON-Xpanel408


I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window

of database

accompanied by the ‘Station Name’.

Select a devicetype

Select a device type : ' DELTA TAU PMAC Drive '


box will be

popped up as shown in following picture..

In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘DELTA TAU PMAC Drive’ and configure the proper

serial

communication parameters. (9600bps, no parity, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit recommended)







This name will be used in the database window accompanied with the ‘

Device Name’.

Station Type Choose the ‘PMAC’. (No other type can be selected.)



16bits Data

Swap


CIMON-Xpanel410


32bits Data

Swap


Using

Checksum


Comm. Error

Message pop

Up


message at every Rx and Tx error.

Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data receive

error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station)

error, the notification message is popped up. This message box will be closed

automatically about 5 seconds after.

Address Notation



Analog [Symbol][Address] P0012

Digital [Symbol][Address] M0215

· Address : decimal number between 0 and 8191

· All the addresses can be used with the digital TAG. The value of zero (0) is treated as OFF and other

values are treated as ON in Xpanel.

Following table shows the list of devices which can be referenced in Xpanel database.

Symbol Description AddressRange

Type Access

I Variable of fixed meaning for card setup 0-8191 Analog R/W

P Global variable for programming use 0-8191 Analog R/W

M Variable assigned to memory location for user 0-8191 Analog R/W

Q Local variable for programming use 0-8191 Analog R/W

DELTA TAU PMAC communication driver supports only FLOAT data type. Ensure that the data

type of TAGs.

(Following picture shows the FLOAT data type configuration window ofXpanell database.)




Xpanel COM1/COM2RS232C

Connector Type :D89

Xpanel COM1 RS422A

Connector Type :5 Pins TerminalBlock

CIMON-Xpanel412


27.5 FATEK PLC(Serial)

This driver provides the software interface and serial communication protocol between Xpanel andFATEK PLCs.


You can configure I/O device according to various kind of field equipments by using Xpanel Designer.

Configure the option of the example followed. More details about I/O device configuration in section “I/O

device configuration”.

Create a newdevice

To configure the communication device of LSIS PLC, Select 'Tools' -> 'I/O device' in

the menu or icon in

tool-bar , and then “I/O device configuration” dialog box will be shown up. And then

click [new device] button.

“I/O device selection” dialog box is shown up, select a device name and a device type

as the following figure.

I/O Device Name :



Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window

of database accompanied

by the ‘Station Name’.

Select a devicetype

Select a device type : ' Fatek PLC Cnet '

After selecting the ‘OK’ button of previous step, ‘Serial CommunicationConfiguration’ dialog box will be popped up as shown in following picture.

In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘Fatek PLC Cnet’ andappropriate communication parameters. Those parameters must bematched with the PLC.

Create a station Move to [Station] tab at the “Serial Communication Configuration” Dialog Box and click

[Add Station] button then you can see “Station” Dialog Box popped up. Please

CIMON-Xpanel414


configuration as the following contents then click “OK” button.

StationName

Give a name to thr PLC. This name will be used in the

database window

accompanied with the 'Deviec Name' .

Station Type Choose the 'FATEK PLC'.(No other type can be slected)

Network ID This field has no meaning in this driver.(ignored in

runtime)

Station No. Specify a decimal number between 0 and 126

16Bit Data This field has no effect.



Swap

32Bit Data

Swap


Comm.Error

Message Pop

up

If this is checked, XPanel displays a communication error

notification message at every RX and Tx Error.

Otherwise(unchecked), XPanel does not display the

message at data receive error. Only When there is data

transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error, the

notification message is poped up. This message box will

be closed automatically about 5 seconds after.

Communication Setting : FATEK PLC

1) In case , using CPU Loader Port• Run ‘WinProLadder’

• Select [PLC] -> [On Line] in manu.

CIMON-Xpanel416


• Select ‘RS232’ on Connection Name, and push [Auto Check] button to popup

Connection Auto Check window.

• Select using serial port on ‘Search Port’.• Select PLC Type on ‘Select PLC Series’.• Select PLC side port on ‘Select Port’.• Push [OK] button to do connection auto check.



• Connection finished. Select [PLC] -> [Setting] -> [Station Number] to popup ‘Station

Number’ window.

• After input PLC의 Station Number, puch [OK] button to finish.• Select Port parameter on [PLC] -> [Setting], to change port parameter.

CIMON-Xpanel418


• Must select ‘Fatek Communication Protocal’ on Protocol.• After finished parameter setting, push [OK] button.• If you use serial loader port, check Port0 Parameter on [PLC] -> [Setting].

Address Notifiation

Name Symbol Digital Analog

16 Bit 32 Bit

Input discrete X X00~X9999 WX00-WX9984 DWX00-DWX9984

Output relay Y Y00~Y9999 WY00-WY9984 DWY00-DWY9984

Internal relay M M00~M9999 WM00-WM9984 DWM00-DWM9984

Step relay S S00~S9999 WS00-WS9984 DWS00-DWS9984

Timer discrete T T00~T9999 WT00-WT9984 DWT00-DWT9984

Counterdiscrete

C C00~C9999 WC00-WC9984 DWC00-DWC9984

Timer register TMR RT00-RT9999 DRT00-DRT9999

Counter register CTR RC00-RC9999 DRC00-DRC9999

Data register HR R00-R65535 DR00-DR65535

Data register DR D00-D65535 DD00-DD65535

(1) Word tag is supported by only 16 Bit.(2) Digital address is only used to Digital tag.(3) 32Bit address is used to 32 bit Analog tag only.



27.6 FATEK PLC(Ethernet)

This driver provides the software interface and Ethernet communication protocol between Xpanel andFATEK PLCs.





Create a newdevice

To configure the communication device of LSIS PLC, Select 'Tools' -> 'I/O device' in the

menu or icon in

tool-bar , and then “I/O device configuration” dialog box will be shown up. And then click

[new device] button.

“I/O device selection” dialog box is shown up, select a device name and a device type as the

following figure.

I/O Device Name :

CIMON-Xpanel420


Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of

database accompanied


Select a devicetype

Select a device type : ' Fatek PLC Enet '

After selecting the ‘OK’ button of previous step, ‘Ethernet CommunicationConfiguration’ ’ dialog box will be popped up as shown in following picture.

In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘Fatek PLC Enet’ and appropriatecommunication parameters. Those parameters must be matched with thePLC.

Create a station Move to [Station] tab at the “Serial Communication Configuration” Dialog Box and click [Add

Station] button then you can see “Station” Dialog Box popped up. Please configuration as the

following contents then click “OK” button.



Station Name Give a name to thr PLC. This name will be used in the database window


Station Type Choose the 'FATEK PLC'.(No other type can be slected)

Network ID This field has no meaning in this driver.(ignored in runtime)

IP Address Input IP Address FATEK PLC

Soket Port No. Input Major Port FATEK PLC.

16Bit Data

Swap


32Bit Data

Swap


String Data

Swap


Using

Checksum


CIMON-Xpanel422


Comm.Error

Message Pop

up

If this is checked, XPanel displays a communication error notification

message at every RX and Tx Error.

Otherwise(unchecked), XPanel does not display the message at data

receive error. Only When there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to

the station) error, the notification message is poped up. This message

box will be closed automatically about 5 seconds after.

Fixed XPANEL

Socket port


Communication Setting : FATEK PLC

1) In case , using CPU Loader Port• Run ‘WinProLadder’

• Select [PLC] -> [On Line] in manu.



• Select ‘RS232’ on Connection Name, and push [Auto Check] button to popup

Connection Auto Check window.

• Select using serial port on ‘Search Port’.• Select PLC Type on ‘Select PLC Series’.• Select PLC side port on ‘Select Port’.• Push [OK] button to do connection auto check.

CIMON-Xpanel424


• Connection finished. Select [PLC] -> [Setting] -> [Station Number] to popup ‘Station

Number’ window.

• After input PLC의 Station Number, puch [OK] button to finish.• Select Port parameter on [PLC] -> [Setting], to change port parameter.

2) IP Setting• Run ‘Fatek Ethernet Module Configuration Tool’



• To scan Fatek PLC, push ‘Scan Map’ button.• Double click item on scan result to edit Ethernet setting.

• [General] tab, IP and Subnet Mask, GateWay to set.• Remote Config. Enable must check.• Select Server on Operation Mode.

CIMON-Xpanel426


• [Misc. ] tab, Major Port set on FATEK Service Port Number.• After finished parameter setting, push [OK] button.

Address Notifiation

Name Symbol Digital Analog

16 Bit 32 Bit

Input discrete X X00~X9999 WX00-WX9984 DWX00-DWX9984

Output relay Y Y00~Y9999 WY00-WY9984 DWY00-DWY9984

Internal relay M M00~M9999 WM00-WM9984 DWM00-DWM9984

Step relay S S00~S9999 WS00-WS9984 DWS00-DWS9984

Timer discrete T T00~T9999 WT00-WT9984 DWT00-DWT9984

Counterdiscrete

C C00~C9999 WC00-WC9984 DWC00-DWC9984

Timer register TMR RT00-RT9999 DRT00-DRT9999

Counter register CTR RC00-RC9999 DRC00-DRC9999

Data register HR R00-R65535 DR00-DR65535

Data register DR D00-D65535 DD00-DD65535

(1) Word tag is supported by only 16 Bit.(2) Digital address is only used to Digital tag.(3) 32Bit address is used to 32 bit Analog tag only.



Wiring Diagram

This interface is used to communicate between the equipment and TOUCH/PPC by Ethernet code of

practice.

This interface is satisfied with standard IEEE802.3 about the 10BaseT/100BaseTX.

You can make cable and allocation pin number of RJ45 as the following figure.





2 Orange Orange 2

3 Green/W Green/W 3

4 Blue Blue 4

5 Blue/W Blue/W 5

6 Green Green 6

7 Brown/W Brown/W 7

8 Brown Brown 8




2 Orange Green 2


4 Blue Blue 4

5 Blue/W Blue/W 5

6 Green Orange 6

7 Brown/W Brown/W 7

8 Brown Brown 8

CIMON-Xpanel428


27.7 HITACHI Inverter SJ300/L300P

This driver supports the communication with Hitachi Inverter SJ300 and L300P models through RS485 port.

Communication Setup : HITACHI Inverter(SJ300/L300P)

For normal communication with Xpanel, following parameters of inverter have to be properly configured.

FunctionCode

Item Value Description

C070Data commandsource

02 Digital operator

03 RS485 connector

04 Expansion card #1

05 Expansion card #2

C071Baudrate

02 Loopback test

03 2400 bps

04 4800 bps

05 9600 bps

06 19200 bps

C072 Node address 1 to 32Node or station address(unique to each inverter or device)

C073 Data bits07 7 bits

08 8 bits

C074 Parity

00 None

01 Even parity

02 Odd parity

C075 Stop bits01 1 bit

02 2 bits

C078 Wait time0 to

10000 to 1000 ms time that the inverter waits to respond tonetwork master

Please refer to the manual of inverter for more information.




Create a newdevice For creating a new device activate the menu ‘Tools’ -> ’I/O Devices’ or icon in tool-bar.



of database accompanied by the ‘Station Name’.

Select a devicetype

Select a device type : ' HITACHI Inverter '


box will

be popped up as shown in following picture..

CIMON-Xpanel430


In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘HITACHI Inverter’ and configure the proper serial

communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with the inverter's

configuration.


In this dialog box, all the connected inverter stations can be configured and registered to the

Xpanel.




Station Name Give a name to the inverter.

This name will be used in the database window accompanied with the ‘

Device Name’.

Station Type Choose the type of connected inverter.

Two inverter models are supported by this communication drivers (SJ300

and L300P).


CIMON-Xpanel432


Station No. Specify a decimal number between 1 and 32. This number must be matched

with the number in the parameter of the inverter (Function code : C072).

16bits Data

Swap


32bits Data

Swap


Using

Checksum


This communication driver always checks the check-sum.

Comm. Error

Message pop

Up







Point Map

AddressNotation

[ Symbol ][ Offset ][ . ][ Bit number ]

· Symbol : A, B, C, F, H, P, X or Y

· Offset : 3 digits decimal number (001 ... ???)

· Bit number : 2 digits decimal number (00 ... 31) with proceeding dot (.)

All analog real tags must be declared as UINT32 data type for normal data processing

as shown in the following picture. And some points need the scale factor for simple and

easy data manipulation in Xpanel. The point map in the next section includes a

recommended

scale factor column for those points.



PointMap

Address Description Acc. Scale Cmd

A001-A393 Basic parameter setting R/W - 06(R)/07(W)

B001-B313 Fine tuning functions R/W - 06(R)/07(W)

C001-C123 Intelligent terminal functions R/W - 06(R)/07(W)

F002-F303 Main profile parameters R/W - 06(R)/07(W)

H003-H306 Motor constants R/W - 06(R)/07(W)

P001-P049 Expansion card functions R/W - 06(R)/07(W)

X001 Output frequency (x 100Hz) R 0.01 03

X002 Output current (x 10A) R 0.1 03

X003 Direction of rotation R - 03

X004 PID feedback monitor (x 100%) R 0.01 03

X005 Intelligent input monitor R - 03

X006 Intelligent output monitor R - 03

X007 Frequency converting monitor (x 100) R 0.01 03

X008 Output torque monitor (%) R - 03

X009 Output voltage monitor (x 10V) R 0.1 03

X010 Electric power monitor (x 10kW) R 0.1 03

X012 Run mode time monitor (Hours) R - 03

X013 Power ON time monitor (Hours) R - 03

X014 Trip : Inverter status A R - 04

X015 Inverter status B R - 04

CIMON-Xpanel434


X016 Inverter status C R - 04

X018 Total accumulated number of trip events R - -

X019 History : Trip factor R - -

X020 History : Inverter status A R - -

X021 History : Inverter status B R - -

X022 History : Inverter status C R - -

X023 History : Output frequency (x 100Hz) R 0.01 -

X024 History : Accumulated run mode time (Hours) R - -

X025 History : Output current (x 10A) R 0.1 -

X026 History : Output voltage (x 10V) R 0.1 -

X027 History : Power ON time (Hours) R - -

X028 EEPROM write availability verify R - 09

Y001 Mode control (0=STOP / 1=FORWARD / 2=REVERSE) W - 00

Y002 Output frequency (x 100Hz) W 0.01 01

Y003 Intelligent terminal function (High-Word) W - 02

Y004 Intelligent terminal function (Low-Word) W - -

Y005 Inverter Initialize (any value) W - 08

Y006 EEPROM write (any value) W - 0A

Y007 Recalculate internal motor constants (any value) W - 0B

Y008 Read trip history (0=Internal buffer / 1=Comm.) W - 05

Y009 Trip history number to read (1...6) W - -

Scale : Some points need a scaling process for simple and easy data manipulation in Xpanel.

Recommended scale factors are given in 'Scale' column of above table.

Cmd : The command codes used in the communication between Xpanel and inverter are listed in

the above table. Please refer to the manual of inverter for more information about the

command codes. The points without command codes are internal points of Xpanel.

Following sections describe these internal points.

Write OnlyPoints (Y) :

The points with symbol 'Y' are write only. When these points were monitored in the screen

of Xpanel, value of zero would be displayed. But, the points Y004 and Y009 are

exceptional. These two points are described in the following sections.

InverterStatusFlags

Each status data keeps a code as shown in the following data.

Code Status A (X014) Status B (X014) Status C (X016)

0 Initial status On stopping

1 On running Stop



(X014 /X015 /X016)

2 On stopping On tripping Deceleration speed

3 On running Constant speed

4 On free-run stop Acceleration speed

5 On jog Forward

6 On dynamic breaking Reverse

7 On retry Reverse from forward

8 On trip Forward from reverse

9 On under-voltage Forward start

10 Reverse start

TripHistory(Y008/Y009)

The inverter keeps total 6 trip history data on its memory. And the Xpanel driver provides a method to choose

on of those 6 trip history data for monitoring.

To monitor a trip history in Xpanel, first of all, Y009 has to be set a value between 1 and 6. This value denotes

the history data ID to be stored in X018 - X027. And then, when the Y008 point was written as zero or one,

one of history data block would be copied to the monitoring points (X018 - X027) as explained in the following

picture. When the Y008 point was written as zero (0), one of buffered trip history would be copied to the

monitoring points(X018 - X027). Otherwise (written as 1), the internal trip history data buffer would be updated

by the data from inverter.

Thus, following sequential commands or script program updates the trip history data which are stored in

X018 - X027 and monitored.

CIMON-Xpanel436


TAG_Y009 = 1; // Set the trip history ID (1...6) TAG_Y008 = 1; // Update the history data by communication

IntelligentTerminalFunction(Y003 /Y004)

The intelligent terminal functions are composed with 64 bit control flags as listed in the following table. These

control flags are accessed by Xpanel with two different touble word points, Y003 and Y004. Y003 holds high 32

bit flags of intelligent terminal function and Y004 holds low 32 bits.

Y004 (Low) Y003 (High)

Bit No. Description Bits No. Description

00 [FW] Forward command 00 [SF1] Multi-speed bit-level

01 [RV] Reverse command 01 [SF2] Multi-speed bit-level

02 [CF1] Multi-speed 1 02 [SF3] Multi-speed bit-level




06 [JG] Jog operation 06 [SF7] Multi-speed bit-level

07 [DB] Dynamic braking 07 [OLR] Overload restriction setting

08 [SET] Set 2nd motor 08 [TL] Torque limit

09 [2CH] 2-stage adjustable speed 09 [TRQ1] Torque limit select 1

10 10 [TRQ2] Torque limit select 2

11 [FRS] Free-run stop 11 [PPIP/PI] Inverter model select

12 [EXP] External trip 12 [BOK] Brake confirmation

13 [USP] Unattended start protection 13 [ORT] Orientation (home) command

14 [CS] Commercial power change 14 [LAC] Linear accel/decel cancel

15 [SFT] Software lock 15 [PCLR] Position error clear

16 [AT] Analog input voltage/current 16 [STAT] Pulse train input enable

17 [SET3] Set 3rd motor 17

18 [RS] Reset 18

19 19

20 [STA] 3-wire Start 20

21 [STP] 3-wire Hold 21

22 [F/R] 3-wire FWD/REV 22

23 [PID] PID enable 23

24-31 24-31

When data were written to Y004 points, Xpanel would store the value in its memory. That is, Xpanel does not

send the Y004 data to the inverter and waits until the point Y003 is written as some other value. The actual

data sending is fulfilled when Y003 point was written as some value. Following sequential commands or script



program sends "forward : bit 0 of Y004", "multi-speed 1 : bit 2 of Y004" and "multi-speed 2 : bit 3

of Y004" commands to the inverter at the same time.

TAG_Y004 = 0x000D; // Set the low command flags TAG_Y003 = 0; // Set the high command flags and send commands to inverter

Wiring Diagram

RS485

Xpanel COM1 RS422/485

27.8 KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-PLC HMI (RS232C/RS422A)

This driver supports the communication with CIMON-PLC through RS232C/422A HMI Protocol. Following

modules (options) support the HMI Protocol.

* CM1-SC01A/B * CM1-SC02A

* CM1-CP4C/D/U * CM1-BPnnM option : R, S, U, T


CIMON-Xpanel438


Create a newdevice For creating a new device activate the menu [ Tools - I/O Devices ] or icon in tool-bar.



of database


Select a devicetype

Select a device type : ' KDT Systems CIMON-PLC HMI '





In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘KDT Systems CIMON-PLC HMI’ and configure the

proper serial

communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with PLC configuration.



Each field

can be configured with following rules.

CIMON-Xpanel440



This name will be used in the database window accompanied with the

‘Device Name’.

Station Type Choose the type of connected PLC between “CP/XP Series” and “BP Series”.



16bits Data

Swap


32bits Data

Swap


Using

Checksum




Comm. Error

Message pop

Up







Communication Setup : PLC

CommunicationModule

If one of the following special function modules is used for Xpanel connection, the property of module should

be configured as following picture.

· CM1-SC01A or B

· CM1-SC02A

· BPnnMxxx-U or T

The protocol item must be set as ‘HMI Protocol’. And ensure that other communication parameters are

CIMON-Xpanel442


matched with Xpanel.

CPUEmbeddedPort

If the CPU embedded port is used for connection with Xpanel, the CPU parameter must be configured as

following picture.

This type of communication port is supported by following models :

· CM1-CP4C or D or U

· BPnnMxxx-R or S

Supported PLC Memories

Area Symbol Analog TAG Digital TAG Remark

External Input X X0000 X5110 X0000 X511F

External Output Y Y0000 Y5110 Y0000 Y511F

Internal Relay M M0000 - M9990 M0000 - M999F

Internal Relay L L0000 L9990 L0000 L999F

Latch Relay K K0000 K9990 K0000 K999F

Flags F F0000 F1270 F0000 F127F Read Only

Timer Output T Not supported T0000 T4095



Timer PV TC TC0000 TC4095 Not supported

Timer SV TS TS0000 TS4095 Not supported

Counter Output C Not supported C0000 C4095

Counter PV CC CC0000 CC4095 Not supported

Counter SV CS CS0000 CS4095 Not supported

Data Memory D D00000 D31999 Not supported

Wiring Diagram

[ RS232C ]

CM

1 -

SC

01

A,

SC

02

A

CM

2 -

BP

nn

Mx

x-T

CM

1 -

CP

4C

:

Op

tio

n

Por

t

CIMON-Xpanel444


CM

2 -

BP

16

Mx

x-R

[ RS422A ]

CM1-SC01A,

SC02A

CM1-CP4C :

Option

Port



CM2-BP16Mxx-S

CM2-BPnnMxx-U

27.9 KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-PLC Loader (RS232C/RS422A)

This driver supports the communication with CIMON-PLC through RS232C/422A loader protocol.

Following PLC CPU modules are connectable with this driver.

* CM1-XPnA/R * CM1CPnA/B/C/D/U

* CM2-BPnnM * CM1-SC01A/B * CM1-SC02A


Createanewdevice

For creating a new device activate the menu [ Tools - I/O Devices ] or icon in tool-bar.


CIMON-Xpanel446



database


Selectadevicetype

Select a device type : ' KDT Systems CIMON-PLC LOADER '


be




In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘KDT Systems CIMON-PLC Loader’ and configure the

proper

serial communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with PLC configuration.

[Note] The communication parameter of standard loader port is ‘38400-n-8-1’.

Createastation

Move to the ‘Station’ tab of ‘Serial Communication Configuration’ dialog box. In this dialog box, all

the

connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the Xpanel. Each field can be configured

with

following rules.

CIMON-Xpanel448



This name will be used in the database window accompanied with the ‘Device

Name’.

Station Type Choose the type of connected PLC among the “CP/XP/BP Series”.


Station No. Specify a decimal number between 0 and 31. This number is effective on CPU’s

optional

port or SCnnA/B module. The station number is ignored on the standard loader

port.

16bits Data

Swap


32bits Data This field has no effect.



Swap

Using

Checksum


Comm. Error

Message pop

Up




error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error,

the notification message is popped up. This message box will be closed


Communication Setup : CIMON PLC

StandardLoaderPortonCPU

All the CPU models support RS232C loader port by RJ11 connector. There is no need to configure this port.

The communication parameters are fixed as ‘38400-n-8-1’.

This configuration supports only peer to peer (1:1) communication. Because of that, CPU ignores the station

number part in the communication frame from Xpanel. That is, the CPU accepts all the station number from

Xpanel.

CPU'sOptionPort

If the CPU’s optional communication port is used for connection with Xpanel, the CPU parameter must be

configured as following picture.

CIMON-Xpanel450


Notice that the station number must be matched with that of Xpanel configuration. CP series CPU’s optional

port supports two protocols. But, there is no need to set the protocol type. This port automatically detects the

protocol type. Following CPU models support the loader protocol on the optional communication port.

· CM1-CP4C or D or U

Communication Module

If one of the following special function modules (options) is used for Xpanel connection, the property of module

should be configured as following picture.

· CM1-SC01A or B

· CM1-SC02A

· BPnnMxxx-U or T



The protocol item must be set as ‘CICON(Loader) Protocol’. And ensure that other communication parameters

are matched with Xpanel, especially for the station number.



External Input X X0000 X5110 X0000 X511F

External Output Y Y0000 Y5110 Y0000 Y511F

Internal Relay M M0000 - M9990 M0000 - M999F

Internal Relay L L0000 L9990 L0000 L999F

Latch Relay K K0000 K9990 K0000 K999F

Flags F F0000 F1270 F0000 F127F Read Only

Timer Output T Not supported T0000 T4095

Timer PV TC TC0000 TC4095 Not supported

Timer SV TS TS0000 TS4095 Not supported

Counter Output C Not supported C0000 C4095

Counter PV CC CC0000 CC4095 Not supported

CIMON-Xpanel452


Counter SV CS CS0000 CS4095 Not supported

Data Memory D D00000 D31999 Not supported

Wiring Diagram

[ RS232C ]

All

CP

U

mo

del

CM

1 -

SC

01

A,

SC

02

A

CM

2 -

BP

nn

Mx

x-T

[ RS422A ]



CM1-SC01B,

SC02A

CM1-CP4D

CM2-BPnnMxxx-

U

27.10 KDT Systems Xpanel Master

This driver provides the network solution between Xpanels. The XPanel in which this driver was loaded is a

master station,

and other Xpanels are slave stations. All slave Xpanels should have been configured as the ‘data server’.

CIMON-Xpanel454


(The Xpanel’s data server configuration is described in the manual of Xpanel.)

Communication Setup : Slave Xpanel

Above picture shows how to configure a slave Xpanel to the data server.

Each slave Xpanel can have up to 1000 data buffers (D000-D999) and 1000 string buffers (S000

S999).

All these buffers should be assigned to their appropriate TAGs as shown in above picture.

For more information, please refer to the ‘Network Data Server’ section of Xpanel manual.

Communication Setup : Master Xpanel



Create a newdevice For creating a new device activate the menu ‘Tools’- >’I/O Devices’ or icon in tool-bar.



of

database accompanied by the ‘Station Name’.

Select anetwork type

Select a network type : ' KDT Systems Xpanel '

After selecting the ‘OK’ button of previous step, ‘Ethernet Communication Configuration’ dialog

box will be popped

up as shown in following picture. In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘KDT Systems

Xpanel’ and configure

the proper Ethernet communication parameters.

Point

XPanel network data server supports only UDP/IP protocol suit .

Do not select the ‘TCP’ protocol of configuration dialog box.

CIMON-Xpanel456


Create a station Move to the ‘Station’ tab of ‘Ethernet Communication Configuration’ dialog box.





Station Name Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window

accompanied with the ‘Device Name’.

Station Type Choose the ‘XPANEL’. (No other type can be selected.)


IP Address Give the IP address of the server (slave) Xpanel with dotted decimal format.

Socket Port

Nimber

Give the port number of data server serviced by the Xpanel. This value must

be 10262.

16Bit Data

Swap


32Bit Data

Swap


Comm. Error

Message Pop

Up



Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data

receive error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the

station) error, the notification message is popped up. This message box will


Fixed XPANEL Do not use this option (leave as unchecked). The server (slave) XPanel can

CIMON-Xpanel458


Socket Port /

XPANEL Socket

Port No.

service multiple masters and dynamic socket port.

Address Notation

The address of TAG in master Xpanel has the following format.

Type Format Example

Number [D][Address in decimal number] D0012

String [S][Address in decimal number] S0100


Memory Area Symbol I/O Address Range Applicable TAG

Real Data D D000 D999 Digital / Analog

String Data S S000 S999 String




27.11 Keyence KV Mode

This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between Xpanel and Keyence KVseries PLCs. It supports the following families of Keyence PLCs.

· KV-10, KV-16, KV-24, KV-40

· KV-300 with KV-L2 in KV mode


Createanewdevice

For creating a new device activate the menu ‘Tools’->’I/O Devices’ or icon in tool-bar.



database accompanied by the ‘Station Name’.

Select

Select a network type : ' KEYENCE PLC(KV mode) '

CIMON-Xpanel460


anetworktype


be


In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘KEYENCE PLC (KV mode)’ and configure the proper

serial

communication parameters. The parity is fixed as 'Even' in case of KV-10, KV-16, KV-40 PLC

module.

Createastation








Name’.

Station Type Choose the ‘KEYENCE KV’. (No other type can be selected.)


Station No Specify a decimal number between 0 and 9.

16Bits Data

Swap


32Bits Data

Swap


Using

Checksum


Comm. Error If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification

CIMON-Xpanel462


Message pop

Up

message

at every Rx and Tx error.


error.


notification

message is popped up. This message box will be closed automatically about 5

seconds

after.

Address Notation



Analog [Symbol][Address] DM0012

Digital [Symbol][Address] R0215

· Address : decimal number


Symbol Description AddressRange

Type Access

CC Counter : Current Value 0-249 Analog R/W

CP Counter : Preset Value 0-249 Analog R/W

C Counter Contact 0-249 Digital R/W

CTHC High Speed Counter : Current Value 0 - 1 Analog R/W

CTHP High Speed Counter : Preset Value 0 - 1 Analog R

CTH High Speed Counter : Contact 0 - 1 Digital R

CTCC High Speed Counter Comparator : Current Value 0 - 3 Analog R

CTCP High Speed Counter Comparator : Preset Value 0 - 3 Analog R/W

CTC High Speed Counter Comparator : Contact 0 - 3 Digital R/W

TC Timer : Current Value 0-249 Analog R/W

TP Timer : Preset Value 0-249 Analog R/W

T Timer : Contact 0-249 Digital R/W

TM Temporary Data Memory 0 31 Analog R/W

DM Data Memory 0 - 1999 Analog R/W



R Relay (I/O, Internal AUX, Special AUX) 0-17915 Digital R/W

AT Digital Trimmer 0 - 1 Analog R

Keyence KV mode protocol does not support block data read and write functions.

Because of that, double word (INT32, UINT32, BCD32, UBCD32, FLOAT) data types are not supported.

Ensure that especially for using following functions of Xpanel.

· Recipe

· XY / SPC / Scope Trend.


KV-

10,

KV

-

16,

KV-

24,

KV

- 4 0

KV-

L2

mo

dul

e

of

KV-

30

0

CIMON-Xpanel464


27.12 KOYO DirectNet

This Manual explains about the method of CIMON-Xpanel communication with KOYO DL06 PLC using RS232Cor RS422/485.


You can configure I/O device according to various kind of field equipment's by using Xpanel Designer.



Create a newdevice

To configure the communication device of DL06 PLC, Select 'Tools' -> 'I/O device' in the menu

or icon

in tool-bar , and then “I/O device configuration” dialog box will be shown up. And then

click

'new device' button. “I/O device selection” dialog box is shown up, select a device name and a

device

type as the following figure.



I/O Device Name : In the case there are various kinds of field equipments, Type device name

to identify what

equipments it is. The string “DEV” of this item will be shown up in the

selection list of

I/O device when you register a tag. Xpanel can communicate with various

kinds of equipment

simultaneously connected by identifying equipment by its name. The value

which is saved as

a tag is the compound string of a device name and station name as following

“DEV.ST”

(“DEV” is a device name, and “ST” is a station name). And it is used as a

unique identifier in

Xpanel project.


Select a network type : ' KOYO DirecNet '

You can select communication device which is connected to Xpanel.

CIMON-Xpanel466


Comm.Port COM1

Select communication port to communicate. If you use RS-485, you must

select “COM1”. When RS-232 communication type of COM1 port is used,

9P DSUB connector is used. And When RS-422/485 communication type

of COM1 port is used, 5P plug connector is used. If you use COM1 port,

you cannot use RS-232 and RS-422/485 together, but you can use only

one type.

Baud rate 9,600

Select the communication speed to equipment. The configuration of the

communication speed of Xpanel must be the same as the configuration of

equipment. If speed of the configurations of two sides are not same, they



will not be communicated each other.

Parity Odd

Data bits 8 bits

Stop bits 1 bits

RTS/CTS OFF

RTS/CTS control is used for HALF-DUPLEX communication. When you

ordinary modem of two-wire circuit, you can control the modem by this

implement. Because of RS-485 communication port of the Xpanel

supports Auto Toggle function so Xpanel doesn’t use this function. This

example doesn’t use RTS-CTS control.

Comm.Type RS232

When you use RS-422 communication select RS-422 or you use RS-485

communication then select RS-485. When RS-232 communication is

used, 9P DSUB connector is used. And When RS-422/485 communication

is used, 5P plug connector is used.

Retry No. 3 (If communication failed with the kind of field equipment, it will retry as

the number of this.)

Time Out 30 (If you input as the number of 30 then it’s time out count will be 30

seconds. )

Using Dial Up

Modem

Not Select (This item can be chosen only when you use Dial Up modem.)




CIMON-Xpanel468


Station Name When field equipments number exceed over than 2, station name is used

for division of field equipment at the internal Xpanel.

Internal Xpanel it expresses as “Device.Station” and this example shows

you as “DEV.ST” .

Station Type DirectNet(ASCII)

Either “DirecNet(HEX)” or “DirectNet(ASCII)” is to be selected by accorded

with PLC configurations.


Station No. When field equipments number exceed over than 2, it assigned different

Station No. to divide. Station number must be same configured in field

equipments. It will not be communicated if the Station No. different each

other.

16Bit Data

Swap


32Bit Data

Swap


Device range



When you edit the tag or communication block, you can edit address as following figure.

Memory Type Discrete Memory Reference(octal) Word memory Reference(octal)

Input Point X0 - X777 V40400 - v40437

Output Point Y0 - Y777 V40500 - V40537

Control Relays C0 - C1777 V40600 - V40677

Special Relays SP0 - SP777 V41200 - V41237

Timer Current Values

(Analog)

TA0 - TA377 V0 - V377

Timer Status Bits T0 - T377 V41100 - V41117

Counter Current Values

(Analog)

CTA0 - CTA177 V1000 - V1177

Counter Status Bits CT0 - CT177 V41140 - V41147

Stage S0 - S1777 V41000 - V41017

Remote I/O GX0 - GX3777

GY0 - GY3777

V40000 - V40177

V40200 - V40377

Above the address table is a basis of the company of Koyo’s DL06.

If the Equipment used DirectNET Excepted of the Koyo’s DL06, DL405, DL205 then you reference this

manual and so you can use Word memory Reference only.

Case of Digital Tag

· In the case of Word memory Reference [Ex.] At the 15 bit of the No.40000 -> V40000.15

[Ex.] 0 bit of the No.40000 -> V40000.15

· In the case of Discrete Memory Reference [EX.] At the 15 bit of the No.40000 -> GX017

(reference 129-12)

27.13 LSIS GLOFA Cnet

This Manual explains about the method of CIMON-Xpanel communication with LSIS GLOFA PLC using RS232C orRS422/485.




CIMON-Xpanel470



Create a newdevice

To configure the communication device of LSIS PLC, Select 'Tools' -> 'I/O device' in the menu

or icon in

tool-bar , and then “I/O device configuration” dialog box will be shown up. And then click [new

device] button.


following figure.


to identify what equipments it is. The string “DEV” of this item will be shown up in the

selection list of I/O device when you register a tag. Xpanel can communicate with various

kinds of equipment simultaneously connected by identifying equipment by its name. The

value which is saved as a tag is the compound string of a device name and station name as

following “DEV.ST” (“DEV” is a device name, and “ST” is a station name). And it is used as

a unique identifier in Xpanel project.



Select a devicetype

Select a device type : ' LSIS GLOFA PLC '


Comm.Port COM1

Select communication port to communicate. If you use RS-422/485, you

must select “COM1”. When RS-232 communication type of COM1 port is


type of COM1 port is used, 5P plug connector is used. If you use COM1

port, you cannot use RS-232 and RS-422/485 together, but you can use

only one type.

CIMON-Xpanel472


Baud rate 9,600





Parity None

Data bits 8 bits

Stop bits 1 bits

RTS/CTS OFF



implement. Because of RS-485 communication port of the Xpanel supports

Auto Toggle function so Xpanel doesn’t use this function. This example

doesn’t use RTS-CTS control.

Retry No. 3

If communication failed with the kind of field equipments, it will retry as

the number of this.

Time Out 30 (If you input as the number of 30 then it’s time out count will be 30

seconds. )

Using Dial Up

Modem

Not Select (This item can be chosen only when you use Dial Up modem.)






Station Name ST

When field equipments number exceed over than 2, station name is used




Station Type DirectNet


Station No. 0

When field equipments number exceed over than 2, it assigned different



other.

16Bit Data

Swap


32Bit Data

Swap


Parameter Setup : Cnet Frame Editor

CIMON-Xpanel474


Run Cnet FrameEditor

Please run ‘Cnet Frame Editor’ from GLOFA Loader and activate I/O configurations.

Channel RS232 side

To Communicate by RS/232, select the Button ‘RS232 side’.

Station 00

Configure Station number to 00. When field equipments number exceed

over than 1, it assigned different Station No. to divide. It will not be

communicated if the Station No. different each other. The way of wiring

will be following.

Baud Rate 9600

Data Bit 8 bits

Parity NONE

Cnet FrameEditor

If all configurations were ended, select [Online] [Write] in the menu.



Select the proper slot which was located Cnet module and click [Write].

Wiring Diagram

You can wire communication cable as the following figures.

RS-232C : NULL MODEM

Xpanel connects three lines to PLC. PLC connects lines such as above figure. If you don’t

connect lines to PLC as the showing figure, it can’t transmit data to other field equipments

but can receive data so that not to be accomplished communication.

RS-422

CIMON-Xpanel476


On wiring as the above figure terminal resistance must be 330Ω.

To improve stability of communication it should connect SG and use STP cable.

But shielded cables must be earthed.

RS-485

On wiring as above the figure terminal resistance must be 120Ω.

When Xpanel is using RS-485, it connect with SDA and SDB but disconnect with RDA and

RDB.



Device Memory range

You can use device memories as following range.

Direct Variable Data type Remark

%QX0.0.0 - %QX63.7.63 BIT Output image area

%IX0.0.0 - %QX63.7.63 BIT Input image area

%MX0 - %MX524287 BIT Direct variable area

%MW0.0 - %MW32767.15 BIT Direct variable area

%MD0.0 - %MD16383.31 BIT Direct variable area

%QW0.0.0 - %QW63.7.3 WORD Output image area



%IW0.0.0 - %QW63.7.3 WORD Input image area

%MW0 - %MX32767 WORD Direct variable area

%QD0.0.0 - %QD63.7.1 DWORD Output image area

%ID0.0.0 - %QD63.7.1 DWORD Input image area

%MD0 - %MD16383 DWORD Direct variable area

Error Code

When Xpanel communicates with PLC it can receive NAK including error code.

Reference Error code contents as following table.

ErrorCode

Error type Error factors and contents

0001 PLC system Error Interface failed with PLC

0011 Data Error In case of data length was wrong

In case of it doesn’t start with ‘%’

In case of variable value was wrong

If the case of Bit value write, you must write 00 or 01 but

you write other value

1132 Device memory Error In case of unusable characters were inputted

1232 Data magnitude Error In case of Read/Write requesting was over 60 Words

1332 Data type inconformity When it does doing each case of Read/Write, if the data type

of each block was dislike then it will be happen.

1432 Data value Error Unable to transform Data value to Hex

7132 permitted range of variable

over Error

Over requesting through each device supports memory

range.

27.14 LSIS GLOFA Enet

This Manual explains about the method of CIMON-Xpanel communication with LSIS GLOFA PLC using Ethernet.


CIMON-Xpanel478


Create a newdevice

To configure the communication device of LGIS PLC, Select 'Tools' -> 'I/O device' in the menu or

icon in tool-bar, and then “I/O device configuration” dialog box will be shown up. And then click

[new device] button. “I/O device selection” dialog box is shown up, select a device name and a

device type as the following figure.

I/O Device Name : In the case there are various kinds of field equipments, Type device name to

identify what equipments it is. The string “DEV” of this item will be shown up in the selection

list of I/O device when you register a tag. Xpanel can communicate with various kinds of

equipment simultaneously connected by identifying equipment by its name. The value which is

saved as a tag is the compound string of a device name and station name as following “DEV.

ST” (“DEV” is a device name, and “ST” is a station name). And it is used as a unique identifier

in Xpanel project.

Select a devicetype

Select a device type: LSIS GLOFA PLC




Protocol UDP

You can choose one of the protocols - UPD, TCP when you use Ethernet.

Because the size of data which is used in normal industry is small, UDP is

generally used. TCP is efficient for transferring big sized data.

Retry No. 3

If communication failed with the kind of field equipments, it will retry as the

number of this.

Create a station Move to [Station] tab at the “Serial Communication Configuration” Dialog Box and click [Add Station]

button then you can see “Station” Dialog Box popped up. Please configuration as the following

contents then click “OK” button.

CIMON-Xpanel480


Station Name When field equipments number exceed over than 2, station name is used for

division of field equipment at the internal Xpanel. Internal Xpanel it expresses

as “Device.Station” and this example shows you as “DEV.ST” .

Station Type GLOFA


IP Address 172.16.106.254

Exactly input the field equipment’s IP address which is identified. If IP

address is not correct, it will not be communicated.

Socket Port No. 2005

The exclusive use of GLOFA Enet supporting socket number is TCP 2004,

UDP 2005.

16Bit Data

Swap


32Bit Data

Swap




Parameter Setup : Enet Frame Editor

Run Enet FrameEditor

Please run ‘Enet Frame Editor’ from GLOFA Loader and activate I/O configurations.

PLC Type GM1 / 2 / 3 (Select proper PLC which is using the same PLC.)

IP Address 172.16.106.254

Please input the correct IP address which is corresponded with

already configured by Xpanel Designer.

Subnet Mask 255.255.0.0

Please input the correct Subnet Mask which is corresponded with

already configured by Xpanel Designer.

GateWay 172.16.100.1

If field equipment is connected out of the Local network, you must

input IP address of GateWay.

Enet Frame If all configurations were ended, select 'Online Write' in the menu.

CIMON-Xpanel482


Editor: Write

Select the proper slot which was located Enet module and click [Write].

Wiring Diagram

This interface is used to communicate between the equipment and TOUCH/PPC by Ethernet code of

practice.







2 Orange Orange 2

3 Green/W Green/W 3

4 Blue Blue 4

5 Blue/W Blue/W 5



6 Green Green 6

7 Brown/W Brown/W 7

8 Brown Brown 8




2 Orange Green 2


4 Blue Blue 4

5 Blue/W Blue/W 5

6 Green Orange 6

7 Brown/W Brown/W 7

8 Brown Brown 8

Device Memory ramge














Error Code


CIMON-Xpanel484


ErrorCode

Error type Error factors and contents

0001 PLC system Error Interface failed with PLC

0011 Data Error In case of data length was wrong

In case of it doesn’t start with ‘%’

In case of variable value was wrong

If the case of Bit value write, you must write 00 or 01 but you

write other value

1132 Device memory Error In case of unusable characters were inputted

1232 Data magnitude Error In case of Read/Write requesting was over 60 Words

1332 Data type inconformity When it does doing each case of Read/Write, if the data type of

each block was dislike then it will be happen.


7132 permitted range of

variable over Error

Over requesting through each device supports memory range.

You can reference Error code contents as following table.

27.15 LSIS GLOFA Loader

This Manual explains about the method of CIMON-Xpanel communication with LSIS GLOFA PLC using LoaderPort.


Create a newdevice

To configure the communication device of LGIS PLC, Select 'Tools' -' I/O device' in the menu or

icon in tool-bar, and then “I/O device configuration” dialog box will be shown up. And then

click [new device] button. “I/O device selection” dialog box is shown up, select a device name and

a device type as the following figure.




to identify what equipments it is. The string “DEV” of this item will be shown up in the




following “DEV.ST” (“DEV” is a device name, and “ST” is a station name). And it is used as

a unique identifier in Xpanel project.

Select a devicetype

Select a device type : LSIS GLOFA PLC Loader


CIMON-Xpanel486


Comm.Port COM1


must select “COM1”. When RS-232 communication type of COM1 port is


type of COM1 port is used, 5P plug connector is used. If you use COM1

port, you cannot use RS-232 and RS-422/485 together, but you can use

only one type.

Baud rate 38,400







Parity None

Data bits 8 bits

Stop bits 1 bits

RTS/CTS OFF

Retry No. 3


the number of this.

Time Out 3 0

If you input as the number of 30 then it’s time out count will be 30

seconds.

Using Dial Up

Modem

Not Select

This item can be chosen only when you use Dial Up modem.





CIMON-Xpanel488





Station Type GLOFA


Station No. 0

16Bit Data

Swap


32Bit Data

Swap


Wiring Diagram


Xpanel connects three lines to PLC. PLC connects lines such as above figure. You must connect using three

lines.

If you connect other lines it can make problems.

Device Memory range
















27.16 LSIS XGT Cnet

This Manual explains about the method of CIMON-Xpanel communication with LSIS GLOFA PLC using RS232C orRS422/485.


Create a newdevice

To configure the communication device of LSIS PLC, Select 'Tools' - 'I/O device' in the menu or

icon in tool-bar, and then “I/O device configuration” dialog box will be shown up. And then

click [new device] button. “I/O device selection” dialog box is shown up, select a device name and

a device type as the following figure.

CIMON-Xpanel490



to identify what equipments it is. The string “XGTCNET” of this item will be shown up in the




following “XGTCNET.ST” (“XGTCNET” is a device name, and “ST” is a station name). And it

is used as a unique identifier in Xpanel project.

Select a devicetype

Select a device type : ' LSIS XGT/XGB Series PLC Cnet '




Comm.Port COM1

Select communication port to communicate. This example shows you

selecting COM1 port. If you want use other port select one in this combo

box.

Baud rate 38,400

Parity None

Data bits 8 bits

Stop bits 1 bits

CIMON-Xpanel492


RTS/CTS OFF ( This example doesn’t use RTS-CTS control.)

Comm. Type RS232

(To Communicate by RS/232, configure Type to RS-232.


communication then select RS-485.)

Retry No. 3


the number of this.

Time Out 30

(If you input as the number of 30 then it’s time out count will be 30

seconds..)

Using Dial Up

Modem

Not Select








you as “XGTCNET.ST”.

Station Type XGT Series




Station No. When field equipments number exceed over than 2, it assigned different



other.

16Bit Data

Swap


32Bit Data

Swap


Parameter Setup : Network Manager

Run NetworkManager

Please run ‘Network Manager’ from XGT Loader program and activate I/O configurations.

CIMON-Xpanel494


Comm.Type RS232C

To Communicate by RS/232, configure Type to RS-232 at Channel 1.

When you use RS-422 communication select RS-422 or you use RS-

485 communication then select RS-485.

Speed 38,400

Data Bit 8

Stop Bit 1

Parity NONE

Modem type Null Modem

Modem

Initialization




Station No. 0

Station No. needed to distinguish when it communicate several PLC.

When field equipments number exceed over than 2, it assigned

different Station No. to divide. Station number must be same

configured in field equipments. It will not be communicated if the

Station No. different each other.

Delay time 0

Time out 1

Wiring Diagram


RS-232C

RS-422



CIMON-Xpanel496



RS-485


When Xpanel is using RS-485, it connects with SDA and SDB but disconnect with

RDA and RDB.



Device Memory range

Usable device memory range


Type Range Size (Word) Remark

P P0 P2047 2048 Read/Write/Monitor

M M0 M2047 2048 Read/Write/Monitor

L L0 L11263 11264 Read/Write/Monitor

K K0 K2047 2048 Read/Write/Monitor

F F0 F2047 2048 Read/Monitor

T T0 T2047 2048 Read/Write/Monitor

C C0 C2047 2048 Read/Write/Monitor

D D0 D32767 32768 Read/Write/Monitor (XGK-CPUH)

D0 D19999 20000 Read/Write/Monitor (XGK-CPUS)

S S0 S127 128 Read/Write/Monitor

Error Code





Error Code Error type Error factors and contents

0003 Over block number It is block number bigger than 16 in the case of individual

Read/Write requesting.

0004 Variable length error Variable length is over than its max size 16.

0007 Data type error Receiving data is not included in X,B,W,D,L

0011 Data error The memory address that including the length of data is

incorrect

In the case of starting without %

In the case of variable value is incorrect.

When you write a Bit Value, you must use only 0 or 1.

0090 Monitor In the case of executing unregistered Monitor

0190 Monitor execution error In the case of the number exceeds register number limit

0290 Monitor registration error In the case of the number exceeds register number limit

1132 Device memory error In the case of not entering using device name or character

1232 Data size error In case of Read/Write requesting was over 60 Words

1234 Sufficient frame error Unnecessary contents exist

1332 Data type inconformity When it does doing each case of Read/Write, if the data type

of each block was dislike then it will be happen.


7132 permitted range of variable

over Error

Over requesting through each device supports memory

range.

27.17 LSIS XGT Enet

This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between Xpanel and LSIS XGT

series PLCs via Ethernet protocol.

Following communication module can be connected with this driver.

· XGL-EFMT ( Fast Ethernet)


CIMON-Xpanel498


Createanewdevice

For creating a new device activate the menu 'Tools' -> 'I/O Devices' or icon in tool-bar.



database

accompanied by the 'Station Name'.

Selectanetworktype

Select a network type: ' LSIS XGT Series FEnet '

After selecting the 'OK' button of previous step, 'Ethernet Communication Configuration' dialog box will




In this window, select the 'Device Type' as 'LSIS XGT Series FEnet' and appropriate communication

parameters.

Createastation

Move to the 'Station' tab of 'Ethernet Communication Configuration' dialog box. In this dialog box, all

the connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the Xpanel. Each field can be

configured with following rules.

CIMON-Xpanel500



accompanied with the 'Device Name'.

Station Type Choose the ‘XGL-EFMT’. (No other type can be selected.)

Network ID This field has no meaning in this driver. (ignored in runtime)

IP Address Give the IP address of PLC with dotted a decimal format

Socket Port No. The socket number should be configured as 2005 for UDP and 2004 for TCP.

Please verify your configuration (UDP or TCP) in "Communication Port" setup

tab.

n UDP/IP Port : 2005

n TCP/IP Port : 2004

16Bit Data

Swap


32Bit Data

Swap


Fixed XPANEL

Socket Port /

XPANEL Socket

If this option was checked, Xpanel will use only one port defined in 'XPANEL

Socket Port No.' field for connection with PLC. Otherwise, Xpanel will change

the port at every TCP connection or communication error.



Port No. This option is provided for Xpanel to deal with various TCP port management

ways of PLC. Some PLC has a limit on the number of TCP services. In that

case, this option can be a help.

The actual effect of this option on PLC cannot be described here. Because,

there are too many kinds of PLC and the response in PLC is entirely dependant

on the specification of PLC and engineer's experience.

The default setting of this option is unchecked state.

Comm. Error

Message Pop

Up







Communication Setup : XG5000

Following picture shows the screen shot of 'Network Manager' of XG5000 programming tool.

This window can be activated by the menu of 'Tool-Network Manager'.

CIMON-Xpanel502


IP Address Give the IP address of PLC with dotted decimal format. This address has to beregistered in the device configuration of XPanelDesigner as described before.

Subnet mask,Gateway

Give the appropriate values which are provided by network administrator of your

system.

DHCP Do not use this option. The XPanel supports fixed IP address device only.

Driver Choose the “XGT server”.

Address Notation

The address of TAG in XPanel has the following format.


Analog [Symbol][Address] D064



Digital [Symbol][Address].[Bit Number] or [Symbol][Address][BitNumber]

M012.A or M012A

· Address : decimal number (0..65535)

· Bit Number : hexa-decimal number (0..F)

Following table shows the list of devices which can be referenced in XPanel database.

Symbol Description Range(Word)

WordNotation

BitNotation

Type Access

P I/O Relay 2048 P123 P123A Bit/Word R/W

M Auxiliary Relay 2048 M123 M123A Bit/Word R/W

L Link Relay 11264 L123 L123A Bit/Word R/W

K Keep Relay 8192 K123 K123A Bit/Word R/W

F Special Relay 2048 F123 F123A Bit/Word R

T Timer (CV) 2048 T123 - Word R/W

C Counter (CV) 2048 C123 - Word R/W

D Data Reg 32768 D123 D123.A(1) Bit/Word R/W

N Comm. DataReg

28763 N123 N123.A(1) Bit/Word R/W

(1) When a ‘D’ or ‘N’ register was referenced by a digital TAG with bit notation, it cannot be

written. (Read only)

Support Function Table

Following table shows the list of functions that are supported by ‘LSIS XGT Series Ethernet’

communication driver.

Function Support Remark

Block Data Read O

Block Data Write O

String real Tag O

Word Swap X

Dword Swap X

CIMON-Xpanel504


Block DataRead

This function makes it possible that is bulk data reading at a time. It will be applied when you use recipe, data bridge and trends at theXpanel.

Block DataWrite

This function makes it possible that is bulk data writing at a time. It will be applied when you use recipe, data bridge and trends at theXpanel.

String real Tag It makes the device as the serialized memory so you can communicatestring data ofXpanel with PLC.

Word Swap This function swaps bytes of all word or double word sized data. Itdepends upon 16BitData Swap configuration.

Dword Swap This function swaps words of all double word sized data. It depends upon32Bit Data Swapconfiguration.

27.18 LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Loader

This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between XPanel and LSIS Master-

K S Series Loader.


Createanewdevice

For creating a new device activate the menu ‘Tools’- >’I/O Devices’ or icon in tool-bar.




I/O Device Name

Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of database accompanied by the

‘Station Name’.

Selectadevicetype

Select a device type : LSIS Master-K H-Series PLC Loader

After selecting the ‘OK’ button of previous step, ‘Serial Communication Configuration’ dialog box will be


CIMON-Xpanel506


In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘LSIS Master-K S-Series PLC Loader’ and appropriate

communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with the device’s configuration.

Createastation

Move to the ‘Station’ tab of ‘Serial Communication Configuration’ dialog box. In this dialog box, all the

connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the XPanel. Each field can be configured with

following rules.



Station NameGive a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window accompanied

with the ‘Device Name’.

Station Type Choose the ‘S Series’. (Another type can’t be selected.)

Network ID This field has no meaning in this driver. (Ignored in runtime)

Station No. This number must be matched with the one of PLC.


CIMON-Xpanel508



CheckSum This field has no meaning in this driver.

Comm. Error

Message Pop Up

If this item is checked, XPanel displays a communication error notification message at


Otherwise(unchecked), XPanel does not display the message at data receive error.




Address Notation

Symbol Range Size Access

P P0 - P63F 64 R/W

M M0 - M203F 192 R/W

L L0 - L63F 64 R/W

K K0 - K31F 32 R/W

F F0 - F63F 64 R

T T0 - T256 256 R/W

C C0 -C256 256 R/W

D D0 -D9999 10000 R/W

S S0 - S99 100 R/W

Refer the upper table for available device range.

If you use ‘P,M,L,K,F’ device by digital tag, the lowest position number is hexadecimal and else

number decimal.

If you use ‘P,M,L,K,F’ device by analog tag, all number is decimal.




RS-232C wiring

27.19 LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Cnet


K H Series through RS232 or RS422/485.


Createanewdevice



CIMON-Xpanel510


I/O Device Name

Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of database accompanied by

the ‘Station Name’.

Selectadevicetype

Select a device type : LSIS Master-K S-Series PLC Cnet





In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘LSIS Master-K S-Series PLC Cnet’ and appropriate


Createastation



following rules.

CIMON-Xpanel512


Station NameGive a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window


Station Type Choose the ‘S Series’. (Another type can’t be selected.)








Comm. Error

Message Pop Up







Communication Setup : Frame Editor

Configure communication card setting by LSIS Cnet Frame Editor.

Option -> Port : Select proper PC’s port to connect loader.

CIMON-Xpanel514


Online -> Connect

Online -> Read : Read configurations from communication card.

Onlie -> Write : Change the configurations for communication and download changed configurations.

Refer the manual for more details.

Address Notation


P P0 - P63F 64 R/W

M M0 - M203F 192 R/W

L L0 - L63F 64 R/W

K K0 - K31F 32 R/W

F F0 - F63F 64 R

T T0 - T256 256 R/W

C C0 -C256 256 R/W

D D0 -D9999 10000 R/W

S S0 - S99 100 R/W


If you use ‘P,M,L,K,F’ device by digital tag, the lowest position number is hexadecimal and

else number decimal.



RS-232C wiring



RS-422 wiring

Use terminal resistance by 330Ω.

For stable communication, connect SG and use STP cable and surely earth the

shield.

RS-485 wiring


If you use RS-485, don’t connect RDA & RDB but SDA & SDB at Xpanel.


shield.

27.20 LSIS Master-K H Series PLC Cnet


K H Series through RS232 or RS422/485.


CIMON-Xpanel516


Createanewdevice



I/O Device Name



Selectadevicetype

Select a device type : LSIS Master-K H-Series PLC Cnet





In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘LSIS Master-K H-Series PLC Cnet’ and appropriate


Createastation



following rules.

CIMON-Xpanel518


Station NameGive a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window


Station Type Choose the ‘Master-K 500/1000’’. (Another type can’t be selected.)








Comm. Error

Message Pop Up

If this item is checked, XPanel displays a communication error notification message






Master-K 500/1000 DIP SWITCH Configuration

*If communication type is RS-485, configure baud rate by loader.

Address Notation


P P0 - P63F 64 R/W

CIMON-Xpanel520


M M0 - M203F 192 R/W

L L0 - L63F 64 R/W

K K0 - K31F 32 R/W

F F0 - F63F 64 R

T T0 - T256 256 R/W

C C0 -C256 256 R/W

D D0 -D9999 10000 R/W

S S0 - S99 100 R/W


If you use ‘P,M,L,K,F’ device by digital tag, the lowest position number is hexadecimal and

else number decimal.



RS-232C wiring



RS-422 wiring



shield.

RS-485 wiring


If you use RS-485, don’t connect RDA & RDB but SDA & SDB at Xpanel.


shield.

27.21 LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Enet

This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between XPanel and CIMON-

PLC.

Following module is able to communicate with this driver.


Createanewdevice



CIMON-Xpanel522


I/O Device Name

Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of database accompanied by the

‘Station Name’.

Selectadevicetype

Select a device type : LSIS Master-K S-Series PLC Ethernet





In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘LSIS Master-K S-Series PLC Enet’ and appropriate

communication parameters. Those parameters must be matched with the PLC. Protocol type must be selected by

‘UDP’.

Createastation

Move to the ‘Station’ tab of ‘Ehternetl Communication Configuration’ dialog box. In this dialog box, all the


following rules.

CIMON-Xpanel524


Station NameGive a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window accompanied


Station Type Choose the ‘Master-K S ’. (You can’t select any other type.)


IP Address Input PLC’s IP by decimal number and point for connection.

Socket Port No. If you want to use UDP, port number is 2005 else TCP, port number is 2004.

Go to “Communication Port” and confirm the protocol. (UDP or TCP)



Fixed XPANEL

Socket Port

If you select this option, XPanel use only one port to connect PLC defined by ‘Xpanel

Socket Port No.’ If it is not, Xpanel will change the port no. when it occurs

communication error.

This option makes XPanel to handle various port management methods. Several PLC has

restriction about TCP service number. In that case, this option will help.



We can’t mention all about this option this time. Because, too many PLC beings this

world and response of PLC totally depended from PLC manual and engineer’s

experience.

This option is unchecked by default.

Comm. Error

Message Pop Up



Otherwise(unchecked), XPanel does not display the message at data receive error. Only

when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error, the notification

message is popped up. This message box will be closed automatically about 5 seconds

after.

Communication Setup : Frame Editor

Following picture shows frame editor for configure of Master K Ethernet module.

CIMON-Xpanel526


Edit -> Basic Parameters



IP AddressInput PLC’s IP address by decimal number and point. It is must be same previous

set at XPanelDesigner’s I/O device configuration.

Subnet Mask, Gateway

Input the proper value offered from system network manager.

Input same value with Xpanel.

DNS Server Input the proper value offered from system network manager.

Address Notation

Following table shows address notation at XPanel.

TYPE FORM Example

Analog [Symbol][Address] D064

Digital[Symbol][Address].[Bit Number] or [Symbol][Address][Bit Number]

M012.A or M012A

· Address : Decimal (0..65535)

CIMON-Xpanel528


· Bit Number : Hex (0..F)

Following table shows referable device list by XPanel.

Symbol Description Range

(word)

Word

Notation

Bit

Notation

Type Read Write

P I/O Relay 1024 P23 P23A Bit/Word R/W

M Auxiliary Relay 3072 M23 M23A Bit/Word R/W

L Link Relay 1024 L23 L23A Bit/Word R/W

K Keep Relay 512 K23 K23A Bit/Word R/W

F Special Relay 1024 F23 F23A Bit/Word R

T Timer (CV) 256 T123 - Word R/W

C Counter (CV) 256 C123 - Word R/W

D Data Reg 10000 D123 D123.A(1) Bit/Word R/W

S Special Reg. 100 S123 S123.A(1) Bit/Word R/W

(1) If register as ‘D’ or ‘S’ is used by BIT, it can’t use write but only read.


Next table shows the available functions from the ‘LSIS Master-K S-Series Enet’ communication driver.


Block Data Read O

Block Data Write O

String real Tag O

Word Swap X

Dword Swap X

Block DataRead

This function makes it possible that is bulk data reading at a time. It will be

applied when you use recipe, data bridge and trends at the Xpanel.

Block DataWrite

This function makes it possible that is bulk data writing at a time. It will be applied

when you use recipe, data bridge and trends at the Xpanel.

String real TagIt makes the device as the serialized memory so you can communicate string

data of Xpanel with PLC.

Word Swap This function swaps bytes of all word or double word sized data. It depends upon



16Bit Data Swap configuration.

Dword SwapThis function swaps words of all double word sized data. It depends upon 32Bit

Data Swap configuration.

27.22 LSIS Inverter Starvert

This driver can communicate with iP5A and iV5 inverters from LSIS via its dedicated protocol.

Communication Setup : (iP5A example)

For normal communication, following parameter must be set as noted at inverter side.

[Inverter Setting Example]

Parameter

NumberSet Value Description

DRV_03 Int. 485 Drive mode

DRV_04 Int. 485 Frequency control mode

I/O_90 1 Station number (1 .. 250)

I/O_91 9600 Communication speed (19200, 9600 or 4800 recommended)


Createa newDevice



CIMON-Xpanel530



database


Selectadevicetype

I/O Device type : ' LSIS INVERTER Starvert Series '


popped up as

shown in following picture.

In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘LSIS INVERTER Starvert Series’ and configure the proper serial

communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with the inverter configuration.

All communication parameters except baudrate are fixed as : no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit.



Createastation


In this dialog box, all the connected inverter stations can be configured and registered to the XPanel.


CIMON-Xpanel532




Name’.

Station Type Choose one of two inverter models (‘iP5A’ and ‘iV5’) .

Network ID This field has no meaning in this driver.


16Bit Data

Swap


32Bit Data

Swap


Using

Checksu

m


Comm. Error

Message pop

Up

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification message

at every Rx and Tx error.Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the

message at data receive error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value



to the station) error, the notification message is popped up. This message box will


Address Notation



Analog [Symbol][Hexadecimal Number] M0006

Digital [Symbol][Hexadecimal Number][.][Decimal Number] M0006.12

Symbol Address Description

M 0000 002C Communication Memory Area

R 0500 051B Reference Data Memory Area (Not supported in iP5A model)

P 9100 - 9800 Parameter Memory Area


For more information of each point, please refer to the manual of inverter.


27.23 MITSUBISHI Inverter FR-E500

This driver can communicate with the FR-E510/520/540 inverter series from Mitsubishi.

CIMON-Xpanel534


Xpanel Setting Example

For normal communication, following parameter must be set as noted at inverter side.

· CR/LF instruction presence/absence (Pr. 124) : Mode 2 (with CR/LF)

· Comm. response waiting time (Pr. 123) : 9999 (use the waiting time data)

Inverter Setting Example




1171 0 Station number 0. (any number between 0 to 31)

1181 192 19200 bps

1191 0 8 data bits, 1 stop bit

1201 0 No parity

121 9999 Don’t use the communication retry

122 9999 Don’t use the communication timeout

1232 9999 Response delay is dependent on the received frame.

1242 2 Use CR/LF terminator

(Note 1) Those parameters (117 to 120) must be matched with the settings of Xpanel.

(Note 2) The parameters of 123 and 124 must be set as the value shown in this example. If those

parameters were set as other values,

Xpanel can not communicate with the inverter.

Address Notation



Analog [Symbol][Decimal Number] P023

Digital [Symbol][Decimal Number][.][Hexadecimal Number] B022.F

Symbol Address Description Inst. (R) Inst. (W) Access

P 000 - 999 Parameter Area H00 H63 H80 HE3 R/W

D

008 Second Parameter H6C HEC

R/W

009 RAM Set Frequency H6D HED

010 EEPROM Set Frequency H6E HEE

023 Operation Mode H7B HFB

027 Link Parameter H7F HFF

B 011 Output Frequency (Speed) H6F R

012 Output Current H70

013 Output Voltage H71

016 Recent Alarm H74

017 H75

018 H76

019 H77

022 Inverter Status (Bit mapped) H7A

CIMON-Xpanel536


C

016 Alarm Definition Batch Clear HF4

W022 Run Command (Bit mapped) HFA

024 All Parameter Clear HFC

025 Inverter Reset HFD


For more information of each point, please refer to the manual of inverter.


27.24 MITSUBISHI Melsec 1C (ACPU, AnA/AnU CPU)

This Manual explains about the method of CIMON-Xpanel using ‘MITSUBISHI Melsec 1C protocol’



communication with

ACPU, AnA/AnU CPU using RS232C or RS422/485.





Create a newDevice

To configure the communication device of Melsec 1C (ACPU, AnA/AnU CPU) PLC, Select

'Tools - I/O device' in the

menu or icon in tool-bar, and then “I/O device configuration” dialog box will be shown up.

And then click [new device] button. “I/O device selection” dialog box is shown up, select a

device name and a device type as the following figure.

I/O Device Name MEL

In the case there are various kinds of field equipments, Type device

CIMON-Xpanel538


name to identify what equipments it is. The string “MEL” of this item will

be shown up in the selection list of I/O device when you register a tag.

Xpanel can communicate with various kinds of equipment

simultaneously connected by identifying equipment by its name. The

value which is saved as a tag is the compound string of a device name

and station name as following “MEL.ST” (“DEV” is a device name, and

“ST" is a station name). And it is used as a unique identifier in Xpanel

project.

I/O Device

Selection

Serial device

You can select field equipment and a communication type. Select one

according to the communication method of the selected device.

Select a devicetype

I/O Device type : ' MITSUBISHI Melsec 1C (AnA/AnU CPU) '

You can select communication device which is connected to Xpanel. This example shows you

selecting “MITSUBISHI Melsec 1C (AnA/AnU CPU)”. But if you want to use ACPU, select

“MITSUBISHI 1C (ACPU).



Comm.Port COM1

This example uses COM1 port. If you want use other ports, select one in

the combo box.

Baud rate 19,200




CIMON-Xpanel540



Parity None

Data bits 8 Bits

Stop bits 1 Bits

RTS/CTS ON

This example uses RTS-CTS control always ON doing.

Comm. Type RS232

This example selects S232 communication.


communication then select RS-485.

Retry No. 3


the number of this.

Time Out 30

If you input as the number of 30 then it’s time out count will be 30

seconds.

Using Dial Up

Modem

Not Select



Station] button

then you can see “Station” Dialog Box popped up. Please configuration as the following

contents then click “OK” button.



Station Name ST





Station Type AnA / AnU


Station No. 0




other.

Socket Port

No.

2005

The exclusive use of GLOFA Enet supporting socket number is TCP 2004,

UDP 2005.

16Bit Data

Swap


32Bit Data

Swap


Using

Checksum


Comm. Error

Message Pop

Up



Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data

receive error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the

station) error, the notification message is popped up. This message box

will be closed automatically about 5 seconds after.

Configuration of PLC Communication module : AJ71UC24

According to the following explain, configure communication module. If you want more details or not

included contents in this manual,

refer to module manuals.

ModeConfiguration

Xpanel communicate with PLC using “A compatible 1C Frame”. You can choose one of

the protocols using Mode setting switch. If you use RS-232, configure the switch as 1

CIMON-Xpanel542


Switch or you use RS-422/485 configure the switch as 5.

When RS-232 and RS-422/485 is used at the same time, configure switch as A.

Station No.ConfigurationSwitch

Station number must same of Xpanel Station No. Above configuration of the Xpanel

station number is 0.

Both x10 and x1, configure as 0.

CommunicationConfigurationSwitch

Communication configuration switch configure as the following figure.

switch

configuration Configure state

OFF ON

SW11

Main channel RS-232C RS-422

SW12

Data Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit

SW13

Baud rate Refer to the follows

SW14

SW15

SW16

Parity Using OFF ON

SW17

Even/Odd Parity Odd Even

SW18

Stop Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit

SW21

Sum check 사용 OFF ON

SW22

RUN중 Write 가능 impossible possible

SW23

Computer Link /

Multi-drop Link

Multi-drop ComputerLink

SW24

수신 측 종단 저항 Not being Being

Baud rate configuration

Baud rate(bps)

300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200

SW13 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

SW14 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON

SW15 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON

If all configurations were ended, reboot the PLC and then apply changed

configurations.



Wiring Diagram


RS-232C

RS-422


To improve stability of communication it should connect SG and use STP cable. But

shielded cables must be earthed.

RS-485


When Xpanel is using RS-485, it connects with SDA and SDB but disconnect with

CIMON-Xpanel544


RDA and RDB.



Device Memory range

Device SymbolI/O Device

Type Bit/WordMelsec 1C (ACPU) Melsec 1C (AnA/AnU)

Input X X0000-X07FF X000000-X001FFF Hex Bit

Output Y Y0000-Y07FF Y000000-Y001FFF Hex Bit

Internal Relay M M0000-M2047 M000000-M008191 Decimal Bit

Latch Relay L L0000-L2047 M000000-M008191 Decimal Bit

Step Relay S S0000-S2047 S000000-S008191 Decimal Bit

Link Relay B B0000-B03FF B000000-B001FFF Hex Bit

annanciator F F0000-M0255 F000000-F002047 Decimal Bit

special Relay M M9000-M9255 M009000-M009255 Decimal Bit

special register D D9000-D9255 D9000-D9255 Decimal Word

Timer (point) T TS000-TS255 TS00000-TS02047 Decimal Word

Timer (coil) T TC000-TC255 TC00000-TC02047 Decimal Word

Timer(present value) T TN000-TN255 TN00000-TN02047 Decimal Word

counter (point) C CS000-CS255 CS00000-CS01023 Decimal Word

counter (coil) C CC000-CC255 CC00000-CC01023 Decimal Word

counter (present value) C CN000-CN255 CN00000-CN01023 Decimal Word

data register D D0000-D1023 D000000-D08191 Decimal Word

Link register W W0000-W03FF W000000-W001FFF Hex Word

File register R R0000-R8191 R000000-R008191 Decimal Word

Usable device ranges are described above figure. You must use device in the allowable range. Note that

Input(X) and output(Y) are Hexadecimal.

Error Code





ErrorCode

Error type Error contents Solution

00H Impossible on RUN Even if it is forbade writing on

Run, it receive writing commend

Change the configuration of On Run

writable.

01H Parity error Parity bit wrong Change the configuration of

Parity bit.

02H Sum-check error Uncorrected Sum-check Check the wiring of the communication

03H Protocol error Receiving uncorrected

statement that is violate control

order of the protocol.

Confirm the opponent equipment’s

transfer statement and communicate

after modifying.

04H Framing error Uncorrected stop-bit

configuration

Change the configuration of Stop-bit

05H Over-run error In the case of it receive data

before the previous data

receiving ended

Down the Baud rate and then try

communication again.

06H Character part error · Assignment method error of

statement

· In the case of receiving not

existed command

· In the case of exceeding

allowable range

· In the case of assigned not

existing device

Check the device range

07H Character error In the case of receiving data

which it cannot use



after modifying.

08H PLC access error Cannot communication CPU Substitute CPU as the useable

10H PLC number error PLC number is not “FF” or

configured station number of

network parameter.



after modifying.

11H Mode error Error detection with PLC CPU Substitute CPU as the useable

12H Special function

module assignment

error

Special function module is not

existed in assigned location.



after modifying.

21H Special function

module bus error

Access error to the special

module detected in assigned

According to the correspondent module

manual, detect error and solute the

CIMON-Xpanel546


location problem as indicated.

27.25 MITSUBISHI Melsec 3E(Q/QnA)

This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between Xpanel and Mitsubishi

MELSEC Q Series PLCs.

This protocol uses binary code. It supports the following families of MELSEC PLCs Ethernet modules.

· QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2


Create a newDevice For creating a new device activate the menu ‘Tools’- >’I/O Devices’ or icon in tool-bar.



of database


Select a devicetype

I/O Device type : MITSUBISHI Melsec 3E

After selecting the ‘OK’ button of previous step, ‘Ethernet Communication Configuration’

dialog box will be popped up as shown in following picture.



In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘MITSUBISHI MELSEC 3E’ and configure the proper

Ethernet

communication parameters.



Each field can

be configured with following rules.

CIMON-Xpanel548




Station Type Choose the ‘MELSEC’. (No other type can be selected.)


IP Address Give the IP address of PLC with dotted decimal format.

Socket Port

Number

Give the port number opened by the PLC.The default value of this field is

5000.

16Bit Data

Swap


32Bit Data

Swap


Comm. Error

Message Pop

Up








Fixed XPANELSocketPort / XPANELSocketPort No.

If this option was checked, Xpanel will use only one port defined in ‘XPANEL

Socket Port No.” field for connection with PLC. Otherwise, Xpanel will change


This option is provided for Xpanel to deal with various TCP port management




there are too many kinds of PLC and the response in PLC is entirely

dependant on the specification of PLC and engineer’s experience.


Address Notation


Type Format Example

10 [Symbol][Address in decimal number] D0012

16 [Symbol][Address in hexa-decimal number] X01FC


Memory Area Symbol I/O Address Range Notation Bit/Word

Input Relay X X000000-X001FFF 16 Bit

Output Relay Y Y000000-Y001FFF 16 Bit

Internal Relay M M000000-M008191 10 Bit

M M009000-M009255 10 Bit

Latch Relay L L000000-L008191 10 Bit

Step Relay S S000000-S008191 10 Bit

Link Relay B B000000-B001FFF 16 Bit

Annunciator F F000000-F002047 10 Bit

Timer Contact TS TS00000-TS02047 10 Word

Timer Coil TC TC00000-TC02047 10 Word

Timer Current Value TN TN00000-TN02047 10 Word

Retentive Timer Contact SS SS00000-SS02047 10 Word

Retentive Timer Coil SC SC00000-SC02047 10 Word

Retentive Timer Current Value SN SN00000-SN02047 10 Word

CIMON-Xpanel550


Counter Contact CS CS00000-CS01023 10 Word

Counter Coil CC CC00000-CC01023 10 Word

Counter Current Value CN CN00000-CN01023 10 Word

Data Register D D000000-D08191 10 Word

D D9000-D9255 10 Word

Link Register W W000000-W001FFF 16 Word

File Register R R000000-R008191 10 Word


Connectthrough theEthernet HUB

Directconnection



27.26 MITSUBISHI Melsec 1E

This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between XPanel and Mitsubishi

MELSEC A or Q Series PLCs.

This protocol uses binary code. It supports the following families of MELSEC PLCs Ethernet modules.

•AJ71E71

This communication module can be used to access data of ACPU.

•QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2

These communication modules can be used to access data of QCPU and QnACPU.




CIMON-Xpanel552


I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration

window of database


Select a devicetype

I/O Device Type : MITSUBISHI Melsec 1E


dialog box will be




In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘MITSUBISHI MELSEC 1E’ and configure the proper

Ethernet communication parameters.



XPanel. Each field can be configured with following rules.

CIMON-Xpanel554



accompanied

with the ‘Device Name’

Station Type MELSEC



Socket Port

Number

Give the port number opened by the PLC. The default value of this field

is 5000.

16Bit Data

Swap


32Bit Data

Swap


Comm. Error

Message Pop

Up

If this item is checked, XPanel displays a communication error

notification message at



receive error.

Only when there is data transmit



(writing a TAG value to the station) error, the notification message is

popped up.

This message box will be closed automatically about 5 seconds after.

Fixed XPANEL

Socket Port /

XPANEL Socket

Port No.

If this option was checked, XPanel will use only one port defined in ‘

XPANEL Socket

Port No.” field for connection with PLC.

Otherwise, XPanel will change the port at every TCP connection or

communication error.

This option is provided for XPanel to deal with various TCP port

management ways of

PLC. Some PLC has a limit on the number of TCP services. In that

case, this option can

be a help. The actual effect of this option on PLC cannot be described

here.

Because, there are too many kinds of PLC and the response in PLC is

entirely



Address Notation


Type Format Example









CIMON-Xpanel556














Directconnection



27.27 MITSUBISHI Melsec 3E ASCII

This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between XPanel and Mitsubishi

MELSEC Q Series PLCs.

This protocol uses the ASCII code. It supports the following families of MELSEC PLCs Ethernet modules.

· QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2




CIMON-Xpanel558



of database


Select a devicetype

I/O Device type : MITSUBISHI Melsec 3E(ASCII)


dialog box will be popped up as shown in following picture.



In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘MITSUBISHI MELSEC 3E (ASCII)’ and configure

the proper Ethernet


[Note]

The ASCII communication of MELSEC is seviced with TCP/IP protocol suit only. Do not choose the

"UDP"

protocol in above dialog box.



Each field can

be configured with following rules.

CIMON-Xpanel560




Station Type Choose the ‘MELSEC’. (No other type can be selected.)



Socket Port

Number

Give the port number opened by the PLC.

16Bit Data

Swap


32Bit Data

Swap


Comm. Error

Message Pop

Up








Fixed XPANELSocketPort / XPANELSocketPort No.

If this option was checked, Xpanel will use only one port defined in ‘XPANEL

Socket Port No.” field for connection with PLC. Otherwise, Xpanel will change


This option is provided for Xpanel to deal with various TCP port management




there are too many kinds of PLC and the response in PLC is entirely



Address Notation


Type Format Example








M M009000-M009255 10 Bit


Step Relay S S000000-S008191 10 Bit






Retentive Timer Contact SS SS00000-SS02047 10 Word

Retentive Timer Coil SC SC00000-SC02047 10 Word

Retentive Timer Current Value SN SN00000-SN02047 10 Word

CIMON-Xpanel562






D D9000-D9255 10 Word





Directconnection



27.28 MITSUBISHI Melsec A Series (Programming Port)

This driver supports the communication with MELSEC A series PLCs through the programming port (loader

port).


Createa newDevice



CIMON-Xpanel564



of database


Selectadevicetype

I/O Device Type : MITSUBISHI Melsec A Loader


be popped




In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘MITSUBISHI MELSEC A Loader’ and configure the

proper serial communication parameters. The communication parameters must be configured as

followings : (no other configuration is allowed)

Createastation


In this dialog box, all the connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the XPanel.

Each field

can be configured with following rules.

CIMON-Xpanel566




Station Type Choose the type of connected PLC CPU. One of two CPUs can be chosen.

(AnS or AnA)


Station No. This field has no effect.

16Bit Data

Swap




32Bit Data

Swap


Using

Checksum

This field has no effect. This communication driver always checks the check-

sum.

Comm. Error

Message Pop

Up








Memory Area Symbol CPU Notation Bit/Word

Input Relay X X0000-X07FF 16 Bit

Output Relay Y Y0000-Y07FF 16 Bit


M M9000-M9255 10 Bit




Timer Contact TS TS0000-TS2047 10 Bit

Timer Coil TC TC0000-TC2047 10 Bit


Counter Contact CS CS0000-CS1023 10 Bit

Counter Coil CC CC0000-CC1023 10 Bit




Above memory table is based on the AnA CPUs. Actual boundaries of each device memory are dependent on

the type of CPU connected.

CIMON-Xpanel568


Wiring Diagram

[ RS232C ]

Use the standard programming tool cable supplied by PLC manufacturer or their partner company. Please

refer to the GX Developer operating manual for more information about cable/converter. This driver cannot

communicate with a commonly used RS232C or RS422/485 cable.

XPANEL COM/CPM2RS232C

XPANEL COM1RS422/485

27.29 MITSUBISHI Melsec FX Series

This driver supports the communication with MELSEC FX series PLCs through RS232C/422A port.

The implemented protocol in this driver is the ‘dedicated protocol’ of FX and uses the ‘control



protocol format 1’.


Create a newDevice For creating a new device activate the menu ‘Tools’- >’I/O Devices’ or icon in

tool-bar. Following picture

shows the first step of creating a new device.

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG

configuration window of database


Select a devicetype

I/O Device Type : ' MITSUBISHI Melsec FX '

After selecting the ‘OK’ button of previous step, ‘Serial Communication

Configuration’ dialog box will be


CIMON-Xpanel570


In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘MITSUBISHI Melsec FX’ and configure

the proper serial

communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with PLC

configuration.

Create a station Move to the ‘Station’ tab of ‘Serial Communication Configuration’ dialog box. In this

dialog box, all the connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the Xpanel.




Station Name Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database

window accompanied with the ‘Device Name’.

Station Type Choose the type of connected PLC among the “FX”.


Station No. 0

Specify a decimal number between 0 and 15. This number must be

matched with the number in the special data register D8121 of FX

PLC.

16Bit Data

Swap


32Bit Data

Swap


Using

Checksum

This field has no effect. This communication driver always checks the

check-sum.

Comm. Error

Message

Pop Up

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error

notification message at every Rx and Tx error. Otherwise

(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data receive

error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the

CIMON-Xpanel572


station) error, the notification message is popped up. This message

box will be closed automatically about 5 seconds after.

Communication Setup : MELSEC FX PLC

Typically, the configuration of PLC side is performed by the ‘GX Developer’.

For normal communication with Xpanel, following parameters must be set as noted.

Protocol Dedicated Protocol

Format Protocol Format 1

Sum Check Enable


Memory CPU Format Bit/Word

FX0n FX,FX2c FX2n

Input X X0000-X0177 X0000-X0337 X0000-X0267 Octal Bit

Output Y Y0000-Y0177 Y0000-Y0337 Y0000-Y0267 Octal Bit

Aux Relay M M0000-M0511 M0000-M1535 M0000-M3071 Decimal Bit

Special Relay M M8000-M8254 M8000-M8255 M8000-M8255 Decimal Bit

Status Relay S S0000-S0127 S0000-S0999 S0000-S0999 Decimal Bit

Data Register D D0000-D8255 D0000-D8255 D0000-D8255 Decimal Word

Timer TN TN000-TN063 TN000-TN255 TN000-TN255 Decimal Word

Counter CN CN000-CN254 CN000-CN255 CN000-CN255 Decimal Word

Wiring Diagram



RS-232C

RS-422

RS-485

27.30 MITSUBISHI Melsec FX Series (Programming Port)

This driver supports the communication with MELSEC FX series PLCs through the programming port

(loader port).


CIMON-Xpanel574


Createa newDevice


Following picture



of database


Selectadevicetype

I/O Device type : ' MITSUBISHI Melsec FX Loader '





In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘MITSUBISHI MELSEC FX Loader’ and configure the

proper serial

communication parameters. The programming port of FX PLC uses fixed communication

parameters.

Ensure that communication parameters are configured as followings.

CIMON-Xpanel576


Baud rate 9,600 bps

Parity None

Data bits 8 Bits

Stop bits 1 Bits

RS422A

Channel

RS422A Channel( COM1)

Createastation



Each field can be configured with following rules





Station Type Select the “FX Loader” type. No other items can be chosen.


Station No. This field has no effect in this communication driver. Only one PLC can be

connected through the programming port driver. Therefore, there is no need

to use station number.

Socket Port No. 2005

The exclusive use of GLOFA Enet supporting socket number is TCP 2004, UDP

2005.

16Bit Data

Swap


32Bit Data

Swap


Using

Checksum

These fields have no effect. And this communication driver always checks the

check-sum.

Comm. Error

Message Pop

Up








Memory Sym CPU Format Data

FX0n FX,FX2c FX2n

Input X X0000-X0177 X0000-X0337 X0000-X0267 Octal Bit

Output Y Y0000-Y0177 Y0000-Y0337 Y0000-Y0267 Octal Bit

Aux Relay M M0000-M0511 M0000-M1535 M0000-M3071 Decimal Bit

CIMON-Xpanel578


Special Relay M M8000-M8254 M8000-M8255 M8000-M8255 Decimal Bit

Timer (Contact) T T000-T063 T000-T255 T000-T255 Decimal Bit

Counter (Contact) C C000-C254 C000-C255 C000-C255 Decimal Bit

Status Relay S S0000-S0127 S0000-S0999 S0000-S0999 Decimal Bit

Data Register D D0000-D8255 D0000-D8255 D0000-D8255 Decimal Word

Timer (Cur-value) TN TN000-TN063 TN000-TN255 TN000-TN255 Decimal Word

Counter (Cur-value) CN CN000-CN254 CN000-CN255 CN000-CN255 Decimal Word

Wiring Diagram

RS422A

27.31 MITSUBISHI Melsec Q Series (Programming Port)

This driver supports the communication with MELSEC Q series PLCs through the programming port (loader

port).

Communication Setup : PLC (GX Developer)

Following configuration is needed in PLC side.

This can be done at the "PLC Parameter-Serial" setup window of GX Developer as shown in the following

picture.



1) Check and made enable the "Use serial communication" Option.

2) Configure the communication speed. This configuration must be matched with the one of Xpanel's

configuration.

3) Configure the "Sum check" option. This option must be matched with the one of Xpanel's configuration.

4) Set "Transmission wait Time" as appropriate value. Typically this item is set as "No waiting Time".

5) Check and make enable the "RUN while setting : Permit" option which makes it possible for the

operator to control the value of PLC with Xpanel.

6) Aware that PLC parameters are applied only after the cold restart of PLC system.

This Communication driver was tested with Q00 CPU.

Q2(H) / Q6H / Q12H / Q25H CPU

These CPUs do not have special configuration items for loader port communication.

This Communication driver was tested with Q12H CPU.

CIMON-Xpanel580



Createa newDevice


Following picture



of database


Selectadevicetype

I/O Device Type : ' MITSUBISHI Melsec Q Loader(Q00/01), MITSUBISHI Melsec Q Loader

(Q02/06/12/25) '


box will be popped up. Proceed the further configuration according to the type of PLC CPU. Please

notice that the communication parameter combination shown in the following box is the only one

allowed in Q series CPU programming port. (Regardless of the type of CPU, no other configuration

is allowed.)



· Parity : Odd

· Data Bits : 8 Bits

· Stop Bit : 1 Bit

Q00CPU / Q01CPU

If the connecting CPU type is Q00 or Q01, then select the 'MITSUBISHI MELSEC Q Loader

(Q00/Q01)' device type.

Q2(H) / Q6H / Q12H / Q25H

If the connecting CPU type is Q02(H), Q06H, Q12H or Q25H,

CIMON-Xpanel582


then select the 'MITSUBISHI MELSEC Q Loader (Q02/Q06/Q12/Q25)' device type.

Createastation



Each field can be configured with following rules





Station Type Choose the type of connected PLC CPU.

[Note]

If the connecting CPU is Q01CPU, then choose "Q00CPU". These two CPUs

have no difference in Xpanel communication driver.


CIMON-Xpanel584


Station No. Specify the station number in decimal form (0..254). This number has no

meaning in peer to peer communication. Usually, this station number is

configured as zero(0).

16Bit Data

Swap


32Bit Data

Swap


Using

Checksum

This configuration should be matched with the same configuration item of

PLC CPU. Ensure that this option is checked with the same status in both

side. (Verify the check status of "Sum Check" item of GX Developer.

Comm. Error

Message Pop

Up








Q00CPU / Q01CPU

Memory Area Symbol Range Notation Bit / Word

Input Relay X X0000-X07FF 16 Bit

Output Relay Y Y0000-Y07FF 16 Bit


SM SM0000-SM1023 10 Bit


Link Relay B B0000-B07FF 16 Bit

SB SB0000-SB07FF 16 Bit

Edge Relay V V0000-V1023 10 Bit


Timer Contact TS TS0000-TS0511 10 Bit

Timer Clear TC TC0000-TC0511 10 Bit


Counter Contact CS CS0000-CS0511 10 Bit



Data RegisterD D00000-D11135 10 Word

SD SD0000-SD1023 10 Word

Lin Register W W0000-W07FF 16 Word

SW SW0000-SW03FF 16 Word



Q02(H) / Q06H / Q12H / Q25H

Memory Area Symbol Range Notation Bit / Word




SM SM0000-SM1023 10 Bit



Edge Relay V V0000-V2047 10 Bit


Timer Clear TC TC0000-TC2047 10 Bit




Data RegisterD D00000-D12287 10 Word

SD SD0000-SD2047 10 Word

Lin RegisterW W0000-W1FFF 16 Word

SW SW0000-SW07FF 16 Word

Wiring Diapram

RS232C

CIMON-Xpanel586


27.32 MITSUBISHI Melsec FX2N-10/20GM(Programming Port)

This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between XPanel and Melsec FX2N-

10/20GM PLCs.


Create a newSetup For creating a new device activate the menu ‘Tools’- >’I/O Devices’ or icon in tool-bar.



This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of database accompanied by the

‘Station Name’.




I/O Device Name : MITSUBISHI MELSEC FX2N-10/20GM Loader

After selecting the ‘OK’ button of previous step, ‘Serial Communication Configuration ’ dialog

box will be popped up as shown in following picture.

In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘MITSUBISHI MELSEC FX2N-10/20GM’ and

appropriate

communication parameters. Those parameters must be matched with the PLC.

Communication parameters should be configured as shown in the following table.

Baud Rate 9600

Parity Even

CIMON-Xpanel588


Data Bits 8 Bits

Stop Bits 1Bits

Comm.Type RS422



Create a station Move to the ‘Station’ tab of ‘Serial Communication Configuration’ dialog box. In this dialog box,

all the connected

PLC stations can be configured and registered to the XPanel. Each field can be configured with

following rules.

Station Name Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window accompanied with the‘Device Name’.

Station Type Choose the ‘FX2N-10/20GM’. (No other type can be selected.)




CIMON-Xpanel590



Using

Checksum

This field has no meaning in this driver.

Comm. Error

Message Pop

Up


notification message



receive error.

Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station)

error, the

notification message is popped up. This message box will be closed

automatically


Address Notation

Following table shows the list of devices which can be referenced in XPanel database..

Symbol

Memory Analog Tag Digital Tag Format Data

10GM 20GM 10GM 20GM

M Aux Relay - - M000-M511 M000-M511 Dec Bit

SM SpecialRelay

- - SM0000-SM0175

SM0000-SM0175

Dec Bit

X Input - - X000-X003X375-X377

X000-X067X372-X377

Oct Bit

Y Output - - Y000-Y005 Y000-Y067 Oct Bit

D DataRegister

D000-D1999 D000-D3999 - - Dec Word

SD Special dataregister

SD000-SD0313

SD000-SD0599

- - Dec Word

V - V000-V007 V000-V007 - - Dec Word

Z - Z000-Z007 Z000-Z007 - - Dec Dword

* SM address matches originally to M address based on M9000 at PLC, also SD matches D

address based on D9000.




27.33 MODBUS RTU protocl

This document describes the MODBUS communication driver for Xpanel. This driver supports the RTU mode

of the MODBUS protocol.




CIMON-Xpanel592



window of database


Select a devicetype

I/O Device Type : MODBUS RTU Protocol

After selecting the ‘OK’ button of previous step, ‘Serial Communication Configuration’

dialog box will be popped




In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘MODBUS RTU Protocol’ and configure the

proper serial communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with the

device’s configuration.



Xpanel.


CIMON-Xpanel594




Station Type Choose the type of connected PLC among the “Modbus RTU”.



16Bit Data

Swap

This option swaps bytes of all word or double word sized data. Following

diagram shows an example of byte swapping.

Almost all of the data type will be influenced by this option except

INT8 / UINT8 / BCD8 / UBCD8.

32Bit Data

Swap

This option swaps words of all double word sized data. Following diagram

shows an example of word swapping.



NT32 / UINT32 / BCD32 / UBCD32 / FLOAT type of TAG values will be

influenced by this option.

Using

Checksum

This field has no effect. This MODBUS driver always checking the BCC.

Comm. Error

Message Pop

Up

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error

notification message at every Rx and Tx error. Otherwise(unchecked),

Xpanel does not display the message at data receive error. Only when

there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error, the



Address & Function Codes

Following table shows the list of valid address range and used MODBUS function codes for each address

area.

The symbol character has to be placed in the first position of address string. The address number follows

the symbol character.

Area Symbol Analog TAG Digital TAG Read Write

Coil 0 000001 - 029999 (1) 1 5

Input 1 100001 - 129999 2

Holding Register 4 400001 - 429999 3 6, 16 (2)

Input Register 3 300001 - 329999 4

1) The symbol character does not have the number property. For example, 400100 and 4100 designate the same

memory area (Holding register 100).

2) The code 16 is issued when a double word write or the recipe write function is activated. A single word write

uses the code 6.

The memory areas listed above are provided for general purposes. The actual available memory area and

range of each area should be

checked with the manual of connecting device. The ‘Read’/’Write’ columns show the used MODBUS function

codes in this communication driver.

CIMON-Xpanel596





Above picture shows the RS232C and RS422/485 ports of Xpanel. Refer to the manual of your device for

signal description.

In case of the RS232C ports, Xpanel provides the standard DB9 RS232C pin assignment. Typically RD, TD

and SG pins are enough to

communicate with general MODBUS device.

27.34 MODBUS TCP protocl

This document describes the MODBUS communication driver for Xpanel. This driver supports the TCP mode

of the MODBUS protocol.




Createa newDevice




of database


Selectadevicetype

I/O Device Type : MODBUS TCP Protocol


box will be


CIMON-Xpanel598


In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘MODBUS TCP’ and configure the proper ehternet

communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with the device’s

configuration.

Createastation

Move to the ‘Station’ tab of ‘Ethernet Communication Configuration’ dialog box.


Xpanel.






Station Type Choose the type of connected PLC among the “Modbus TCP”.

Network ID Sum of MODBUS/TCP devices here its own station number.

Socket Port No The socket number should be configured as 502. This port number is

dedicated for MODBUS/TCP.

16Bit Data

Swap



Almost all of the data type will be influenced by this option except INT8 /

UINT8 / BCD8 / UBCD8.

32Bit Data

Swap

This option swaps words of all double word sized data. Following diagram

shows an example of word swapping.

NT32 / UINT32 / BCD32 / UBCD32 / FLOAT type of TAG values will be


Using

Checksum

This field has no effect. This MODBUS driver always checking the BCC.

Comm. Error If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification

CIMON-Xpanel600


Message Pop

Up

message at every Rx and Tx error. Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does

not display the message at data receive error. Only when there is data

transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error, the notification message

is popped up. This message box will be closed automatically about 5

seconds after.


Following table shows the list of valid address range and used MODBUS function codes for each address

area.

The symbol character has to be placed in the first position of address string. The address number follows


Area Symbol Analog TAG Digital TAG Read Write

Coil 0 000001 - 029999 (1) 1 5

Input 1 100001 - 129999 2

Holding Register 4 400001 - 429999 3 6, 16 (2)

Input Register 3 300001 - 329999 4

1) The symbol character does not have the number property. For example, 400100 and 4100 designate the

same memory area (Holding register 100).

2) The code 16 is issued when a double word write or the recipe write function is activated. A single word

write uses the code 6.

The memory areas listed above are provided for general purposes. The actual available memory area and

range of each area should be

checked with the manual of connecting device. The ‘Read’/’Write’ columns show the used MODBUS

function codes in this communication driver.










2 Orange Orange 2

3 Green/W Green/W 3

4 Blue Blue 4

5 Blue/W Blue/W 5

6 Green Green 6

7 Brown/W Brown/W 7

8 Brown Brown 8




2 Orange Green 2


4 Blue Blue 4

5 Blue/W Blue/W 5

6 Green Orange 6

7 Brown/W Brown/W 7

8 Brown Brown 8

27.35 NAIS PLC FP Series (MEWTOCOL-COM)

This driver provides communication interface between Xpanel and NAIS FP Series PLC with their

MEWTOCOL-COM protocol.


CIMON-Xpanel602


Createa newDevice




of database


Selectadevicetype

I/O Device type : NAIS FPO MEWTOCOL-COM



Select the ‘NAIS FPO MEWTOCOL-COM’ in ‘Device Type’ combo-box of following dialog box. And

then, configure the communication parameters appropriately. Ensure that parameters are matched

with those of PLC side.



Createastation

Move to the ‘Station’ tab of ‘Serial Communication Configuration’ dialog box. The PLCs to

communicate with must be registered in the ‘Station’ Tab. ‘Add Station’ button pops up a station

configuring dialog box. A station can be defined with its station number on this dialog box. Each

field can be configured with following guideline.

CIMON-Xpanel604




Station Type Choose the ‘NAIS FPO’. (No other type can be selected.)


Station No Assign a station number. It can be a decimal number between 1 and 32.

16Bit Data

Swap


32Bit Data

Swap


Using

Checksum


Comm. Error

Message Pop





Up Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data receive


error, the notification message is popped up. This message box will be

closed automatically about 5 seconds after.

Address Notation


Format Type Format Example

Dec. [Symbol][Decimal Address] DT0010 / T0100

Dec_Hex. [Symbol][Decimal Address][Hex Bit Number] X012F

Symbol Area AnalogTAG

Digital TAG

AddressFormat

DecimalAddress

Access

X External Input O Dec_Hex 00-12 R

Y External Output O Dec_Hex 00-12 R/W

R Internal Relay O Dec_Hex 000-903 R/W

L Link Relay O Dec_Hex 000-999 R/W

C Counter O Dec 000-143 R

T Timer O Dec 000-143 R

WX External Input Word O Dec 00-12 R

WY External Output Word O Dec 00-12 R/W

WR Internal Relay Word O Dec 000-903 R/W

DT Data Register O Dec 0-9121 R/W

FL File Register O Dec 0-9999 R/W

LD Link Data Register O Dec 0-9999 R/W


CIMON-Xpanel606


27.36 OMRON HostLink

This version of driver uses C-mode command in OMRON HostLink protocol.


Createa newDevice






database


Selectadevicetype

I/O Device type : ' OMRON PLC(HostKink) '


popped


CIMON-Xpanel608


In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘OMRON PLC (HostLink)’ and configure the proper serial

communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with PLC configuration.

Createastation








Station Type Choose the ‘HostLink’. (No other type can be selected.)



16Bit Data

Swap


32Bit Data

Swap


Using

Checksum


Comm. Error

Message pop



CIMON-Xpanel610


Up Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data receive




PLC Mode

Omron PLC can be written when its mode is monitor. So you must change the mode to monitor.

Please set the value of DM6600 to 0101h. Even though the PLC power goes out, it remains to monitor

mode.

You can only change the DM6600 by program mode.



DM area D D0000 D9999 D0000.00 D0000.15D9999.00 D9999.15

(1)

CIO area IR IR0000 IR6143IR0000.00 IR0000.15IR6143.00 IR6143.15

AR area A A0000 A0959 A0000.00 A0000.15A0959.00 A0959.15

(1), (2)

HR area H H0000 H0511H0000.00 H0000.15H0511.00 H0511.15

T/C status TC not supported TC0000 TC4095 (3)

T/C p. value PV PV0000 PV4095 not supported (3)

LR area L L0000 L0199 L0000.00 L0000.15L0199.00 L0199.15

EM area EE0_0000 E0_9999EC_0000 EC_9999

E0_0000.00 E0_0000.15EC_9999.00 EC_9999.15

(1), (4)

(1) If the address of this area was used in digital tag, control functionalities are not supported. Xpanel

cannot set/reset these points.

(2) A0000 A0447 address area cannot be modified by Xpanel. (Read only area)

(3) Timer : T0000 T2143 area was mapped to TC0000 - TC2143 (PV0000 - PV2143)

Counter : C0000 C2143 area was mapped to TC2148 - TC4095 (PV2148 - PV4095)



(4) Bank of EM area must be denoted by one hexadecimal character (‘0’ ‘C’) as following example.

· Digital Tag : E[bank]_[word no].[2 digit bit no] (EA_1000.05 : bit5 of E1000 in bank ‘A’)

· Analog Tag : E[bank]_[word no] (EC_32 : E0032 of bank ‘C’)

(5) Bit location of digital Tag must be denoted by 2 digits decimal number (‘00’ ‘15’) with dot (’.’)

separator.

(exception : Timer/Counter area is digital point by itself).

Wiring Diagram

RS232C

C Series RS422A

CIMON-Xpanel612


CS/CJ Series

RS422A

27.37 OMRON FINS Ethernet

OMRON FINS Protocol is used to communicate with OMRON PLC through FINS Ethernet..


Createa newDevice





I/O Device Name : This device name is used when you set up Station and Database to register tags.

Write I/O Device Name and select Ethernet Device and then click ‘OK’.

Selectadevicetype

I/O Device type : ' OMRON CS/CJ Series Enet '

After writing device name, 'Ethernet Communication Configuration' window is shown as below.

CIMON-Xpanel614


Select 'OMRON CS/CJ Series Enet' at Device type and click 'TCP'.

If UDP is setup at PLC Communication configuration, 'UDP' can be used.

- Set "Network ID" and "Node ID". Xpanel "Unit ID" of Xpanel is fixed at '0'.

- Set "Time out" and "Retry No" according to network condition.

Createastation

Click 'Station' at 'Ethernet Communication Configuration' window. You can register device to communicate with

Xpanel.



Station Name Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window accompanied


Station Type Choose the ‘HostLink’. (No other type can be selected.)


Node ID Set "Node ID" of PLC. Some PLC use 4th digit number of IP address as "Node ID"

Unit ID Set "Unit ID" of PLC. Generally it is '0'

IP Address Write IP address of PLC.

Socket Port

number

Default is 9600. If you change this value in PLC, write that number.

16 Bit Data Swap Not used

32Bit Data Swap Not used

String Data It exchanges front and back word of string tag.

CIMON-Xpanel616


Swap

Comm. Error

Message Pop up

It is used to show Comm. Error message on the screen when Xpanel detects

sending/receiving error. 'Comm. Error Message' will be disappeared in 5 sec.

Fixed XPANEL

Socket Port

Not used

PLC Mode

1. CS/CJ Series Communication setting. (Example. CJ2M CPU35 )

1) External Rotary Switch setting

(1) Node number shows hexadecimal on screen.

(2) Set UNIT number

(3) Set NODE number

2) Built-in EtherNet/IP Port setting

(1) Select IO Table/ Unit setting.



(2) Select [1500] CJ2M-EIP21(Built In EtherNet/IP Port for CJ2M)(Unit : 0) at Inner Port/Inner Board

CIMON-Xpanel618


Select “TCP/IP” and write IP number of PLC EtherNet/IP at “IP Address”

(3) lSelect “FINS/TCP” and “Service Port” and check “Node ID”.



(4) Click red box as above picture.

CIMON-Xpanel620


(5) Check Net , Node, and Unit.



(6) Select Start Routing table.

(7) Select “유니트 00(이더넷 /IP)” and insert CPU SIOU as above picture.

CIMON-Xpanel622


2. NJ5xx Series ( Built-in EtherNet/IP Port )

1) Built-in EtherNet/IP Port setting

(1) Select Controller Setup -> Operation Settings.

(2) Refer to above picture and add setting to Local Network Table .



(3) Select Controller Setup -> Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Settings. Select TCP/IP Settings and set IP

address of PLC EtherNet/IP port.

(4) Select FINS Settings and set Service Port and check out Node ID. The 4th digit number of IP

Address(55) is used Node ID.

CIMON-Xpanel624


2) FINS Data Block Registration

(1) Select Data Global Variables.

(2) Click the right button of mouse and select ‘Create New’.

(3) Register Name, Data Type and AT in Item.



Name : It is variable name which is used in PLC program.

Data Type : Register data type of variable. In order to make easy Communication setting, "Array

Type" is recommended.

AT : Register Device format through FINS communication. Refer to Device format as following.

Area Foramt

CIO Area %0 , %10...

Work Area %W0, %W100...

Holding Area %H0, %H50...

DM Area %D0, %D150...

EM Area %E0_0, %E1_10...

(4) After finishing setting, click "Controller" -> "Synchronization" to download it to PLC. Reset PLC

power just in case downloaded setting does not work properly


Area Symbol Digital TAG Analog TAG

CIMON-Xpanel626


CIO Area CIO CIO0.0 ~ CIO6143.15 CIO0 ~ CIO6143

Work Area W W0.0 ~ W511.15 W0 ~ W511

Holding Area H H0.0 ~ H511.15 H0 ~ H511

AR Area A A0.0 ~ A959.15 A0 ~ A959

T/C Status TC TC0 ~ TC4095 -

T/C PValue PV - PV0 ~ PV4095

DM Area D D0.0 ~ D9999.15 D0 ~ D9999

EM Area EX_(x:0~F)

E0_0.0 ~ EF_32767.15 E0_0 ~ EF_32767








2 Orange Orange 2

3 Green/W Green/W 3

4 Blue Blue 4

5 Blue/W Blue/W 5

6 Green Green 6

7 Brown/W Brown/W 7

8 Brown Brown 8






2 Orange Green 2


4 Blue Blue 4

5 Blue/W Blue/W 5

6 Green Orange 6

7 Brown/W Brown/W 7

8 Brown Brown 8

27.38 PGuard(Serial)

This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between Xpanel and PguardGateway.





Create a newdevice

To configure the communication device of LSIS PLC, Select 'Tools' -> 'I/O device' in the

menu or icon in

tool-bar , and then “I/O device configuration” dialog box will be shown up. And then click

[new device] button.

“I/O device selection” dialog box is shown up, select a device name and a device type as

the following figure.

CIMON-Xpanel628


I/O Device Name :

Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of

database accompanied


Select a devicetype

Select a device type : 'PGuard gateway’ '

After selecting the ‘OK’ button of previous step, ‘Serial CommunicationConfiguration’ dialog box will be popped up as shown in following picture.



In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘PGuard gateway’andappropriate communication parameters. Those parameters must bematched with the PLC.


Station] button then you can see “Station” Dialog Box popped up. Please configuration as

the following contents then click “OK” button.

CIMON-Xpanel630


* Register only 1 station in driver ‘PGuard gateway’ to use.

Station Name Give a name to thr PLC. This name will be used in the database

window


Station Type Choose the 'SGW'.(No other type can be slected)




Station No. Write designated station No. in PLC

16Bit Data

Swap


32Bit Data

Swap


Using

checksum


Comm.Error

Message Pop

up

If this is checked, XPanel displays a communication error notification

message at every RX and Tx Error.


receive error. Only When there is data transmit (writing a TAG value

to the station) error, the notification message is poped up. This

message box will be closed automatically about 5 seconds after.

Address Notifiation

1 Command Devicel Notation : C00l It can be registered as Analog tag only.l It is used to command Device Scan to Xpanel. Only Writing is available

2 Read Buffer Devicel Notation : Bnn.mm.xx

i. nn : It means Received order, (0 15)ii. mm : It means nth time amount received data, (0 5)iii. Received data per device is 6Byte and it is fixed.iv. xx : Location of Bit, Only digital tag is available to use, (0 7)

ex) Analog, Word : B0.3 , B12.5 , B15.0Digital : B0.4.0 , B1.3.7 , B14.2.5

• It is used to word tag, word length should be less than 6.• Read only. Not support Writing.

27.39 SAIA S-BUS

This document described the SAIA S-BUS communication driver for Xpanel. This driver support the data mode

S-BUS protocol.

This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between Xpanel and SAIA PCD families

via data mode S-BUS protocol.


CIMON-Xpanel632


Createa newDevice




database


Selectadevicetype

I/O Device type : " SAIA S-BUS "

After selecting the 'OK' button of previous step, ‘Serial communication Configuration’ dialog box will

be popped




In this window, select the 'Device Type' as ‘SAIA S-BUS’ and configure the proper serial

communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with the device's configuration.

Createastation


In this dialog box, all the connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the XPanel.


CIMON-Xpanel634




Station Type Choose the type of connected device. "PCD Family" type is the only supported.



16Bit Data Swap This field has no effect in SAIA S-BUS driver.

32Bit Data Swap This field has no effect in SAIA S-BUS driver.

Using Checksum This field has no effect in SAIA S-BUS driver.

Comm.ErrorMessage Pop Up

If this item is checked, XPanel displays a communication error notification


Otherwise(unchecked), XPanel does not display the message at data receive

error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error,



the notification message is popped up. This message box will be closed


Communication Setup : SAIA PCD Family

Following picture shows the configuration with PG5 tool from SAIA.

Open the "Hardware Settings" dialog box and give the S-BUS station number to use in the "S-Bus" tab.

Move to the "Serial" tab and configure the communication parameters.

These parameters should be matched with those of Xpanle's. Note that the "S-Bus" combo box must be

configured as "Data".

CIMON-Xpanel636


The communication parameters can be set in IL program of SAIA PCD. Following program is a sample IL

codes for communication port setup.

This sample codes are programmed for PCD2.M150 CPU with PCD7 F120 module.

$SASI

TEXT 100 "UART:19200,,,50;"

"MODE:SS1;" ; When PCD is a slave in network

"DIAG:F100,R998;"

$ENDSASI

XOB 16

SASI 1 ; When using the channel #1

100

EXOB

COB 0

0

ECOB




Following table shows the list of valid address range for each memory area.

The symbol character has to be placed in the first position of address string.

Area Symbol Word Notation Bit Notation Read Write

Input I I0000 - I8191 O X

Output O O0000 - O8191 O O

Flag F F0000 - F8191 O O

Timer T T0000 - T1599 O O

Counter C C0000 - C1599 O O

Register R R0000 - R4095 O O




CIMON-Xpanel638


Connection

example -

RS232C :

PCD2.M150

with PCD7

F120

Above picture shows the RS232C and RS422/485 ports of Xpanel. Refer to the manual of your device for

signal description. In case of the

RS232C ports, Xpanel provides the standard DB9 RS232C pin assignment.


Following table shows the list of functions that are supported by 'SIEMENS S7-200 PPI Direct'



Block Data Read O

Block Data Write O

String Real Tag O

Word Swap O

Dword Swap O

Block Data

Read

This function makes it possible that is bulk data reading at a time.

It will be applied when you use recipe, data bridge and trends at the Xpanel.



Block Data

Write

This function makes it possible that is bulk data writing at a time.


String Real

Tag

It makes the device as the serialized memory so you can communicate string data

of Xpanel with PLC.

Word Swap This function swaps bytes of all word or double work sized data. It depends upon


Dword Swap This function swaps word of all double word sized data. It depends upon 32Bit Data

Swap configuration.

27.40 SICK RFID Reader Enet

This driver provides the function of ethernet communication with SICK RFID Reader(RFH620

model).




CIMON-Xpanel640


I/O Device Name : Write device name. This name will be used with Station name

when you register tags in Database.

Select a devicetype

I/O Device type : " SICK RFID Reader Enet "

After selecting the ‘OK’ button of previous step,

Select “SICK RFID Reader Enet” and set up as following.

Set up configuration as below• Device Type : SICK RFID Reader Enet• Protocol : TCP• Time Out : 15 ~ 30 (Delay time of response frame. You can select it

from 15 to 30) Retry No. : 1 (To avoid sending the same frame, it must be 1.)



XPanel.




Station Name Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database

window accompanied with the ‘Device Name’.

Station Type Select the “RFH620”.

Network ID No effect

IP Address Write IP address of RFID Reader.

Socket Port No 2112 is default value. (It is subject to change according toReader’s type.)

16Bit DataSwap

No effect

32Bit DataSwap

No effect

UsingChecksum

No effect

Comm.ErrorMessage PopUp

No effect


Memory address is as following.

CIMON-Xpanel642


Devicename

Tag type W/R Address Description

D AnalogString

W/R D0 ~ D255 - It is used to indicate value ofRFID Tag.

- The Block size is 4Byte and itcan save 4words or 4Byte data.

- If you write value to D devicetag, It will read and displaydata as tag size.

W AnalogString

W W0 ~ W255 - It is used to change the valueof RFID Tag.

- Only writing is possible andthere is no status value.

- Size must be setup by 4ByteEx) Analog Tag

UINT32, INT32, Float andetc.

String TagLength of String: 4, 8, 12,

16..- If you write value to ‘W’ devicetag, it change value of RFID Tagas tag data size.

S Analog W/R S0 - It is used to indicate finalcommunication status.40 : Time out (No response)Otherwise is error of Reader(Refer to Reader’s manual)

- UIN8 is used as Data type.

D : It is used to read code which is saved in RFID Tag. It can save by block and 4Byte is savedin a Block. writing tag value runs, it read RFID Tag and update tag value.Refer to below String.

- String starting with “I”: Initialize connected TCP Socket.- String starting with “D”: Initialize communication status and received Tag data.

W : It is used to change code value which is saved in RFID Tag. It can be used by 4Byte andonly writing is possible.S : It is used to check final communication status. Data type is UINT8.

Ex 1) In case that you want to read the saved 16 words starting from Block 0 of RFID Tag1. Register 16 length string real tag to Database.

A. String Real TagB. IO address : D00C. Length Of String: 16



2. Write tag value to String Real tag that you just registered above as you readvalue.A. In case that the tag name is “STR_00” that you registered as String Real TagB. STR_00 = “”;C. Assign estimated value because there is no writing value at Step B.D. Communication result will display if “S00” tag is registered in IO address.

Ex 2) In case that you want to re-write 16 length string from Block 0 to 3 of RFID Tag.1. Register 16 length string real tag to Database.

A. String Real TagB. IO address : W00C. Length Of String : 16

2. Write tag value to String Real tag as you write value.A. In case that the tag name is “WSTR_00” that you registered as String Real

TagB. WSTR_00 = “ABCDER1234567890”;C. Input String will be saved by 4 from Block 0.

- Block 0 : “ABCD”- Block 1 : “ER12”- Block 2 : “3456”- Block 3 : “7890”

D. If string is over 16, only 16 string is saved.E. If string is less than 16, least number is initialized to 0.

Reader Setup

(1) Install “SOPAS engineering Tool”Download “SOPAS engineering Tool” from SICK homepage and install it.

(2) Run “SOPAS Single Device”Open “SOPAS Single Device” program.

(3) Connect deviceConnect Reader by nell modem cable and then click “Search connected devices”

CIMON-Xpanel644


Select “RFH620” and click the “Next” in Connection Wizard window.

Select ‘Standard Protocol’ and click ‘Configure interface’



Select COM port and use standard setup of ‘Advanced Tab’

CIMON-Xpanel646


Click ‘OK’ to finish Configure interface setup and then click ‘Next’ to move next step. It starts to find out Com port and display result on ‘Found Device’

Select found device and click ‘Next’ to upload.



Device setup is displayed after uploading.

CIMON-Xpanel648


Move to ‘Ethernet’ tap and setup IP Address and Subnet Mask. Reboot button is activated after setup. The changed setup is affected if you reboot.

Protocol/Output Format : Output Format #1Server/Client : ServerIP-Port : 2112 (In case that you change port number, go to Xpanel Designer IO Deviceand change Socket Port No. in Station.)


27.41 SIEMENS RK512/3964R

This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between Xpanel and Siemens

Simatic PLC (S5 and S7).

It supports the following families of Siemens Simatic S5 system.

· S5 : CPU 115U, 135U or 150U via communication card CP524 or CP525.



· S7 : CPU 315-2 via the communication card CP341-1

· S7 : CPU 412-1 via the communication card CP441-2

Communication Setup : PLC

This section describes how to set up the Siemens Simatic hardware. Use the information in this section in

conjunction with the Siemens publications associated with your PLC system.

The physical communication layer is performed via a serial RS232C link connected to a Siemens CP524 or

CP525 communication card.

The Siemens Simatic S5 system must contain a S5 unit of one of the following types : S5-115u, S5-135u,

S5-150u.

The communication protocol 3964R must be loaded into the CP525 module, and the CPU must be loaded

with the following Siemens

Function Blocks (FB) : Synchron, Send, Receive.

These system function blocks are used to establish the communication between the CPU and the CP525.

Depending on which type of CPU you use, different function blocks are required.

115U 135U 150U

Synchron FB249 FB125 FB185

Send FB244 FB120 FB180

Receive FB245 FB121 FB181


Createa newDevice

For creating a new device activate the menu ‘Tools’ -> ’I/O Devices’ or icon in tool-bar.


CIMON-Xpanel650



database


Selectadevicetype

I/O Device type : ' SIEMENS RK512/3964R '

After selecting the ‘OK’ button of previous step, ‘Serial Communication Configuration’ dialog box

will be popped up as shown in following picture.

In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘SIEMENS RK512/3964R’ and configure the proper serial




Createastation


In this dialog box, all the connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the Xpanel. Each

field can be configured with following rules.

CIMON-Xpanel652




Station Type Choose the ‘SIEMENS’. (No other type can be selected.)


Station No. This field has no effect.

RK512/3964(R) protocol has no station number. It is based on 1:1

communication environment.

16Bit Data

Swap



Almost all of the data type will be influenced by this option except INT8 /



UINT8 / BCD8 / UBCD8.

32Bit Data

Swap

This option swaps words of all double word sized data. Following diagram shows

an example of word swapping.

INT32 / UINT32 / BCD32 / UBCD32 / FLOAT type of TAG values will be


Using

Checksum

When the 3964R procedure was used, this option must be checked. Otherwise,

Xpanel uses 3964 procedure.

Comm. Error

Message pop

Up







Address Notation

The address of TAG in Xpanel has the following format


Analog [Symbol][DB Number]:[DW number] D10:1

Digital [Symbol][DB Number]:[DW number].[Bit Number] I:12.7

· DB Number : decimal number (0..255)

· DW number : decimal number (0..255)

· Bit Number : hexa-decimal number (0..F)

Symbol Area Example DB DW Type Access

D Data Block D1:120, D1:12.F 0-255 0-255 Word R/W

X Ext. Data Block X2:003, X2:3.F 0-255 0-255 Word R/W

F Flags F:12, F:12.7 - 0-255 BYTE R

I Inputs I:008, I:008.7 - 0-127 BYTE R

Q Outputs Q:004, Q:004.7 - 0-127 BYTE R

CIMON-Xpanel654


27.42 SIEMENS S7 Ethernet


Simatic S7 PLCs.


· S7-300 CPU via the communication card CP343-1 IT

· S7-400 CPU via the communication card CP443-1 IT


Createa newDevice



I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of database


Selecta

I/O Device type : ' SIEMENS S7 Ethernet '



devicetype

After selecting the ‘OK’ button of previous step, ‘Ethernet Communication Configuration’ dialog box will be


In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘SIEMENS S7 Ethernet’ and ‘TCP’ protocol.

This driver supports only TCP/IP protocol stack.

Createastation



Each fields can be configured with following rules.

CIMON-Xpanel656



This name will be used in the database window accompanied with the ‘Device Name’.

Station Type Choose the ‘S7’. (No other type can be selected.)

Network ID This network ID is a combination of CPU’s rack and slot

number.

This ID must be given by decimal number with following

format.

(000..714)


Socket Port

Number

Don’t change the default number (102).

This number is a TCP/IP port which is opened by PLC for communication service.

16Bit Data

Swap





Almost all of the data type will be influenced by this option except INT8 / UINT8 / BCD8 /

UBCD8.

32Bit Data

Swap



INT32 / UINT32 / BCD32 / UBCD32 / FLOAT type of TAG values will be influenced by this

option.

Fixed Xpanel

Socket Port /

Xpanel Socket

Port No.

If this option was checked, Xpanel will use only one port defined in "Xpanel Socket Port No."

field for connection with PLC. Otherwise, Xpanelwill change the port at every TCP connection

or communication error.

This option is provided for Xpanel to deal with various TCP port management ways of PLC.

Some PLC has a limit on the number of TCP services. In that case, this option can be a help.

The actual effect of this option on PLC cannot be described here. Because, there are too many

kinds of PLC and the response in PLC is entirely dependant on the specification of PLC and

engineer’s experience. The default setting of this option is unchecked state.

Comm. Error

Message pop

Up

If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification message at every Rx

and Tx error.

Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data receive error. Only when

there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error, the notification message is

popped up. This message box will be closed automatically about 5 seconds after.

Address Notation



Analog [Symbol][DB Number,][Address] DB1,1

Digital [Symbol][DB Number,][Address].[Bit Number] DB1,2.7

· DB Number, : decimal number (0..65535) followed by comma (,). It is used in data block (DB) addressing

only.

For other types of memory, this field must be omitted.

CIMON-Xpanel658



· Bit Number : decimal number (0..7)


Symbol Description Word Notation Bit Notation Type Access

PI Peripheral Input PI001 PI001.7 Analog/Digital R/W

I Input I002 I002.7 Analog/Digital R/W

Q Output Q003 Q003.7 Analog/Digital R/W

M Memory M004 M004.7 Analog/Digital R/W

DB Data Block DB01,01 DB01,01.7 Analog/Digital R/W

T Timer T005 - Analog R

C Counter C006 - Analog R

The device T and C (timer and counter) must be defined as UBCD16 typed TAG for normal data

manipulation.

Following picture shows the data type configuration window of Xpanel database.




Connect

through the

Ethernet

HUB

Direct

connection

27.43 SIEMENS S7 MPI


Simatic S7 PLCs via MPI protocol.


· S7-200/300/400


Createa new For creating a new device activate the menu ‘Tools’- >’I/O Devices’ or icon in tool-bar.

CIMON-Xpanel660


Device Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.


database


Selectadevicetype

I/O Device type : ' SIEMENS S7 MPI '

After selecting the ‘OK’ button of previous step, ‘Serial Communication Configuration’ dialog box

will be popped up as




In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘SIEMENS S7 MPI’ and appropriate communication

parameters.

Those parameters must be matched with the PLC.

Loca

l

I D

Give a station (node) number of Xpanel. This number does not duplicated with the one of

PLC. The node number can be the integer value between 0 and 126.

Net

wo

rk

Op

Designate the maximum station (node) number of connected network. This can be one of

following numbers. If the Xpanel is the unique master in network, the integer value of

(1,000+maximum station number) should be designated.

CIMON-Xpanel662


t

Createastation


connected PLC

stations can be configured and registered to the Xpanel. Each field can be configured with following

rules.





Name’.

Station Type Choose the ‘S7 MPI’. (No other type can be selected.)



16Bit Data

Swap



Almost all of the data type will be influenced by this option except INT8 / UINT8 /

BCD8 / UBCD8.

32Bit Data

Swap



INT32 / UINT32 / BCD32 / UBCD32 / FLOAT type of TAG values will be influenced

by this option.

Using

Checksu

m


Comm. Error

Message pop

Up


message at every Rx and Tx error.Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not


(writing a TAG value to the station) error, the notification message is popped up.

This message box will be closed automatically about 5 seconds after.

Address Notation


CIMON-Xpanel664



Analog [Symbol][DB Number,][Address] DB1,1

Digital [Symbol][DB Number,][Address].[Bit Number] DB1,2.7

· DB Number, : decimal number (0..65535) followed by comma (,). It is used in data block (DB)

addressing only.

For other types of memory, this field must be omitted.





PI Peripheral Input PI001 PI001.7 Analog/Digital R/W

I Input I002 I002.7 Analog/Digital R/W

Q Output Q003 Q003.7 Analog/Digital R/W

M Memory M004 M004.7 Analog/Digital R/W

DB Data Block DB01,01 DB01,01.7 Analog/Digital R/W

T Timer T005 - Analog R

C Counter C006 - Analog R

The device T and C (timer and counter) must be defined as UBCD16 typed TAG for normal data

manipulation.

Following picture shows the data type configuration window of Xpanel database.




SSW7 Adapter

The cable supplied with the adapter can be directly connected to the Xpanel

without any change.

If there is some need to make the cable by yourself, refer to the following picture..

27.44 SIEMENS S7 PPI Direct

This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between Xpanel and SIEMENS

SIMATIC S7-200 PLCs via PPI protocol.

CIMON-Xpanel666



Createa newDevice



I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of database


Selectadevicetype

I/O Device type : ' SIEMENS S7 PPI DirectI '

After selecting the 'OK' button of previous step, ‘Serial communication Configuration’ dialog box will be

popped up as




In this window, select the 'Device Type' as ‘SIEMENS S7 PPI Direct’ and appropriate communication

parameters.

Those parameters must be matched with the PLC. Communication parameters should be configured as

shown

in the following table.

Baud Rate 9600 or 19200 (must be matched with the one of PLC)

Parity Even

Data Bits 8 Bits

CIMON-Xpanel668


Stop Bits 1 Bit

Comm.Type RS485

Local ID The Xpanel occupies the station ID '0' (zero) for its network address.

This Xpanel's address is fixed and cannot be changed.

Createastation

Move to the ‘Station’ tab of 'Serial Communication Configuration' dialog box. In this dialog box, all the connected

PLC

stations can be configured and registered to the Xpanel. Each field can be configured with following rules.




This name will be used in the database window accompanied with the ‘Device Name’.

Station Type Choose the ‘S7’. (No other type can be selected.)



16Bit Data Swap This option swaps bytes of all word or double word sized data.


Almost all of the data type will be influenced by this option except INT8 / UINT8 / BCD8 /

UBCD8.

32Bit Data Swap This option swaps words of all double word sized data.


INT32 / UINT32 / BCD32 / UBCD32 / FLOAT type of TAG values will be influenced by this

option.

Using Checksum This field has no effect.

Comm. Error

Message pop Up If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification message at

every Rx and Tx error.Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at

data receive error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station)



Communication Setup : S7-200

Following picture shows the screen shot of STEP 7-Micro/Win.

The network address and communication speed (Baud rate) of PLC are configured in this dialog box.

CIMON-Xpanel670


Please note that those set data should be matched with the device configuration of Xpanel.

Address Notation

The address of TAG in Xpanel has the following format


Analog [Symbol][Address] VW064

Digital [Symbol][Address].[Bit Number] or[Symbol][Address][Bit Number]

M012.3 orM0123





I Input - I7.7 Digital R

Q Output - Q7.7 Digital R/W

M Internal Memory - M31.7 Digital R/W

SM Special Memory - SM85.7 Digital R/W

T Timer - T127 Digital R

C Counter - C127 Digital R



IW Input IW7 - Analog R

QW Output QW7 - Analog R/W

MW Internal Memory MW31 - Analog R/W

SMW Special Memory SMW85 - Analog R/W

VW Variable Memory VW4095 - Analog R/W

TW Timer SV TW127 - Analog R

CW Counter SV CW127 - Analog R






Block Data Read O

Block Data Write O

String Real Tag O

Word Swap O

Dword Swap O

Block Data

Read



CIMON-Xpanel672


Block Data

Write



String Real Tag It makes the device as the serialized memory so you can communicate string data of Xpanel

with PLC.

Word Swap This function swaps bytes of all word or double work sized data. It depends upon 16Bit Data

Swap configuration.

Dword Swap This function swaps word of all double word sized data. It depends upon 32Bit Data Swap

configuration.

27.45 YOKOGAWA Personal Computer Link

This Manual explains about the method of CIMON-Xpanel communication with YOKOGAWA PLC using

RS232C or RS422/485.





Createa newDevice

To configure the communication device of YOKOGAWA PLC, Select 'Tools' - 'I/O device' in

the menu or icon in

tool-bar, and then “I/O device configuration” dialog box will be shown up. And then click [new

device] button.


following figure.




window of database


Selectadevicetype

I/O Device type : ' YOKOGAWA Computer Link Protocol '


CIMON-Xpanel674


Comm.Port COM1


must select “COM1”.

When RS-232 communication type of COM1 port is used, 9P DSUB

connector is used.

And When RS-422/485 communication type of COM1 port is used, 5P plug

connector is used.

If you use COM1 port, you cannot use RS-232 and RS-422/485 together,

but you can use only one type.



Baud rate 9,600





Parity bit None

Data bits 8 bits

Stop bits 1 bit

RTS/CTS OFF



implement. Because of RS-485 communication port of the Xpanel supports

Auto Toggle function so Xpanel doesn’t use this function. This example

doesn’t use RTS-CTS control.

Retry No. 3

If communication failed with the kind of field equipments, it will retry as the

number of this.

Time Out 30

If you input as the number of 30 then it’s time out count will be 30 seconds.

Using Dial Up

Modem

Not Select


Createastation

Move to [Station] tab at the “Serial Communication Configuration” Dialog Box and click [Add



CIMON-Xpanel676


Station Name ST





Station Type DirectNet


Station No 1




other.

16Bit Data

Swap


32Bit Data

Swap


Using

Checks

um


Comm. Error

Message pop

Up


message at every Rx and Tx error.Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does

not display the message at data receive error. Only when there is data

transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error, the notification

message is popped up. This message box will be closed automatically


Module Configuration

TransmissionSp

Remove side tab of Personal Computer Link Module and then configure Baud Rate with SW1.

The baud rate must be same as the speed which was configured in “Serial Communication

Configuration”.



eedSwitch :SW1

mode Baud rate (bps)

0 300

1 600

2 1200

3 2400

4 4800

5 9600

6 19200

The baud rate is set as 9600 bps by selecting Mode 5 in configuration in this example.

DataFormatSwitch:SW2

You can configure about the communication in this switch.

This configuration must be same which was configured in “Serial Communication Configuration”.

No. Function OFF ON

1 Data Length 7 bits 8 bits

2 Parity None Yes

3 Odd parity Even Parity

4 Stop Bit 1 bit 2 bits

5 Check Sum None Yes

6 Termination Char None Yes

7 Protection None Yes

8

Data Length 8 bits

Parity None

Stop Bit 1bit

Check Sum Yes

Check sum will be used to protect communication data safely from the

transmission error.

Termination Char Yes (Attach <CR> at the end of the frame.)

Protection None

Wiring Diagram


CIMON-Xpanel678


RS-232C : Null Modem

Xpanel connects three lines to PLC. PLC connects lines such as above figure. If you

don’t connect lines

to PLC as the showing figure, it can’t transmit data to other field equipments but can

receive data so that

not to be accomplished communication.

RS-422




RS-485




When Xpanel is using RS-485, it connected with SDA and SDB but disconnect with

RDA and RDB.



Device Memory range


Device Sym F3SP20 /F3SA20

F3SP30 /F3SA30

F3SP21 F3SP25 F3SP35

Input X X00201 X61364 X00201 X61364 X00201 X71364 X00201 X71364 X00201 X71364

Output Y Y00201 Y61364 Y00201 Y61364 Y00201 Y71364 Y00201 Y71364 Y00201 Y71364

Internal I I00001 I04096 I00001 I08192 I00001 I04096 I00001 I08192 I00001 I16384

common E E00001 E02048 E00001 E02048 E00001 E02048 E00001 E04096 E00001 E04096

Link L L00001 L01024 L00001 L01024 L00001 L11024 L00001 L71024 L00001 L71024

Special M M00001 M00512 M00001 M00512 M00001 M02048 M00001 M09984 M00001 M09984

Data D D00001 D05120 D00001 D08192 D00001 D05120 D00001 D08192 D00001 D08192

File B - - - B00001 B32768 B00001 B32768

Link W W00001 W01024

W00001 W01024

W00001 W11024

W00001 W71024 W00001 W71024

Special Z Z00001 Z00256 Z00001 Z00256 Z00001 Z00512 Z00001 Z00512 Z00001 Z00512

Index V V00001 V00016 V00001 V00016 V00001 V00032 V00001 V00032 V00001 V00032

Common R R00001 R01024 R00001 R01024 R00001 R01024 R00001 R04096 R00001 R04096

Timer T TU0001 TU0256 TU0001 TU1024 TU0001 TU0256 TU0001 TU1024 TU0001 TU2048

TP0001 TP0256 TP0001 TP1024 TP0001 TP0256 TP0001 TP1024 TP0001 TP2048

TI0001 TI0256 TI0001 TI1024 TI0001 TI0256 TI0001 TI1024 TI0001 TI2048

TS0001 TS0256 TS0001 TS1024 TS0001 TS0256 TS0001 TS1024 TS0001 TS2048

Counter C CU0001 CU0256

CU0001 CU1024 CU0001 CU0256 CU0001 CU1024 CU0001 CU1024

CP0001 CP0256 CP0001 CP1024 CP0001 CP0256 CP0001 CP1024 CP0001 CP1024

CI0001 CI0256 CI0001 CI1024 CI0001 CI0256 CI0001 CI1024 CI0001 CI1024

CS0001 CS0256 CS0001 CS1024 CS0001 CS0256 CS0001 CS1024 CS0001 CS1024

Error Code



CIMON-Xpanel680


Error Code(EC1)

Semantics Probable causes

01 CPU number Error CPU number is out of allowable value which range is 1~4.

02 Command Error No command. It can’t execute command

03 Device Specification Error No device. It doesn’t adequate use of WORD in the bit device.

04 Value outside the setting range When you write a Bit Value, you must use only 0 or 1.

While you write Word, it is out of 0000~FFFF.

05 Data count out of range The number of Bit/Word exceeded permitted range.

The number of data or device parameter is not same.

06 Monitor Error Monitor operates without BRS/WRS.

07 CPU Type Error It is not Basic CPU.

08 Parameter Error If it is not specified parameter by this time, it will be invalidated.

41 Communication Error Error occurred while it communicated.

42 Checksum Error Checksum dislike each other.

43 Internal Buffer Overflow Receiving data is over than allowable number.

44 Timeout while receiving characters ETX data receiving fail. Timeout is 5 seconds.

27.46 Fuji Micrex SX Ethernet

This document describes the Micrex SX Ethernet (Fuji Electric) communication driver for XPanel. This driver

supports the TCP/IP.

Supported communication modules of SX PLC are NP1L-ET1 and NP1L-ET2.


Createa newDevice






window of database


Selectadevicetype

I/O Device type : " FUJI Micrex SX "

After selecting the ‘OK’ button of previous step,

‘Ethernet Communication Configuration’ dialog box will be popped up as shown in following

picture.

CIMON-Xpanel682


In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘FUJI Micrex SX’ and configure the proper Ethernet


Take note that the FUJI Micrex SX driver supports TCP/IP protocol stack only.

Since XPanel communicates with the PLC in ‘loader command communication mode’.

•Initialize the Tx Frame When Timeout Occurs

This option provides a safety solution for communication troubled situation. If this option was

checked

and there was a communication error, the system would delete the remaining control frames

(data transmit frames from XPanel to PLC)

which were not transmitted but queued in communication buffer of XPanel.

Createastation



XPanel.




StationName

Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window accompanied


StationType

Choose the type of connected PLC among the “NP1L-ETn”.

NetworkID

Be ignored in runtime.

SocketPortNo

The socket port number should be matched with the [reference number of local port

+251] or [reference number of local port+253]. The reference number of local port is

configured in DWin300 as shown in the following figure.

CIMON-Xpanel684


In this example, the socket port number should be 507(256+251) or 509(256+253)

16BitDataSwap

No effect

32BitDataSwap

No effect

UsingChecksum

No effect

Comm.ErrorMessag



Otherwise(unchecked), XPanel does not display the message at data receive error. Only

when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error, the notification

message is popped up. This message box will be closed automatically about 5 seconds

after.



ePopUp


Following table shows the list of valid address symbols and its usage examples. The symbol character has

to be placed in the first position of address string.

AddressFormat


Analog [Symbol][WordNo] %MW1.6 or %MD1.6

Digital [Symbol][WordNo][.][BitNo] %MW1.6.12 or %MX1.6.12

The ‘WordNo’ and ‘BitNo’ are represented by decimal number. (BitNo : 0..15)

SupportedSymbols

Symbol WordNo Range Description

%IX %IW %ID 0 512 Input

%QX %QW %QD 0 512 Output

%MX1. %MW1. %MD1. 0 131071 Standard Memory

%MX3. %MW3. %MD3. 0 32767 Retain Memory

%MX10. %MW10. %MD10. 0 511 System Memory

The memory areas listed above are provided for general purposes.

The actual range of each area should be checked with the manual of connected CPU type.

XPanel treats the word address (%?W_) and double word address (%?D_) as same.

addresses represent a single word memory.

The actual data type should be declared in the ‘Advance’ configuration tab in TAG database as shown in

the following picture.

CIMON-Xpanel686









2 Orange Orange 2

3 Green/W Green/W 3

4 Blue Blue 4

5 Blue/W Blue/W 5

6 Green Green 6

7 Brown/W Brown/W 7



8 Brown Brown 8




2 Orange Green 2


4 Blue Blue 4

5 Blue/W Blue/W 5

6 Green Orange 6

7 Brown/W Brown/W 7

8 Brown Brown 8





Block Data Read O

Block Data Write O

String Real Tag O

Word Swap O

Dword Swap O

Block Data

Read



Block Data

Write



String Real

Tag

It makes the device as the serialized memory so you can communicate string data

of Xpanel with PLC.

Word Swap This function swaps bytes of all word or double work sized data. It depends upon


Dword Swap This function swaps word of all double word sized data. It depends upon 32Bit Data

Swap configuration.

CIMON-Xpanel688


27.47 ALLENBRADLEY DF1

This driver provides the software interface and communication protocao between XPanel and MicroLogix

PLCs.


Create a newSetup For creating a new device activate the menu ‘Tools’- >’I/O Devices’ or icon in tool-bar.



This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of database accompanied by the

‘Station Name’.




I/O Device Name : ‘Allen Bradley DF1’

After selecting the ‘OK’ button of previous step, ‘Serial Communication Configuration ’ dialog


In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘Allen Bradley DF1’ and appropriate communication

parameters.

Those parameters must be matched with the PLC.

Communication parameters should be configured as shown in the following table.

Baud Rate must be matched with the one of PLC

Parity None

Data Bits 8 Bits

CIMON-Xpanel690


Stop Bits 1Bits

Comm.Type RS232



Create a station Move to the ‘Station’ tab of ‘Serial Communication Configuration’ dialog box. In this dialog box, all

the connected

PLC stations can be configured and registered to the XPanel. Each field can be configured with

following rules.

Station Name Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window accompanied with the‘Device Name’.

Station Type Choose the ‘SLC500/MicroLogix’. (No other type can be selected.)



CIMON-Xpanel692




Using

Checksum

This field has no meaning in this driver.

Comm. Error

Message Pop

Up

If this item is checked, XPanel displays a communication error notification

message



receive error.

Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error,

the


automatically


Communication Setup : RSLogix

Following picture shows the screen shot of RSLogix. The network address and communication speed

(Baud Rate) of PLC are configured in this

dialog box. Error Detection must be selected to BCC and Driver is selected to Full Duplex.

Please note that those set data should be matched with the device configuration of XPanel.



Address Notation


Symbol Description Word Notation Bit Notation Access

I Input File I:00.000-I:08.255I:00.000/00-I:08.255/15

R/W

O Output File O:00.000-O:08.255 R/W

S Status File S:0-S163 M31.7 R/W

B Bit File B3:0-B3:255 SM85.7 R/W

T Timer File T4:0-T4:255 T127 R/W

C Counter File C5:0-C5:255 C127 R/W

N Integer File N7:0-N7:255 - R/W

F Float File F8:0-F8:255 - R/W

CIMON-Xpanel694



27.48 METRONIX APD

This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between XPanel and METRONIX

APD.


Createanewdevice





I/O Device Name



Selectadevicetype

Select a device type : Metronix APD



CIMON-Xpanel696


In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as 'Metronix APD' and appropriate communication parameters.

Ensure that those parameters are matched with the device’s configuration.

Createastation



following rules.



Station NameGive a name to the Device. This name will be used in the database window


Station Type Choose the ‘APD-VS Series’. (Another type can’t be selected.)


Station No. This number must be matched with the one of Device.


CIMON-Xpanel698




Comm. Error

Message Pop Up







Address Notation

Device DescriptionWord

Bit AccessUINT32 INT32

%MD Menu Data %MD000 ~ %MD999%MD000.0~%MD000.31

~%MD999.0~%MD999.31

R/W

AI Servo State AI000 ~ AI012AI000.0~AI000.31

~AI012.0~AI012.31

R

DOOperation

- DO000~DO011 R/W

AO AO000 ~ AO012 - R/W

Menu data address configuration

[Ex] Current Sate Pd-001 -> %MD000

Current Speed Pd-002 -> %MD001

Command Speed Pd- -> %MD002

Servo State Check address configuration

Address Description

AI0 Current Speed

AI1 Command Speed

AI2 Current Pulse

AI3 Command Pulse

AI4 Current Load

AI5 Peak Load



AI6 I/O State

AI7 DC Volt

AI8 Speed Refer

AI9 Speed Feedback

AI10 Torque Refer

AI11 Torque Feedback

AI12 Servo State

Servo State Set address configuration : Digital

Address Description

DO0 Alarm Reset

DO1 Alarm History Clear

DO2 Menu Initialize

DO3 Current offset store

DO4 I/O State initialization

Speed Driving

Address Description Tag Type

DO5 Direction Digital

DO6 Write : Speed, Acc & Dec time, Time Digital

AO000 Speed Analog

AO001 Current offset store Analog

AO002 I/O State initialization Analog

AO003 Time Analog

Note 1.

Direction : Configure rotation direction of motor. (0 : CCW, 1: CW)

Speed : Configure driving speed. (unit : 9999.9 r/min)

Acceleration time : Configure reaching time to regular speed by acceleration. (unit : 99.99)

Deceleration time : Configure reaching time to regular speed by deceleration. (unit : 99.99)

Time : Configure driving time from start to stop. (unit : 9999)

Note 2.

n After you configure Direction, Speed, Acc, Dec and Time, write digital value to D06 address

then Speed Driving Command will be executed.

n To show floating point data, configure data scale at database.

CIMON-Xpanel700


Position Driving


DO7 Write : Position, Speed, Acc & Dec Time Digital

AO004 Position Digital

AO005 Speed Analog

AO006 Acceleration Analog

Ao007 Time Analog

Note 1.

Direction : Configure rotation direction of motor. (0 : CCW, 1: CW)

Speed : Configure driving speed. (unit : 9999.9 r/min)

Acceleration time : Configure reaching time to regular speed by acceleration. (unit : 99.99)

Deceleration time : Configure reaching time to regular speed by deceleration. (unit : 99.99)

Note 2.

n After you configure Direction, Speed, Acc, Dec and Time, write digital value to D06 address

then Speed Driving Command will be executed.



n To show floating point data, configure data scale at database.

Gain tuning


DO011 Write : Speed, Distance, Tuning range Digital

AO010 Speed Analog

AO011 Distance Analog

AO012 Tuning range Analog

n After you configure Speed, Distance and Tuning range write digital value to D06 address

then Position Driving Command will be executed.

Command Address Description Remark

Menu Data %MD000~%MD999 Menu Data R / W

State Setting

DO0 Alarm Reset

W

DO1 Alarm History Clear

DO2 Menu Initialize

DO3 Current offset Save

DO4 I/O State Initialize

Servo StateCheck

AI0 Current Speed

R

AI1 Command Speed

AI2 Current Pulse

AI3 Command Pulse

AI4 Current Load

AI5 Peak Load

AI6 I/O State

AI7 DC Voltage

AI8 Speed Refer

AI9 Speed Feedback

AI10 Torque Refer

AI11 Torque Feedback

AI12 Servo State

Speed

DO5 Direction

W

DO6 Write:Speed,Acc,Dec,Time

AO000 Speed

AO001 Acceleration Time

AO002 Deceleration Time

CIMON-Xpanel702


AO003 Driving Time

Position

DO7 Write:Pos,Speed,Acc,Dec

W

AO004 Position

AO005 Speed

AO006 Acceleration Time

AO007 Deceleration Time

Auto Driving DO8 Auto Driving W

Stop AO008 After stop, program information reset W

EmergencyStop

DO9 Emergency Stop W

Time AO009When driving start after stop, it makes

continuous drivingW

StartingPoint

DrivingDO10

Starting Point Driving by configured modeat parameter.

W

Gain Tuning

DO11 Write : Speed, Distance, Tuning range

WAO010 Speed

AO011 Distance

AO012 Tuning range




27.49 FARA N70/700 PLUS

Overview

This ducument describes the FARA N70 / 700 PLUS communication driver for Xpanel.Communication available PLC is : NX7, N70 PLUS, N700 PLUS


Create a newSetup For creating a new device activate the menu ‘Tools’- >’I/O Devices’ or icon in

tool-bar.



This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of database accompanied by


CIMON-Xpanel704



I/O Device Name : ‘FARA N70/700 PLUS’


Configuration’ dialog box will be popped up as shown in following picture.

In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ as ‘FARA N70/700 PLUS’ and configure the

proper serial communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched

with the device's configuration.


dialog box, all the connected

PLC stations can be configured and registered to the XPanel. Each field can be




Station Name Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window accompaniedwith the ‘Device Name’.

Station Type Choose the type of connected PLC among the 'FARA N70/N700 PULS."





Using

Checksum

This field has no effect. This driver is always checking theBCC.

Comm. Error

Message Pop

Up




CIMON-Xpanel706


Otherwise(unchecked), XPanel does not display the message

at data receive error.

Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the

station) error, the

notification message is popped up. This message box will be

closed automatically



Following table shows the list of valid address range used FARA PLC for each address area. The

symbol character has to be placed in the first positon of address string. The address number follows



Ext. Input/Output R R000 - R127 R000.0 - R127.15

LINK L L000 - L063 L000.0 - L063.15

Internal Relay M M000 - M127 M000.0 - M127.15

KEEP Relay K K000 - K127 K000.0 - K127.15

Special internalOutput

F F000 - F015 F000.0 - F015.15

Word RegisterTimer/Counter

W W000 - W3071

Switch Configuration

PIN No Switch Content Dip Switch 1

1OFF Run by stored internal RAM

ON Run by stored at FLASH ROM

2OFF RS-232C Communication(IBM-PC)

ON RS-485 Communication(For Programmer)

3 4

OFF OFF 9600 bps Board rate

ON OFF 38400 bps Board rate

OFF ON 19200 bps Board rate

ON ON 4800 bps Board rate




[XPANEL COM1 / COM2 RS232C]

27.50 Samsung BRAIN SPC Series

Overview

This document describes the Samsung BRAIN SPC Series communication driver for Xpanel.


Create a newdevice For creating a new device activate the menu ‘Tools’- >’I/O Devices’ or icon in

tool-bar.


CIMON-Xpanel708



This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of database accompanied by





I/O Device Name : ‘SAMSUNG BRAIN Series’


Configuration’ dialog box will be popped up as shown in following picture.

In this window, select the ‘Device Type’ SAMSUNG BRAIN Series’ and configure the

proper serial communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched

with the device's configuration.


dialog box, all the connected

PLC stations can be configured and registered to the XPanel. Each field can be


CIMON-Xpanel710


Station Name Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window accompaniedwith the ‘Device Name’.

Station Type Choose the type of connected PLC among the 'SPC Series."





Using

Checksum

This field has no effect. This driver is always checking theBCC.

Comm. Error

Message Pop

Up




Otherwise(unchecked), XPanel does not display the message



at data receive error.

Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the

station) error, the

notification message is popped up. This message box will be

closed automatically



Following table shows the list of valid address range used FARA PLC for each address area. The

symbol character has to be placed in the first position of address string. The address number follows



Ext. Input / Output R R000 - R127 R000.0 - R127.15

LINK L L000 - L063 L000.0 - L063.15

Internal Relay M M000 - M127 M000.0 - M127.15

KEEP Relay K K000 - K127 K000.0 - K127.15

Special internal

OutputF F000 - F015 F000.0 - F015.15

Word Register

Timer / CounterW W000 - W3071


[XPANEL COM1 / COM2 RS232C]

CIMON-Xpanel712



Part

XXVIII

CIMON-Xpanel714


28 FAQ

Is there any question about CIMON - Xpanel ? See our FAQs.

See :

· Xpanel Page Update and Speed

· Xpanel IP Setting

· How to use Xpanel Printer

· How can I connect Xpanel and XpanelDesigner via USB port under Windows Vista?

· How can I display the engineering value from the raw value in my device?

· How can I export/import the Xpanel's TAG DB to/from Microsoft Excel or other 3rd vender program?

· Corrective Actions when font file delete is failed during download

· When Ethernet Loader is not operated

28.1 Xpanel Page Update and Speed

IN THIS TOPIC :

To quickly update a page(Fixed Background)

To quickly update a page(Draw Changed Object Only)

Reduce Page Size(Using 256 Bitmap)

To quickly update a page (Fixed Background)

If it arranges a lot of objects on the page in the work, update would be slower.

Considering the specificity, "Fixed Background" function makes the speed of update higher.

The "Fixed Background" function is registered to each page, and the page setting up the function of the

"Fixed Background" is handled as

the 'Object appointed with change’ and the 'Object not appointed with change’ are divided.

‘Object appointed with change’ is as follows.

· Object for which Visible, Blink, V-Size, H-Size, V-Move, H-Move, Color and Rotate are specified.

· When the change is specified for Group Object, All Object are handled as ‘Group object appointed

with change’

· Touch and Entry Data are not handled by the change.

· Tag Value, Date Time, String Value, Multi String, Trend Graph, Data Log and Alarm Summary are

handled as ‘Object appointed with change’.

FAQ 715


"Fi

xe

d

Ba

ck

gro

un

d"

Fu

nct

ion

Set

up

Select - Page for setting "Fixed Background" function in XpanelDesigner

Click - [Tools] -> [Page Setup]

Select - "Fixed Background" of Page Properties and click - [Ok] button

CIMON-Xpanel716


The upper page arranges the 'Tag Value Object' on Group object with the shape of a toothed wheel.

In case of the object not to set the "Fixed Background", it has picture renewal cycle for about 0.5sec

because all objects are drawn again when data updates. However, in case to set the "Fixed Background",

the picture renewal cycle is shorten because only the 'Tag Value Object' is drawn without drawing all

Objects with the shape of a toothed wheel.

To quickly update a page (Draw Changed Object Only)

Reduce the number of Objects to Quickly update a Page. Generally, if ‘Object appointed with change’ are

piled up by using ‘Draw Changed Object Only’,

the last changed Object is displayed normally.

The number difference between the general case and the case of using ‘Draw Changed Object Only’

FAQ 717


For example, if three objects designated with change like upper page are changed at the same time, all

objects inside the yellow circle are drawn again.

In this case, 12 Object will be drawn. However, if ‘Draw Changed Object Only’ is used, three objects will be

drawn again and the drawn time will be shorten to 1/4 time.

Caution when

using

'Draw

Changed

Object Only'

Avoid the piled-up the objects designated with change when using ‘Draw Changed

Object Only’

CIMON-Xpanel718


For instance, there are three quadrilaterals designated with color change.

In case not to use ‘Draw Changed Object Only’, the color of three quadrilaterals

are changed each other.

However, in case to use ‘Draw Changed Object Only’, the lastly changed object

is on the top of them.

'Draw

Changed

Object Only'

Setup

Select - Page for setting "Draw Changed Object Only" function in XpanelDesigner


Select - "Draw Changed Object Only" of Page Properties and click - [Ok] button

When using ‘Draw Changed Object Only’, Caution is as follows.

· When there are Objects designated with V-Move, H-Move and Rotate, "Draw

Changed Object Only" function doesn't operate.

· If objects that its Visible is decided by same tag are overlap, the under object is

always removed or covered due to the upper object.

· In case to use 'Fixed Background', it is filled with the background picture of the

area first value. If not, page background color would be filled.

Reduce Page Size (Using 256 Bitmap)

If the size of page file is big, there will be lots of errors at download and it will take much time to read the

page file.

Generally the page composed with basic objects doesn’t take big size. However, if the page is using many

FAQ 719


images, the size of the page file will be bigger.

In the case of it, if you check the "Using 256 bitmap" in the Page Properties, it would change 24 bit image

of page to the 8 bit image at download and also

it would contract the size about 1/2~1/3.

Instead of it, pixel data is changed, so the shapes of editing and Xpanel could be different slightly.

"Using 256

Bitmap"

Function Setup

Select - Page for setting "Using 256 Bitmap" function in XpanelDesigner


Select - "Using 256 Bitmap" of Page Properties and click - [Ok] button

28.2 Xpanel IP Setting

IN THIS TOPIC :

When the project that Ethernet I/O Device is registered is operating

Using Network Setting Window of Windows CE

Using Ethernet Loader

When the project that the Ethernet I/O Device is registered in Xpanel is operating

When the project that the Ethernet I/O Device is registered in Xpanel is operating, refer to the following

pictures.

"Xpanel Config" can be displayed by pressing three corners of touch area as follows.

CIMON-Xpanel720


Push the " SW Keyboard " button. For removing the ‘SW Keyboard’ from screen, push the ‘SW

Keyboard’ button again.

Push the " Comm. Config " button. -> Select - [Ethernet] in the I/O Device selection box

FAQ 721


IP Setting Window is displayed.

Change the IP Setting using 'SW Keyboard' and click the [OK] button of Communication Setup

window.

Click the [OK] button

Click the [OK] button to close the system

Using Network Setting Window of Windows CE

Close - Xpanel Program

When it is connected with ActiveSync, close - Xpanel Program by "Online -> Xpanel Program Stop”

When it is not connected with ActiveSync, close - Xpanel Program by [Exit] button of “Xpanel Config”

window

Xpanel wallpaper is displayed.

CIMON-Xpanel722


Touch the screen under to appear Taskbar . Execute the software keyboard by touching the icon at

the right corner of the task bar.

FAQ 723


Change the content of Settings window using software keyboard, and Click the [OK] button.

Close - [LAN91C111 Ethernet Driver] Settings window by button.

Close - [Network and Dial-up Connections] window by button.

Close the system by selecting 'Start -> Suspend' for storing the network settings permanently.

Using Ethernet Loader

* Ethernet Loader supports OS version 2.00 or late.

If the project is running, click the [Exit] button in the “Xpanel config” window.

Change - "IP" by using IP Input Keyboard

CIMON-Xpanel724


* If "DHCP" is not checked, IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway can be changed.

For application the changed configurations, select the [Apply this new setting] button.

Click the [OK] button then it will go on.

28.3 How to use Xpanel Printer

This manual explains "Printer Setup" and "Print Out Setup".

Xpanel can connect USB Printer that is support PCL. (USB Host support model)

IN THIS TOPIC :

Xpanel Printer Setup Print Out Setup

Xpanel Printer Setup

"Xpanel Config" can be displayed by pressing three corners of touch area as follows.

FAQ 725


Push the " SW Keyboard " button. For removing the ‘SW Keyboard’ from screen, push the ‘SW

Keyboard’ button again.

Push the " Printer " button.

CIMON-Xpanel726


Printer Select the printer type. Xpanel supports ‘PCL Inkjet’ and ‘PCL Laser’ printer

supporting PCL.

Port Select a port that the printer is connected.

· USB Printer : If a printer is connected to the Xpanel via the USB host port,

select the "LPT1:" The LPT1 port is automatically detected and displayed

when the printer is connected.

· Network Printer : If a printer is connected with the network,

select the "Network ". In this case, the ‘Net Path’ field must be configured as

following example.

Format : \ \PC_name\Printer_name

Example : \ \ k i m 4 0 \ c a n o n i r 2

Paper Size Select - Paper size of printer.

Draft Mode If this mode is not selected, the size of the output image decreases though the

image is clearly output

Color If you select “PCL Inkjet”, enable Print out with Color.

Print Range Select - All

Orientation Select - Print orientation

Margins Adjust - Print margins.

If setting is finished, push - [OK] button.

If the ‘Port’ is chosen as ‘Network’, the Xpanel tries to connect the PC through network and pops-up

following logon dialog box.

FAQ 727


Enter the user name and password to the logon dialog box above, and then push the button.

Following dialog box is displayed to Xpanel.

If [Yes] is chosen, the password entered will be stored in disk permanently.

Otherwise (in case of [No]), the Xpanel will ask the password whenever try to use the network printer.

Touch - [System Shutdown] of "Xpanel Config" window to save the setup data

(If the ‘System Shutdown’ was not executed, the setup data will be canceled and the previous one will

be restored when the system is restarted.)

To continue, push [OK] button. Xpanel will be shutdown.

Print Out Setup

Xpanel provides the ‘HardCopy()’ function for printing the screen image.

CIMON-Xpanel728


MakeaPrintButton

1. Select - Object to use print button from screen

a. Select - [Touch] in 'Object Config' and [Command Expression] in 'Action'

b. Input - HardCopy(); in Command. Click - [ O K ]

HardCopy() function outputs a present screen to the selected printer.

2. Download the project to Xpanel

3. Push "Print Screen " area.

FAQ 729


4. After a while, print completion message box is displayed.

28.4 How can I connect Xpanel and XpanelDesigner via USB portunder Windows Vista?

V1.19 or later version of Xpanel operating system supports Microsoft Windows Vista.

The most recent Xpanel operating system image is provided with XpanelDesigner.

If your current XpanelDesigner does not include V1.19 or later version of OS image, you need to upgrade

your XpanelDesigner first.

Please check the web-page (http://kdtsys.com/kor) for the new version of XpanelDesigner.

And "Windows Mobile Device Center" is needed for PC instead of "ActiveSync" which is used under previous

Windows version.

"Mobile Device Center" is abailable at http://www.microsoft.com/.

http://kdtsys.com/kor

http://www.microsoft.com/

CIMON-Xpanel730


28.5 How can I display the engineering value from the raw value in mydevice?

Xpanel provides two different method to calculate a scaled engineering data.

System designer can choose one of there two methods with the "Scale" option in TAG database.

If this option is checked, Xpanel performs 'Scale/Offset' method.

IN THIS TOPIC :

Scale / Offset Method Proportional Method

Scale / Offset Method

The 'Scale/Offset' method uses following formula for calculating the engineering value.

Veng = Vraw X Scale + Offset

Vraw Read data from device. Not processed, raw value from device.

Veng Engineering data. (The data which will be displayed in Xpanel's screen)

(Example 1) If an analog TAG was configured as following picture, and the Vraw from device is

32768,

FAQ 731


Veng = (32768 X 0.1) - 3276.8 = 3276.8 -3276.8 = 0

As shown in above example, the engineering data configurations (Min Value and Max Value) do not

affect the raw value processing.

But, in case of proportional method (if the 'Scale' option was not checked), the engineering data Min/

Max value configurations are important factors.

See the next following page.

Proportional Method

The 'Proportional Method' process the law value twice by using following formulas.

Scale = (Veng_max - Veng_min) / (Vraw_max - Vraw_min)

Offset = Vraw_min - Vraw_min

Veng = Vraw X Scale + Offset

Vraw Read data from device. Not processed, raw value from device.

Veng Engineering data. (The data which will be displayed in Xpanel's screen)

Vraw_max , Vraw_min Raw data rage configurations

Veng_max , Veng_min Engineering data range configurations

First, it calculates the scale and offset values from min/max configurations.

The calculated scale and offset values are applied to the same formula as 'Scale/Offset Method' for

acquiring the final engineering value.

(Example 2) If an analog TAG was configured as following picture, and the Vraw from device is

32768,

CIMON-Xpanel732


Scale = (3276.7 - (-3276.8)) / (65535 - 0) = 0.1

Offset = (-3276.8) - 0 = -3276.8

Veng = (32768 X 0.1) - 3276.8 = 3276.8 -3276.8 = 0

Note that above two examples gave the same result.

28.6 How can I export/import the Xpanel's TAG DB to/from MicrosoftExcel or other 3rd vender program?

The XpanelDesigner does not have a special menu for TAG DB exporting and importing.

However, the clipboard function of Windows can be used for the same purpose.

Use the "Copy" function of "Edit" menu while the TAG DB window is opened and some of TAGs in

DB are under selected state.

And next, activate the Microsoft Excel, and use "Paste" function of "Edit" menu. Following table can

be helpful to edit each TAG data in Excel worksheed.

CellTAG Type

RemarkGroup Digital Analog String

A TAG name (including the group name)

B 0 1 2 3 TAG type code

C TAG Description

D Real/Virtual TAG Flag0 = Virtual TAG

1 = Real TAG

FAQ 733


E I/O Device Name

F I/O Point Address

G Initial Value

H

I

Data TypeCode

(See note 1)

Length ofstring

J 0 (Reserved)

K

L 0 (Reserved)

MScale factor

flag

0 = Normal

1 = Use the scale factor

N Eng. data Min.

OEng. data

Max.

P Raw data Min.Scale factor when the scalefactor flag (M cell) was set

QRaw data

Max.Offset value when the scalefactor flag (M cell) was set

R Last value latch flag0 = Do not latch

1 = Do latch

S 0 (Reserved) 0 (Reserved) 0 (Reserved)

T 0 (Reserved) 0 (Reserved) 0 (Reserved)

U 0 (Reserved) 0 (Reserved)

V 0 (Reserved) 0 (Reserved)

W 0 (Reserved) 0 (Reserved)

Note 1) Data type code of analog TAG

Code Type Code Type

0 INT8 7 BCD16

1 INT16 8 BCD32

2 INT32 9 UBCD8

3 UINT8 10 UBCD16

4 UINT16 11 UBCD32

5 UINT32 12 FLOAT

6 BCD8

CIMON-Xpanel734


28.7 Corrective Actions when font file delete is failed during download

It is possible if error font file is downloaded to Xpanel.

Corrective Action 1

1. Click - [Online] -> [Setup Link]. Select the link type of Xpanel.

2. Click - [Online] -> [Download to Xpanel(PC->Xpanel)]

3. Uncheck - [Download The Font File] of "Download to Xpanel(PC->Xpanel)"

4. Click - [Ok]

Corrective Action 2

1. Close - Xpanel Program by [Exit] button of “Xpanel Config” window

FAQ 735


2. Two touch the [My Device] of this screen.

3. Two touch the [Xpanel]

CIMON-Xpanel736


4. Select the [Bin] folder. Delete the folder by touching [File] -> [Delete].

5. Select - [Ok] in the error window while deleting it.

6. When it is completed, reset the Xpanel.

FAQ 737


7. Close the warning massage by pressing [OK] button as follows.

8. Download project after connecting PC and Xpanel.

28.8 When Ethernet Loader is not operated

When Xpanel is not displayed in the Xpanel Found Window

1. It is possible to have a problem in the wire connection of communication cable. Please check the

communication cable like following pictures.



2 Orange Orange 2

3 Green/W Green/W 3

4 Blue Blue 4

5 Blue/W Blue/W 5

6 Green Green 6

7 Brown/W Brown/W 7

8 Brown Brown 8

CIMON-Xpanel738


<Direct Cable: Host <-> HUB : When Xpanel is connected with PC via the hub>



2 Orange Green 2


4 Blue Blue 4

5 Blue/W Blue/W 5

6 Green Orange 6

7 Brown/W Brown/W 7

8 Brown Brown 8

<Crossover Cable: Host <-> Host : When Xpanel is connected with PC via the cable>

2. In case of the connection with another PC of network, Xpanel doesn’t send its own IP information any

more.

After the end of Xpanel of another PC for 15~20 seconds, rebut Xpanel Designer and check its

condition of the connection.

3. In the condition of 1:1 connection with Xpanel, check the “Obtain an IP address automatically” in the IP

settings.

If it is set, its IP is assigned from DHCP server. if not, normal IP to PC would not be assigned and

Ethernet communication can’t work.

The network setting of PC can be confirmed by the under method.

Click - [Control Panel] -> [Network Connections]

FAQ 739


Select - [Local Area Connection] -> [Properties] by using the right button of mouse.

CIMON-Xpanel740


Click - [Internet Protocol(TCP/IP)] -> [Properties]

FAQ 741


In case of the direct connection with the equipment via the cross cable, IP address is not sent

automatically.

So, certainly, select “Use the following IP address” and input IP address, Subnet mask and Default

gateway.

Input the value of Subnet mask and gateway same with address registered to Xpanel, and input

different value referring the value of Subnet mask met to the network.

Ex) When Ethernet setting of Xpanel is as follows,

IP address : 100.100.100.10 / Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0 / Default gateway :

100.100.100.1

Register - PC as follows.

IP address : 100.100.100.xxx -> xxx is less than 255 except 0, 1, and 10.

Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0

Default gateway : 100.100.100.1

CIMON-Xpanel742


4. If Ethernet Loader program of Xpanel is closed, It will be not displayed in the item.

Do not close Ethernet Loader window when Xpanel is running.

If you close unfortunately, it can be restarted automatically by On/Off the power of Xpanel.

5. The Xpanel information frame can be intercepted by the firewall program set up in PC.

After closing a real time monitoring function and firewall program, restart Xpanel Designer and check its

action.

6. Ethernet Loader is supported in the Xpanel OS v2.00 or late.

After butting, you can check OS version at the System Log window of Xpanel Config.

FAQ 743


When program run fail or create fail message happens continually during project download

1. The connection of the cable is normal but the network setup could not be matched.

Referring 3.clauses described at the upper picture, check IP setup between PC and Xpanel.

2. It is possible to close Ethernet Loader program of Xpanel by mistake.

Click the [Exit] button at the “Xpanel config” for closing Xpanel project and check the Ethernet Loader

program described at the 4.clauses.

Ethernet connection test of PC and Xpanel

1. The network connection with Xpanel can be confirmed by an easy operation in PC.

2. Confirm the IP of the PC via IPCONFIG.

2.1 Select - [Start] -> [Run] on the PC.

2.2 Input “cmd” in the open of 'Run' window and click the [OK] button.

2.3 Command window is displayed.

CIMON-Xpanel744


2.4 Input “ipconfig” in the Command window and push the ‘Enter' key.

2.5 If the cable is connected, IP information setting to the PC is displayed on the monitor.

If not, "Media disconnected" message is displayed.

3. Ethernet communication connection test (Ping test)

3.1 Input "ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx " in Command window and push the ‘Enter' key. "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx " is a

IP of Xpanel.

Ex) Ping 172.16.106.52

3.2 If the network is connected normally, Request time is displayed on the monitor.

If not, "Request timed out" message is displayed.

Corrective Actions when Font File delete is failed during download

1. It is possible if error font file is downloaded to Xpanel.

2. Please take measures in the following order.

2.1 Close - Xpanel Program by [Exit] button of “Xpanel Config” window

FAQ 745


2.2 Two touch the [My Device] of this screen.

2.3 [Xpanel] folder is displayed.

2.4 Two touch the [Xpanel]

CIMON-Xpanel746


2.5 Select the "Bin" folder and remove folder by pressing button. Select - [Ok] in the error

massages while deleting it.

2.6 When it is completed, reset the Xpanel.

2.7 There will be the background picture and the warming massage not to find program.

2.8 Close the warning massage by pressing [OK] button and download project after connecting PC

and Xpanel.

Index 747


Index- A -Access Privilege 308

AddMessage 358

AlarmCsvWr 356

AlarmPrint 355

ALLENBRADLEY DF1 688

Analog TAG 104

Apply from alarms 370

Apply scroll message using script 370

ASIC Protocol 383

- B -Barcode Scanner 389

Blink 162

- C -CIMON SCADA 설정 300

ClearAlarmLog 358

ClosePort 346

Color 167

comm. monitor 61

comm.config 62

Command Script 319


Conditional Expression 319

Configuration Items 369

configuration tool 60

CONTINUE 324

- D -Danfoss 394

Data Bridge 200

Data Logger 193

Data Logging Configuration 193

database 97

Database Edit using EXCEL 108

Database Window 98

DataLog 336

date/time 68

DELTA TAU 406

Developing Environment Setup 45

digital tag 104

DirectNet 464

DO-WHILE 322

- E -Edit Data Bridge Model 200

Editing recipe data using system memory 230

EntryData 171

Essential Safety Precautions 32

Ethernet loader 737

Ethernet 통신 설정 114

Example of using system memory about openedpage log. 223

exit 74

- F -FAQ 714

FAQ_CorrectiveActions 734

FC300 394

FOR Statement 323

Frame Editor 139

FrameOpen 331

FR-E500 533

Fuji 639, 680

- G -General Safety Precautions 34

GetSecurity 353

GetSysMem 361

GetTime 332

GLOFA 412, 419, 469, 477, 484, 627

GOTO 324


Group TAG 103

- H -HardCopy 345

HITACHI Inverter SJ300/L300P 428

H-Move 165

CIMON-Xpanel748


How can I export/import the Xpanel's TAG DBto/from Microsoft Excel or other 3rd venderprogram 732

How to use Database 99

H-Size 163

- I -I/O 디바이스 설정 113

I/O디바이스 113

IF-ELSE 322

Installation / Dimensions 38

Interfaces 41

Internal Functions 326

IP설정 719

- K -KDT SYSTEM 437, 445

KDT Systems Xpanel Master 453

Keyence KV 459

keypad page 185

KOYO 464

- L -LcdBacklight 364

LcdBrightDown 363

LcdBrightUp 363

Library 143

LOG Trend 265

LogOff 352

LogOn 351

LogOnWin 352

LSIS 412, 419, 469, 484, 497, 529, 627

LS산전 477, 489

LS산전 Master-K S 시리즈 PLC Enet 521

LS산전 Master-K S 시리즈 PLC 로더 504

LS산전 Master-K S 시리즈 PLCCnet 509

LS산전Master-KH시리즈PLCCnet 515

- M -MakeCsv 334

MakeCsvUsb 335

MakeLogCsv 335

Melsec 1C 536

MELSEC 1E 551

Melsec 3E 546

Melsec 3E ASCII 557

Melsec A Series 563

Melsec FX Series 568, 573

Melsec Q Series 578

MELSEC_FX2N-1020GM 586

METRONIXAPD 694

MEWTOCOL-COM 601

misc,config 66

MITSUBISHI 533, 536, 546, 551, 557, 563,568, 573, 578

MODBUS 591, 596

ModelConfiguration 213

- N -NAIS 601

network 54

NumToStr 350

- O -Object Properties 158

OMRON 606, 612

OpenConfigWin 353

OpenPort 345

Operator 317

Overview 97

- P -Package 36

Page Properties 135

PageOpenS 331

Peripherals 53

PMAC 406

Printer 730

printer : printer setup 69

Printer 사용 방법 724

Project setup and download 91

- R -RcpConfig() 342

Index 749


RcpCsvRd 340

RcpCsvWr 341

RcpDownload 337

RcpFileRead 339

RcpFileStore 338

RcpGetSysMem 359

RcpMemDown 339

RcpMemUp 339

RcpSetSysMem 360

RcpStop 338

RcpUpload 337

ReceiveByte 348

Recipe 212

Recipe Operator Interface 217

RemoveMessage 359

RETURN 325

RK512/3964R 648

Rotate 167

RunApp 333

RUNSCRIPT 326

- S -SAIA S-BUS 631

Scope Trend 245

ScrCapture 344

screen captrure 68

Script 313

Scroll Message Setup 369

Scroll_Message 368

Security 306

SendByte 347

SendString 347

Serial 통신설정 117

SetDate(R1,R2,R3) 365

SetSpeed(R1) 365

SetTime(R1) 365

SIEMENS 648

SIEMENS S7 Ethernet 654

SIEMENS S7 MPI 659, 665

Sleep 345

SoftKeyboard 354

SPC Trend 251

Specification 37

ST Trend 258

Statements 321

StaticBeepCtrl(R1) 364

String Construction 280

String Editor 280

String TAG 107

StringTable 332

StrToNum 349

Structure of Program 313

Style 160

sw keyboard 69

SWITCH-CASE 323

SysMemFill 363

SysMemMove 362

system log 60

System Memory 221

System Overview 53

system shutdown 73

- T -tag 97

TimeStr 333

Touch 169

touch calibrate 67

TouchCalib 357

Trend 238

TrendCsvWr 343

- U -User Library 155

User LogOff 310

User LogOn 310

User Registration 306

Using Data Logging 197


Using System Memory Tag 221

- V -Visible 161

Vista 729

V-Move 164

V-Size 162

- W -WHILE 322

CIMON-Xpanel750


Wiring 44

- X -XGT 489, 497

Xpanel 13

xpanel Designer 55, 76, 86, 87, 97

Xpanel Project download 76

Xpanel unit 56

XpanelDesigner 13

Xpanel의 데이터 정의 299

XY Trend 271

- Y -YOKOGAWA 672

YT Trend 238

- Z -경보 122

경보그룹 122

경보설정 123

경보요약 128

다국어 287

다국어 테이블 사용하여 운전중 표시문자 변경하기 292

데이터서버 299

데이터업데이트 714

마법사 오브젝트 144

설치안내 32

속도개선 714

입력기 등록 287

키 입력 설정 189

키 입력창 189

키패드 185

페이지전환 714

한 페이지에서 다국어 문자열 표시하기 290

Endnotes 2... (after index)

751


Back Cover

xpanel designer users - anaheim automation

Documents